m 


lEx  Hthrta 

SEYMOUR  DURST 


-f '  Tort  nUmu  ^mAerJa-'m-      Je  H<rnh<itans 


When  you  leave,  please  leave  this  hook 

Because  it  has  heen  said 
" Ever'thing  comes  t'  him  who  waits 

Except  a  loaned  hook." 


Avery  Architectural  and  Fine  Arts  Library 
Gift  of  Seymour  B.  Durst  Old  York  Library 


y 


y 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2013 

http://archive.org/details/commonsenseofbicOOward 


WHEELIKG  FROM  THE  rEG-SHOW,NG  ,NCI..I.AT,ON  OF  ^VHKEL. 


The  Common  Sense  of  Bicycling 


Bicycling  for  Ladies 


With  Hints  as  to  the  Art  of  Wheeung— 
Advice  to  Beglxners— Dress— Care  of 
THE  Big  ycle  -  Meg  ha  nigs—  Tra  in- 
iNG— Energise,  Etg.,  Etg. 


MARIA  E.  WARD 


ILLUSTRATED 


BRENTANO'S 


CHICAGO 


Washington 


Paris 


105^ 


Copyright^  j8q6,  by 
BRENTANO'S 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES 


PREFACE 


I  HAVE  found  that  in  bicycling,  as  in  other  sports 
essayed  by  them,  women  and  girls  bring  upon  them- 
selves censure  from  many  sources.  I  have  also 
found  that  this  censure,  though  almost  invariably 
deserved,  is  called  forth  not  so  much  by  what  they 
do  as  the  way  they  do  it. 

It  is  quite  natural  to  suppose,  in  attempting  an 
unaccustomed  exercise,  that  you  have  to  do  only 
what  you  see  done  and  as  others  about  you  are  do- 
ing. But  to  attain  success  in  bicycling,  as  in  other 
things,  it  is  necessary  to  study  the  means  as  well  as 
to  look  to  the  end  to  be  attained,  and  to  understand 
what  must  not  be  attempted  as  well  as  to  know  each 
step  that  will  be  an  advance  on  the  road  to  progress. 

A  great  deal  has  been  said  against  attempting  to 
study  a  little  of  anything;  but  when  a  slight  knowl- 
edge of  several  important  branches  of  science  that 
bear  directly  upon  a  subject  under  consideration, 
and  that  a  subject  concerning  the  health  and  safety 
of  many  individuals,  will  render  one  intelligently 
self-dependent,  and  able  at  least  to  exercise  without 


X 


PREFACE. 


endangering  one's  own  health  or  the  lives  of  others, 
the  acquisition  of  such  knowledge  should  not  be  neg- 
lected. 

There  are  laws  of  mechanics  and  of  physiology 
that  directly  concern  the  cyclist;  it  has  been  the 
author's  aim  to  point  out  these  laws,  showing,  for 
instance,  the  possible  dangers  of  exercise,  and  how 
they  may  be  avoided  b}^  the  application  to  bicycle 
exercise  of  simple  and  well-known  physiological 
law^s,  thus  enabling  the  cyclist  to  resist  fatigue  and 
avoid  over-exertion.  The  needs  of  the  bicyclist  are 
an  intelligent  comprehension  of  the  bicycle  as  a  ma- 
chine, an  appreciative  knowledge  of  the  human  ma- 
chine that  propels  it,  and  a  realization  of  the  fact 
that  rider  and  bicycle  should  form  one  combined 
mechanism.  For  this,  a  knowledge  of  the  laws  that 
determine  the  limits  and  possibilities  of  both  me- 
chanisms is  necessary.  The  cyclist  is  limited,  not 
only  by  laws  physiological  and  laws  mechanical, 
which  determine  when  and  for  how  long  he  may 
travel,  but  he  is  restricted  by  the  laws  and  ordinances 
of  county,  town  and  village  as  to  how  and  where  he 
may  travel.  A  knowledge  of  these  laws  is  also 
necessary. 

While  not  attempting  to  treat  any  of  these  subjects 
exhaustively,  the  author  has  endeavored  to  place 
them  comprehensively  before  her  readers,  hoping  to 
prepare  the  enthusiast  to  enjoy  all  the  delights  of  the 
sport,  to  encourage  the  timid,  and  to  assist  the  in- 
experienced to  define  and  determine  existing  limita- 
tions. The  subject  of  the  care  of  the  bicycle  has 
been  carefully  treated,  some  of  the  means  at  hand 


PREFACE. 


xi 


suggested,  and  the  necessary  tool^and  their  uses  ex- 
plained. Other  topics  considered  are  how  the  bicy- 
cle is  propelled,  and  why  it  maintains  its  balance; 
what  the  cyclist  should  learn,  how  correct  form  may 
be  attained  and  faults  avoided,  and  what  should  be 
the  essential  features  of  the  clothing  worn. 

The  author  wishes  to  acknowledge  indebtedness  to 
Dr.  Legrange,  and  to  Messrs.  D.  Appleton  &  Co. 
for  their  permission  to  quote  from  "  Physiology  of 
Bodily  Exercise." 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS 


PAGE. 


CHAPTER  I. 

Possibilities     i 

CHAPTER  II. 

What  the  Bicycle  Does   8 

CHAPTER  III 

On  Wheels  in  General  and  Bicycles  in  Par- 
ticular   14 

CHAP  IE R  IV. 
For  Beginners    22 

CHAPTER  V. 

How  TO  Make  Progress   29 

CHAPTER  VI. 
Helping  and  Teaching;  What  to  Learn.  .....  37 

CHAPTER  VIE 
A  Few  Things  to  Remember   47 

CHAPTER  VIII. 

The  Art  of  Wheeling  on  a  Bicycle   56 

CHAPTER  IX. 
Position' AND  Power   71 


Xiv  CONTENTS  CONTINUED. 

CHAPTER  X. 

Difficulties  to  Overcome   82 

CHAPTER  XL 

Dress   93 

CHAP 'PER  XII. 
Watch  and  Cyclometer  100 

CHAPTER  XIII 

Women  and  Tools  112 

CHAPTER  XIV. 
Tools  and  How  to  Use  Them  118 

CHAPTER  XV.  ■ 
Solving  a  Problem  125 

CHAPTER  XVI. 
Where  to  Keep  a  Bicycle  138 

CHAPTER  XVII. 

Tires  145 

CHAPTER  XVIII. 

Mechanics  of  Bicycling  156 

CHAPTER  XIX. 

Adjustment   164 

CHAPTER  XX. 
Exercise  170 

CHAPTER  XXI. 
Training   175 

CHAPTER  XXII. 
Breathlessness;  The  Limit  Mechanical  189 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS 


Wheeling  from  the  Peg — Showing  In- 
clination OF  Wheel 

Correct  Position — Leaning  with  the 
Wheel  

Incorrect  Position — Leaning  Against 
the  Inclination  .... 

Proper  Way  to  Stand  a  Bicycle 

Carrying  the  Bicycle 

Picking  Up  a  Bicycle  .... 

Leading  a  Bicycle  About 

Preparing  to  Dismount 

Dismounting  

Correct  Pedaling  

Following  Pedal  

Lifting  

Back  Pedaling  

Back  Pedaling — Showing  Distribution 
OF  Weight  

Hill-Climbing — Pushing  Crank  Over  . 

Coasting  

Wheeling  One  Foot  Over  . 

Wheeling  from  the  Peg — Show^ing.  Dis- 
tribution OF  Weight 

Preparing  to  Mount  —  Showing  In- 
clination   


Frontispiece 

Opposite  Page  22 

"  24 
"  30 
"  32 

"  34 
.«  38 

"  40 

"  42 

"  56 

"  58 

"  60 

"  62 

-  64 
"  66 
^2 

"  74 
76 

"  82 


xvi 


LIST   OF   ILLUSTRATIONS — CONTINUED. 


Incorrect  Mounting  Position 
Mounting — Preparatory  Position 
Correct  Mounting  Position 
Mounting — Second  Position 
Dismounting  Over  the  Wheel 
Mounting  Over  the  Wheel  from  Peg 
Starting  a  Nut  .... 
Adjusting  a  Wrench 
Applying  Power  .... 
Screwing  Up  ..... 

Unscrewing  

♦  Preparing  to  Turn  Bicycle  Over 
Turning  the  Bicycle  Over  . 
The  Bicycle  Turned  Over  . 
Str-^vightening  the  Handle-Bars  . 


Opposite  Page  84 
86 

"  88 

"  90 

"  92 

"  94 

"  112 

"  116 

"  118 

"          "  120 

"          "  122 

"  126 

"  128 

"          "  130 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


CHAPTER  I. 
Possibilities. 

Bicycling  is  a  modern  sport,  offering  infinite 
variety  and  opportunity.  As  an  exercise,  at  present 
unparalleled,  it  accomplishes  much  with  compara- 
tively little  expenditure  of  effort;  as  a  relaxation,  it 
has  many  desirable  features;  and  its  limitless  possi- 
bilities, its  future  of  usefulness,  and  the  effect  of 
its  application  to  modern  economic  and  social  con- 
ditions, present  a  wide  field  for  speculation. 

Bicycling  possesses  many  advantages,  and  is  with  - 
in the  reach  of  nearly  all.  For  the  athlete  and  the 
sportsman,  it  opens  up  new  worlds;  for  the  family  it 
solves  problems;  for  the  tired  and  hurried  worker, 
it  has  many  possibilities.  The  benefits  to  be  de- 
rived from  the  exercise  cannot  be  ever-estimated 
and  the  dangers  that  result  from  over-doing  are  cor- 
respondingly great ;  for  it  is  easy  to  over-exert  when 
exhilarated  with  exercise  and  unconscious  of 
fatigue. 

It  is  but  recently  that  the  bicycle  has  become  a 
perfected  mechanism,  adaptable  to  general  usage, 


2 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


simple  and  scientific.  The  railroad  makes  possible 
direct  and  rapid  communication  between  widely 
separated  localities.  The  usefulness  of  the  bicycle 
begins  where  that  of  the  railroad  ceases,  for  it  con- 
nects and  opens  districts  of  country  that  the  railroad 
has  not  reached;  indeed,  it  is  to  the  bicycle  in  con- 
nection with  the  railroads  with  which  the  country  is 
gridironed  that  we  must  look  to  make  possible  the 
enjoyment  of  much  that  is  beautiful  and  valuable, 
but  otherwise  inaccessible.  To  the  naturalist,  the 
traveller,  and  the  intelligent  observer,  cycling  offers 
advantages  which  are  limited  only  by  time  and 
opportunity. 

Bicycling  has  been  adapted  to  serve  many  pur- 
poses; but  it  is  bicycling  as  an  athletic  exercise  and 
sport,  with  the  bicycle  propelled  by  human  power 
only,  that  we  shall  now  consider.  The  history  of  the 
bicycle  is  modern.  The  study  of  its  evolution  shows 
the  development  of  a  great  industry,  constantly  in- 
troducing and  applying  improvements;  most  impor- 
tant of  these  was  the  pneumatic  tire,  which  made 
bicycling  universally  possible. 

Getting  under  way  for  even  a  short  cruise  awheel 
has  some  of  the  features  familiar  to  the  yachtsman. 
To  the  skater,  the  motion  is  not  unlike  the  rapid, 
swaying  movement  on  the  ice,  the  silence  and  the 
rush  of  succeeding  strokes.  To  the  horseman,  the 
dissimilarity  of  the  two  modes  of  locomotion,  after 
the  settling  to  work  has  been  accomplished,  is  very 
striking.  For  the  uninitiated  and  for  some  others, 
bicycling  does  not  possess  attractions.  The  bicycle 
is  a  familiar  object,  not  compelling  a  second  thought. 


POSSIBILITIES. 


3 


One  reason  for  this  is  that  it  is  not  really  brought  to 
the  intelligent  notice  of  the  casual  passer.  The 
cyclist,  to  the  stationary  observer  or  the  compara- 
tively stationary  pedestrian,  is  such  a  fleeting  instan- 
taneosity  that,  unless  thrown  among  enthusiasts 
over  the  sport,  few  of  the  unenlightened  would  be 
tempted  to  try  it;  for  they  are  as  unappreciative  of 
what  the  wheel  means  to  the  cyclist  as  is  the  coun- 
tryman, who  lives  near  a  railway,  of  the  intricacies 
of  commerce  which  are  indicated  by  the  flying  mail. 

To  the  lover  of  out-door  life  the  bicycle  presents 
a  succession  of  wonderful  possibilities.  Much  has 
been  written  of  canoe-trips  and  of  the  charms  of 
cruising  among  our  inland  waters;  as  charming  and 
as  attractive  is  land  travel  on  the  wheel.  Bicycling, 
moreover,  combines  the  best  features  of  many  other 
sports  with  advantages  peculiar  to  it,  for  instance, 
the  cyclist  must  work,  and  there  is  much  pleasure  in 
watching  progress  made  with  so  little  effort — the 
work  all  his  own,  the  machine  but  a  means  of  loco- 
motion— enjoying  and  appreciating  all  the  beauties 
of  the  country  traversed,  while  yet  conscious  of  the 
power  to  hasten  away  as  soon  as  the  surroundings 
cease  to  interest  or  amuse.  By  the  scientist  and  the 
naturalist,  no  encouragement  is  needed;  the  bicycle 
at  once  ^compels  their  attention.  The  lover  of 
horses  may  fear  that  this  new  mode  of  locomotion 
may  interfere  with  his  sport — the  same  objection 
that  was  advanced  against  the  introduction  of  the 
steam  engine.  But  the  bicycle  does  not  displace;  it 
is  rather  a  link  in  the  chain  connecting  driving  and 
railroading.    Bicycling,  furthermore,   means  good 


4 


BICYCLIXG  FOR  LADIES. 


roads,  not  as  a  luxury,  but  as  a  necessity,  for  it  is 
impossible  without  them.  Rough  country  may  »be 
crossed,  but  the  bicycle  must  be  pushed  or  carried 
across  it,  and  this  is  not  practicable  for  any  consid- 
erable distance. 

The  bicycle,  though  a  simple  machine,  is  a  com- 
plicated mechanism  simplified.  The  principle  that 
keeps  it  from  falling  is  a  well-known  one — that  of 
the  gyroscope,  the  only  known  mechanism  that  over- 
comes gravity. 

The  bicycle  has  its  limits,  determined  by  the 
powers  of  its  rider  and  the  surface  ridden  over.  The 
motion  is  unquestionably  fascinating  after  the  con- 
trol of  the  machine  is  acquired;  and  there  is  an  ac- 
companying exhilaration  that  is  peculiar  to  the 
sport,  and  always  something  to  conquer,  something 
to  accomplish,  besides  the  direct  benefit  to  be  derived 
from  the  exercise. 

There  is  a  great  variety  of  methods  of  bicycling, 
whether  for  exercise,  transportation  or  travel.  In 
travelling,  the  country  all  about  soon  becomes,  as  it 
were,  your  own  domain.  Instead  of  a  few  squares, 
you  know  several  towms;  instead  of  an  acquaintance 
with  the  country  for  a  few  miles  about,  you  can 
claim  familiarity  with  two  or  three  counties;  an  all- 
day  expedition  is  reduced  to  a  matter  of  a  couple  of 
hours;  and  unless  a  break-down  occurs,  you  are  at 
all  times  independent.  This  absolute  freedom  of 
the  cyclist  can  be  known  only  to  the  initiated,  and 
as  proficiency  is  acquired,  it  becomes  a  most  at- 
tractive feature  of  the  sport. 

There  is  bicycling  weather,  as  there  is  skating 


POSSIHILiriES. 


5 


weather,  yachting  weather,  or  weather  favorable  for 
any  out-door  sport  or  exercise.  But  it  is  easy  to 
wait  for  bicycling  weather,  and  nothing  has  to  make 
way  for  it.  The  machine  is  always  ready,  and  that 
is  all  that  is  needed  if  a  suitable  country  is  acces- 
sible. On  the  road  the  bicyclist  is  rendered  inde- 
pendent of  assistance,  for  everything  needful  is  pre- 
pared for  him,  and  parts  and  repair  supplies  can  be 
carried  and  need  but  little  room.  Only  inattention 
or  carelessness  should  cause  delay.  Still,  proper 
preparation  is  essential  to  enjoy  bicycling  at  its  best, 
and  the  bicyclist  should  be  ready  to  meet  any  emer- 
gency. 

That  there  is  necessarily  the  element  of  sociability 
about  cycling  is  evident.  There  are  so  many  stops, 
and  the  dusty  wheelmen  grouped  among  their 
wheels  at  the  roadside  have  always  the  bond  of  a 
common  interest ;  from  this,  transition  to  individual 
fads  and  fancies  is  easy;  there  is  constant  opportu- 
nity for  acquiring  special  knowledge  and  for  using 
it;  and  almost  every  accomplishment  is  appreciated 
in  addition  to  capability  as  a  bicyclist,  and  may  be 
utilized  in  a  variety  of  ways;  cheerfulness  is  an  in- 
variable factor;  and  there  is  always  novelty  and  the 
possibility  of  excitement,  for  it  is  unusual,  on  a  bi- 
cycle trip,  that  everything  happens  as  it  is  expected 
or  has  been  planned  for. 

Too  much  cannot  be  said  of  the  benefits  to  be  de- 
rived from  out-door  exercise;  and  one  of  the  best 
features  of  bicycling  is  that  it  brings  so  many  to  en- 
joy out-door  life  who  would  otherwise  have  little  of 
either  fresh  air  or  exercise.    Proper  oxidation  is 


6 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


necessary  to  perfect  health.  The  great  danger  that 
these  would-be  bicyclists  must  face  is  unfamiliarity 
with  exercise,  either  general  or  special.  Persons  ac- 
customed to  athletic  exercise  know  how  to  prepare 
for  and  how  to  resist  fatigue,  know  what  practice 
means  and  how  proficiency  may  be  attained.  The 
bicyclist  unaccustomed  to  athletics  has  all  this  to 
learn,  and  more;  to  him,  ultimate  success  means 
more  time  given  to  study  and  less  time  to  practice. 
The  novice,  however,  has  the  advantage  that  he  has 
nothing  to  unlearn,  and  can  profit  by  the  experience 
of  others. 

To  accomplish  the  best  results,  the  human  ma- 
chine must  not  be  overworked;  and  to  stop  work  at 
the  right  moment  is  one  of  the  hardest  things  to 
learn,  and  the  most  important  to  success.  To  learn 
the  construction  of  a  bicycle,  the  particular  duties  of 
all  the  parts  and  their  adjustment,  is  a  matter  of 
memory  and  observation.  To  understand  the  adjust- 
ment of  the  human  machine  to  mechanical  environ- 
ment requires  cultivated  perception  and  special 
knowledge.  But  the  human  machine  is  so  indepen- 
dently adaptable,  so  hard  to  put  out  of  order,  that  it 
may  be  cared  for  by  intelligent  attention  to  only  a 
few  simple  laws.  Do  not  wait  for  danger  signals: 
know  how  to  avoid  them. 

Bicycling  opens  a  delightful  future  to  all  who  at- 
tempt it  intelligently.  The  inspiration  of  the  enthu- 
siast is  invaluable;  but  it  is  the  practical  theorist 
who  is  succesful. 

A  bright,  sunny  morning,  fresh  and  cool;  good 
roads  and  a  dry  atmosphere;  a  beautiful  country  be- 


POSSIBILITIES. 


7 


fore  you,  all  your  own  to  see  and  to  enjoy;  a  proper- 
ly adjusted  wheel  awaiting  you, — what  more  delight- 
ful than  to  mount  and  speed  away,  the  whirr  of  the 
wheels,  the  soft  grit  of  the  tire,  an  occasional  chain- 
clank  the  only  sounds  added  to  the  chorus  of  the 
morning,  as,  the  pace  attained,  the  road  stretches 
away  before  you! 


CHAPTER  11. 


What  the  Bicycle  "Does. 

The  bicycle  has  been  evolved — a  mechanism,  pro- 
pelled solely  by  human  power,  capable  of  quadru- 
pling the  distance  traversable  by  the  pedestrian. 

The  simple,  light,  and  almost  universally  ac- 
cepted machine  is  constructed  to  stand  a  strain  tre- 
mendous in  proportion  to  its  weight;  for  the  modern 
machine  weighs  only  twenty  pounds,  and  it  may  be 
lighter,  though  for  some  purposes  it  should  be 
heavier.  The  bicyclist  is  virtually  mounted  on  a 
set  of  casters,  which  propels  the  weight  with  much 
greater  ease  than  can  be  attained  in  the  act  of  walk- 
ing. In  walking,  advantage  is  taken  of  the  force 
of  gravity  by  continually  falling  forward,  and  simul- 
taneously placing  the  feet,  with  a  regular  motion, 
one  beyond  the  other,  to  alternately  receive  the 
weight  of  the  body.  On  the  bicycle,  the  weight  is 
carried  and  supported,  and  the  wheels  reduce  fric- 
tion to  a  minimum. 

The  wheel  being  set  in  motion,  power  is  applied 
to  overcome  inertia,  and  speed  is  increased  by 
multiplying  the  number  of  the  wheel's  revolu- 
tions; the  application  of  the  gyroscope  principle 
assists  materially,  and  the  resistance  of  gravity  is 


WIIAl    rUE  B  ICY  CLE  DOES. 


9 


overcome  in  a  degree  while  the  wheels  are  rapidly 
revolving. 

To  set  a  bicycle  in  motion  requires  the  expendi- 
ture of  considerable  power.  A  given  rate  of  speed 
on  the  level  may  be  maintained  by  a  minimum  ex- 
penditure of  power.  Bodies  or  masses  set  in  motion 
maintain  their  velocity  undiminished  unless  other 
forces  intervene.  The  bicycle  in  motion  is  resisted 
on  the  level  by  air  pressure  and  friction,  on  the 
roadway  by  friction,  and  by  the  incidental  obstacles 
of  the  road.  On  an  ascending  plane,  it  must  over- 
come the  additional  resistance  of  its  own  and  its 
rider's  weight,  which  must  be  lifted  constantly;  on 
a  descending  plane,  it  must  oppose  a  constantly  les- 
sening resistance.  All  this  resistance  and  lack  of 
resistance  means  a  proportionate  stress  laid  upon 
the  bicycle,  the  wheels  of  which  are  all  the  while 
kept  rapidly  revolving,  the  large  wheels  moving 
much  faster  than  the  cranks  and  pedals. 

Each  separate  part  of  a  bicycle  must  be  made 
capable  of  withstanding  a  certain  wear  and  strain, 
and  must  perform  its  own  particular  duties  and 
work  in  conjunction  with  all  other  parts  of  the 
machine.  To  this  end,  it  has  been  studied,  per- 
fected, tested;  its  weight  and  tensile  strength  calcu- 
lated to  a  nicety;  its  finish  and  adjustment  made 
matters  of  deep  thought  and  careful  investigation. 

Only  the  best  can  be  made  to  do  in  bicycle  manu- 
facture; each  piece  of  metal  must  be  separately 
tested,  and  the  maximum  of  strength  with  the  mini- 
mum of  weight  must  be  attained.  What  is  known 
as  the  safety  factor  enters  largely  into  the  construe- 


4 

iO  BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


tion  of  the  modern  bicycle;  that  is,  the  machine  is 
made  much  stronger  than  is  necessary  for  the  strain 
it  is  expected  to  withstand;  this  added  strength  in- 
volving of  course  the  added  weight  of  the  material 
which  supplies  it.  The  calculated  strength  of  a  ma- 
chine is  the  strength  which  fits  it  adequately  to  per- 
form its  work.  When,  as  in  the  bicycle,  the  accu- 
rate testing  by  skilled  workmen  proves  the  existence 
of  this  degree  of  strength,  the  safety  factor  mean- 
while being  reduced  to  the  lowest  possible  limit,  the 
product  is  the  perfected  result  of  the  highest  degree 
of  skill.  Each  part  is  tested  for  so  many  pounds 
strain  or  tension  or  compression,  and  each  strain  is 
accurately  figured  for  each  particular  part ;  each  part, 
moreover,  must  be  able  to  stand  so  much  additional 
strain,  more  than  it  is  ever  likely  to  have  thrown 
upon  it,  though  no  bicycle  is  built  to  withstand  the 
shock  of  collision  under  speed.  In  case  of  collision, 
the  older,  heavy  bicycle  was  not  smashed  into  frag- 
ments, as  is  the  modern  twenty-pounder.  Some- 
thing would  give  way,  perhaps;  it  might  break  in 
several  places.  The  light  modern  wheel  holds  to- 
gether or  is  crushed  to  pieces,  though  its  rider  is 
less  likely  to  suffer  serious  injury,  the  lighter 
construction  having  less  power  to  do  damage 
than  the  cumbrous  wheel  of  fifty  or  sixty  pounds 
weight. 

The  cost  of  a  well-made  bicycle,  of  perfect  work- 
manship and  finish,  represents  the  amount  of  skilled 
labor  required  to  construct  it  rather  than  the  value 
of  the  raw  material,  although,  when  it  is  remembered 
that  each  part  must  be  tough,  hard,  strong  and 


WHAT  THE  BICYCLE  DOES, 


elastic,  it  will  be  apparent  that  only  the  best  of 
material  can  be  used. 

Wheels  can  be  made  at  a  very  low  cost;  but  such 
wheels  cannot  be  correctly  adjusted  and  tested  with- 
out the  additional  cost  of  skilled  labor.  For  the  pro- 
duction of  a  perfect  bicycle,  the  machine  of  tested 
strength,  simplicity  of  detail,  and  beauty  of  finish, 
the  most  accurate  workmanship  as  well  as  the  best 
material  is  necessary.  A  machine  or  a  tool  should 
always  be  the  best  of  its  kind,  and  it  pays  to  take 
care  of  it.  A  bicycle  requires  as  nice  and  accurate 
adjustment  as  a  watch,  and  like  a  watch,  with  regular 
attention  afterwards,  will  run  steadily  and  smooth- 
ly. A  bicycle,  moreover,  as  much  or  more  than  a 
watch,  is  individual  property,  and  each  individual 
wants  the  best. 

Our  physical  powers  have  been  tested  in  certain 
directions;  in  walking,  for  instance,  we  know  what 
we  can  do,  how  far  we  can  go,  how  much  it  is  wise 
to  attempt.  The  bicycle  appeals  to  us  as  a  means 
of  swift  locomotion  attained  without  other  force 
than  our  own  powers  four  or  five  times  multiplied 
by  mechanical  processes.  The  bicycle  enables  one 
to  do,  to  prove  one's  powers;  it  puts  one  in  conceit 
with  one's  self.  When  one  is  not  a  pedestrian, 
does  not  care  for  equestrian  pleasures — and,  indeed, 
in  the  majority  of  cases,  there  is  little  to  compel  at- 
tention to  these  means  of  recreation — the  bicycle 
offers  the  opportunity  to  find  the  limit  of  one's 
powers  in  a  new  field.  It  supplies,  too,  a  new 
pleasure — the  pleasure  of  going  where  one  wills, 
because  one  wills.    The  attention  has  only  to  be  di- 


BICYCLIXG  FOR  LADIES. 


rected,  and  the  wheel,  responsive  to  touch  or 
thought,  moves  in  unison  with  the  rider's  will, 
flitting  hither  and  thither,  that  he  may  enjoy 
the  freshness  of  nature  and  the  ever-changing 
beauty  of  clouds  and  sky,  of  sunshine  and  shadow, 
of  meadow  and  sea,  lake  and  river,  mountain  and 
forest. 

Riding  the  wheel,  our  own  powers  are  revealed  to 
us,  a  new  sense  is  seemingly  created.  The  unobserv- 
ing  are  gradually  awakened,  and  the  keen  observer  is 
thrilled  with  quick  and  rare  delight.  The  system  is 
invigorated,  the  spirit  is  refreshed,  the  mind,  freed 
from  care,  swept  of  dusty  cobwebs,  is  filled  with 
new  and  beautiful  impressions.  You  have  con- 
quered a  new  world,  and  exulting ly  you  take  pos- 
session of  it. 

Travelling  by  vehicle  or  by  any  public  convey- 
ance, the  sense  of  individual  responsibility  is  re- 
duced to  the  minimum;  it  is  indeed  no  appreciable 
factor.  You  pay  so  much  to  be  taken  up  and  set 
down,  so  much  for  a  reasonable  amount  of  safety, 
comfort,  and  convenience.  Mounted  on  a  wheel, 
you  feel  at  once  the  keenest  sense  of  responsibility. 
You  are  there  to  do  as  you  will  within  reasonable 
limits;  you  are  continually  being  called  upon  to 
judge  and  to  determine  points  that  before  have  not 
needed  your  consideration,  and  consequently  you 
become  alert,  active,  quick-sighted,  and  keenly  alive 
as  well  to  the  rights  of  others  as  to  what  is  due  your- 
self. You  are  responsible  to  yourself  for  your- 
self; you  are  responsible  to  the  public  for  your- 
self;  and  you  are  responsible  to   the  public  for 


IV II A  7'  THE  BICYCLE  DOES. 


13 


the  rights  of  others.  The  upholding  of  laws 
and  ordinances,  the  general  welfare,  public 
health  and  safet}^ — problems  never  before,  per- 
haps, called  to  your  attention — come  up  one  by 
one  for  consideration.  In  short,  individual  duty, 
recognition  of  the  rights  of  others,  consideration  of 
means  for  the  proper  enforcing  of  laws,  all  are  sug- 
gested to  the  awakening  mind  of  the  bicyclist.  The 
bicycle  is  an  educational  factor,  subtle  and  far-reach- 
ing, creating  the  desire  for  progress,  the  preference 
for  what  is  better,  the  striving  for  the  best,  broaden- 
ing the  intelligence  and  intensifying  love  of  home 
and  country.  For  all  that  is  beautiful  is  ours — ours 
to  protect  and  to  cherish. 

To  the  many  who  earnestly  wish  to  be  actively  at 
work  in  the  world,  the  opportunity  has  come;  they 
need  but  to  come  face  to  face  with  it  to  solve  this 
problem  of  something  to  conquer,  something  to 
achieve. 


CHAPTER  III. 


On  Wheels  in  General  and  Bicycles  in  Particular. 

The  form  of  the  wheel  is  ver}^  ancient,  its  con- 
struction modern,  even  recent.  Its  evolution  has 
been  gradual.  First  came  the  round  stick  or  roller, 
placed  beneath  a  weight;  then  a  roller  with  its  cen- 
tral portion  shaped  and  thinned  to  lessen  friction; 
then  two  disk-shaped  sections  of  a  log,  connected  by 
a  bar  upon  which  they  revolved,  replaced  the  clumsy 
stick. 

Each  wheel  or  disk  then  began  to  receive  separate 
attention.  There  was  the  wear  on  the  edge  or  rim 
to  be  considered,  and  it  was  found  that  if  its  surface 
were  protected,  the  disk  would  last  indefinitely  long- 
er. Then  it  was  noticed  that  the  hole  in  the  centre 
of  the  disk  wore  unevenly,  and  it  was  reinforced, 
and  the  hub  began  to  take  form.  When  the  rim  was 
strong  and  the  central  portion  of  the  wheel  remained 
intact,  the  disk  was  found  to  be  heavier  and  stronger 
than  it  need  to  be  to  support  the  outer  portion  of  the 
wheel.  Some  of  the  useless  heavy  part  was  removed, 
and  the  disk  pierced  with  holes  to  make  it  lighter; 
then  these  holes  were  shaped  between  the  remaining 
portions,  which  took  the  form  of  pillars  or  spokes. 
A  pillar  would  break,  and  be  replaced  by  a  rounded 


IV HEELS  IX  GENERAL. 


15 


Stick;  and  thus,  perhaps,  the  rude  idea  took  form  of 
constructing  a  wheel  out  of  several  pieces,  for  the 
sake  of  securing  economy,  durability,  and  lightness. 

A  wheel,  then,  was  well  constructed,  with  a  large, 
heavy  piece  in  the  centre  to  stand  friction  and  bear 
weight,  and  with  the  rim  made  of  several  pieces,  each 
piece  supported  on  a  spoke,  and  all  held  together  by 
a  band  called  a  tire.  In  the  course  of  time  the  hub 
became  heavier,  the  spokes  thinner,  the  rim  strong- 
er and  lighter,  and  the  tire  narrower.  The  bar  con- 
necting two  wheels  was  made  very  strong,  with 
smooth  ends  for  the  wheels  to  revolve  easily  upon. 
Pins  were  driven  into  holes  in  the  projecting  ends 
of  the  axle,  or  bar,  and  later  the  pins  replaced  by 
knobs,  or  nuts.  Then  the  wheels  were  brought 
closer  together,  and  found  to  run  more  easily;  and 
the  tire,  cutting  too  deep  into  soft  surfaces,  was 
widened.  Attention,  moreover,  was  paid  to  the  road- 
wa5^  very  bad  places  being  filled  and  smoothed. 

A  wheel  is  defined  as  "a  circular  frame  turning 
on  an  axle";  an  axle  as  "a  shaft  or  rod,  either  solid 
or  hollow,  on  which  a  wheel  is  placed."  The  first 
bicycle  wheels  were  constructed  like  carriage  wheels, 
the  limit  of  that  method  of  construction  arrived  at. 
The  rim  was  supported  on  the  spokes,  which  rested 
on  the  hub.  The  minimum  definite  quantity  of  ma- 
terial was  ascertained,  but  the  wheel  was  still  too 
heavy  and  bulk3\  If  the  weight  of  material  was  les- 
sened, however,  it  would  fall  to  pieces. 

The  bic3^cle  wheel  of  to-day  is  a  compound  mechan- 
ism constructed  on  reverse  principles.  The  wheel 
is  made  on  the  principle  of  suspension,  an  inverted 


i6 


JUCYCL/.YG  J' OA'  LADIES. 


application  of  weight  and  thrust.  The  hub  is  hung 
from  the  rim,  and  the  axle  supported  in  that  way. 
Each  bicycle  wheel  is  really  two  wheels,  graceful  in 
form,  with  but  one  rim,  and  with  two  hubs,  one  on 
either  end  of  a  short  axle,  the  spokes  being  drawn 
to  a  common  rim,  and  made  stiff  enough  to  carry 
weight,  and  elastic  enough  to  withstand  shock. 
The  rim  or  frame  is  elastic  and  durable.  To  this 
rim  many  wire  spokes  are  fastened,  and  the  hubs 
for  each  wheel  are  centred  and  hung  from  them. 
The  hubs  and  axle  are  wider  than  the  rim  of  the 
wheel,  and  the  spokes  are  fastened  alternately  to 
either  end,  thus  giving  a  tangent  strain  which 
stiffens  the  wheel  and  gives  it  strength.  The  tire  is 
a  separate  construction,  possessing  several  individual 
features.  The  onl}^  ofBce  of  the  old  tire  was  to  pro- 
tect the  rim  of  the  wheel  from  wear;  the  pneumatic 
tire  protects  the  rim,  presents  a  good  friction  sur- 
face, and  is  enabled  by  its  elasticity  to  take  the  shock 
and  jar  of  the  entire  bicycle. 

In  order  that  the  wheel  may  turn,  the  axle  must 
be  lubricated;  otherwise  the  inside  of  the  hub  will 
become  hot,  and  wear  the  face  of  the  axle  a  little 
rough.  The  surfaces  then  cannot  pass,  but  remain 
fixed  and  immovable,  and  the  wheel  cannot  turn. 
The  introduction  of  a  third  material  of  a  different 
consistency  between  the  revolving  surfaces  prevents 
their  wearing  against  each  other,  and  the  lubricant 
is  rubbed  and  rubbed  again;  there  is  so  little  of  the 
lubricant  that  it  does  not  accumulate  sufficiently  to 
cause  resistance,  and  the  moving  surfaces  slip 
smoothly  over  each  other. 


WHEELS  EV  GENERAL. 


17 


The  axle  of  a  modern  bicycle  wheel  is  compound, 
and  although  there  are  two  ends  to  the  axle,  there  is 
but  one  rim  to  the  wheel.  The  rim  carries  all  the 
weight  distributed  from  many  points  at  once;  the 
weights  resist  each  other,  and  give  strength  and 
stiffness.  The  axle  really  carries  double,  two 
wheels  with  but  one  rim;  and  each  end  of  the  axle 
is  supported  at  so  many  points  that  it  possesses 
great  weight-carrying  power  in  proportion  to  the 
weight  of  material  used  in  its  construction.  The 
weight  of  the  frame  is  supported  on  the  axles  of  the 
rear  and  front  wheels.  Of  its  construction  it  is  suffi- 
cient to  say  that  the  weight  is  taken  up  on  the 
thrust  principle  and  that  wherever  a  point  of  sup- 
port for  the  thrust  is  located,  the  frame  is  strength- 
ened to  support  and  resist  the  thrust. 

By  a  mechanical  application  of  power,  the  power 
of  the  pressure  of  the  foot  on  the  pedal  is  multiplied, 
one  revolution  of  the  pedal  crank  causing  the  rear 
wheel  to  revolve  a  number  of  times.  In  the  chain 
gear  the  mechanical  means  is  a  large  wheel  on  the 
axle  to  which  the  pedal  cranks  are  attached,  and  a 
smaller  wheel  on  the  axle  of  the  rear  wheel.  There 
are  teeth  on  both  these  wheels,  the  large  wheel  hav- 
ing the  greater  number.  The  band  or  chain  passing 
over  the  large  sprocket-wheel  has  links  which  en- 
gage each  tooth  of  the  wheel  as  the  chain  passes 
over  it,  and  as  that  wheel  revolves,  it  pulls  the 
chain  over,  link  by  link. 

The  small  wheel  is  also  provided  with  teeth,  and 
every  time  the  large  sprocket-wheel  is  turned,  if 
only  a  little  way,  it  pulls  the  chain  link  by  link,  and 


i8 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


the  chain  link  by  link  pulls  the  rear  wheel  tooth  by 
tooth.  The  small  sprocket-wheel  revolves  as  the 
chain  pulls  it,  revolving  oftener  than  the  large  wheel 
to  keep  count  with  it  tooth  for  tooth.  The  number 
of  teeth  on  the  sprocket-wheels  determines  the  multi- 
plicity of  revolutions  of  the  rear  wheel. 

The  rear  wheel  revolves  very  rapidly,  in  the  pro- 
cess becoming  virtually  a  gyroscope;  and  a  gyro- 
scope will  maintain  the  plane  in  which  it  revolves 
unless  other  forces  intervene.  The  front  wheel 
takes  its  motion  from  the  friction  of  the  surface  over 
which  it  is  propelled,  and  after  the  bicycle  is  in  mo- 
tion, the  forces  that  are  applied  to  control  and  direct 
its  movement  are  friction  and  resistance.  After  the 
C3^clist  is  mounted,  there  is  the  added  complication 
of  a  constantly  shifting  centre  of  gravity,  caused  by 
change  of  balance.  The  steering  is  effected  by 
changing  the  direction  of  the  front  wheel,  the  rear 
wheel  being  enabled  to  follow  by  a  slight  slipping 
over  the  wheeling  surface.  If  the  change  of  direc- 
tion is  too  abrupt,  the  rear  wheel  will  slip  enough 
to  lose  its  hold  on  the  surface,  and  the  weight  of 
the  rider  will  be  suddenly  shifted  from  above  the 
point  of  support  (the  axle  of  the  rear  wheel)  to  the 
top  of  the  rim  of  the  wheel,  thus  becoming  a  lever 
with  the  weight  on  the  end  of  the  long  arm,  and  the 
bicycle  falls  over. 

As  the  wheels  revolve,  there  is  a  constant  pull  on 
tire  and  rim.  Just  as  the  chain  is  pulled  over  the 
sprocket-wheels,  the  tire  is  pulled  by  friction  over 
the  surface  ridden  on.  If  this  surface  affords  the 
tire  no  hold,  it  is  impossible  for  the  wheel  to  ad- 


WHEELS  EV  GENERAL. 


19 


vance,  as  on  a  muddy  surface.  The  crank  may  im- 
part a  motion  to  the  wheel,  but  this  motion  will  not 
enable  the  wheel  to  maintain  its  place;  or  if,  in 
overcoming  the  cranks  at  the  dead  centre,  too  much 
weight  is  applied  to  one  side  of  the  wheel,  the  same 
thing  occurs,  and  the  wheel  falls  over.  There  are  a 
number  of  mechanical  means  for  conveying  the  mo- 
tion of  the  foot  to  the  wheel  of  the  bicycle  to  cause 
the  wheels  to  revolve. 

There  are  many  ways  of  constructing  a  frame, 
and  different  designs  and  patterns  of  fittings  for 
different  parts;  but  the  main  idea  of  the  bicycle  does 
not  change — a  fixed  wheel  to  which  motion  is  im- 
parted, and  a  movable  or  guiding  wheel,  indepen- 
dent of  the  power  wheel,  and  revolving  only  because 
the  machine  is  pushed  or  pulled  forward.  This 
second  wheel  gives  stability,  and  supports  the  wheel 
at  a  movable  point. 

We  have,  therefore,  a  wheel  which  supports  a 
frame  and  the  weight  it  carries.  The  frame  is  sup- 
ported on  two  wheels,  one  end  of  the  frame  taking 
the  w^eight,  and  that  end  supported  on  one  wheel. 
The  second  wheel  merely  supports  one  end  of  the 
frame.  If  the  frame  were  attached  at  one  end  di- 
rectly and  rigidly  to  the  second  wheel,  the  weight 
carrying  wheel  would  move  in  the  same  plane  with 
it.  A  child's  two-wheeled  cart  wall  illustrate  this. 
While  moving  forward  in  a  straight  line,  the  child  is 
safe  until  one  or  both  of  the  wheels  begin  to  travel 
in  a  rut,  when  the  rigid  handle  or  tongue  of  the  cart 
resists  the  guiding  power,  and  the  child  is  pulled  or 
thrown  over.    If  the  tongue  or  frame  of  the  wagon 


20 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


is  allowed  play,  as  it  is  called,  say  by  being  held 
easily  in  the  hand,  the  pole  may  be  guided.  The 
supported  end  of  the  frame  of  the  bicycle  corres- 
ponds to  the  pole  or  tongue  of  the  cart. 

Now,  the  wheel  is  made  to  steer  in  this  way: 
We  have  the  rigid  forks,  and  a  wheel  to  support 
them.  The  forks  hold  the  wheel  in  the  same  plane 
as  themselves,  but  the  top  part  of  each  fork,  instead 
of  being  fastened  immovably  to  the  frame,  passes 
up  through  a  bearing-head  prepared  for  it  in  the 
frame.  The  wheel  is  supported,  but  it  can  now 
maintain  a  separate  plane,  and  as  the  post  of  the 
forks  changes  its  direction,  it  pulls  the  frame  with 
it  as  it  advances;  and  so  the  controlling  or  steering 
power  is  transferred. 

The  weight-bearing  wheel  is  led  and  directed; 
part  of  its  power  is  transferred  by  thrust  or  push  to 
the  front  wheel,  and  as  the  steering  wheel  is  pushed 
over  the  surface,  it  revolves.  As  it  revolves,  part  of 
its  power  is  diverted  by  the  movable  head,  and  as 
the  head  is  held  and  controlled  by  the  rider,  any  de- 
sired direction  may  be  imparted  to  the  entire 
machine. 

A  bicycle  may  have  either  a  diamond  frame  or  a 
drop  frame.  The  drop  frame  is  made  to  facilitate 
mounting  and  to  permit  the  adjustment  of  a 
woman's  dress.  The  diamond  frame  possesses  great 
strength,  and  can  be  lightened  to  a  wonderful  degree 
without  injury  to  the  thrust  and  strain-bearing 
quality  of  its  construction. 

A  form  of  triangle  is  made  use  of  to  carry  the 
greatest  weight  and  bear  the  greatest  strain.  This 


W hp: ELS  /.V  GEl^ERAL. 


21 


triangle  is  supported  on  the  rear  wheel,  and  has  part 
of  the  frame  attached  to  it  to  connect  it  with  the 
steering-wheel.  The  steering-wheel  is  provided 
with  handles  by  which  it  may  be  controlled.  The 
weight  of  the  rider  is  carried  over  the  power  wheel, 
and  the  propelling  power,  a  lever  movement,  is  im- 
parted by  the  foot. 

From  this  description  an  idea  may  be  formed  of 
how  and  why  a  bicycle  works;  but  the  details  of  its 
mechanism  are  of  endless  variety  of  form  and  pat- 
tern, material  and  workmanship.  Each  small  part, 
its  form,  its  use,  its  angles  of  surface,  its  every  de- 
tail indeed,  is  the  product  of  the  work  of  many 
minds  for  many  years.  And  though  the  bicycle  was 
looked  for,  and  hoped  for,  and  worked  for,  its 
general  acceptance  came  suddenly,  and  came  only 
when  it  had  been  built  light  enough  and  strong 
enough  and  elastic  enough  to  warrant  confidence  in 
its  universal  usage. 


CHAPTER  IV. 


For  Beginners. 

Mount  and  away!  How  easy  it  seems.  To  the 
novice  it  is  not  as  easy  as  it  looks,  yet  everyone,  or 
almost  everyone,  can  learn  to  ride,  though  there  are 
different  ways  of  going  about  it.  Unless  the  begin- 
ner is  one  of  those  fortunate  beings  who  mount,  and 
as  it  were,  wheel  at  sight,  little  need  be  said  about 
instruction  at  this  stage  of  proceedings  if  a  bicycle 
school  is  within  reach.  A  few  suggestions  may  be 
desirable,  however,  even  with  a  competent  in- 
structor. 

Nothing  more  quickly  exhausts  one's  strength 
than  the  first  few  minutes  with  a  bicycle.  This  is 
due  to  the  fact  that  many  unused  muscles  are  called 
upon  to  do  unaccustomed  work  and  to  w^ork  together 
in  new  combinations;  and  the  effort  required  and 
the  accompanying  nervous  excitement  produce  a 
sudden  and  apparently  unaccountable  fatigue.  Nor- 
mal conditions  can  be  restored  by  resting  long 
enough  to  allow  repair  of  the  wasted  tissues.  It  is 
well  to  stop  when  a  little  tired,  rather  than  to  persist 
and  finish  the  lesson,  even  if  extra  lessons  are  neces- 
sary to  make  up  for  lost  time.  No  one  can  really 
learn  anything  when  tired,  and  it  is  unwise  to  at- 


CORRECT  POSITION— LEANING  WITH  THE  WHEEL. 


FOR  BKC/yNERS. 


23 


tempt  it.  In  this  matter  no  one  else  can  judge  for 
you. 

What  a  horrible  moment  it  is  when  first  mounted 
on  a  bicycle,  a  mere  machine,  a  thing  quite  beyond 
your  control,  and  unable  even  to  stand  by  itself. 
But  it  is  impossible  to  tell  without  trying  whether 
or  not  you  can  manage  a  bicycle.  Make  the  experi- 
ment, therefore,  and  find  out.  Any  competent 
teacher  will  guarantee  success,  and  after  the  first 
five  minutes  on  the  bicycle  can  tell  how  long  it  will 
take  you  to  learn.  The  time  varies  with  the  indi- 
vidual; the  period  of  instruction  may  last  for  five 
minutes  or  for  six  months,  without  counting  extra 
lessons  for  fancy  wheeling. 

Don't  try  to  get  the  better  of  your  wheel.  You 
cannot  teach  it  anything,  and  there  is  really  much 
for  you  to  learn. 

What  to  keep  in  mind  zvhen  taking  your  lesson. — 
Attend  to  the  bicycle  and  to  nothing  else.  Don't 
attem.pt  to  talk,  and  look  well  ahead  of  the  machine, 
certainly  not  less  than  twenty  feet.  Remember 
that  the  bicycle  will  go  wherever  the  attention  is 
directed. 

In  sitting  upon  the  wheel,  the  spinal  column 
should  maintain  the  same  vertical  plane  that  the 
rear  wheel  does,  and  should  not  bend  laterally  to 
balance  in  the  usual  manner.  A  new  balance  must 
be  acquired,  and  other  muscular  combinations  than 
those  that  are  familiarly  called  upon.  To  wheel  by 
rule  is  the  better  plan  until  the  natural  balance  of 
the  bicyclist  is  developed.    Sit  erect  and  sit  still. 

The  bicycle  must  be  kept  from  falling  by  a  wig- 


24 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


gling  movement  of  the  front  wheel,  conveyed  by 
means  of  the  handle-bar.  When  moving,  the  rapidly 
revolving  wheels  maintain  the  vertical  plane  by  ro- 
tation, with  but  little  assistance  or  correction  from 
the  handle-bars. 

It  is  a  good  plan,  while  the  instructor  assists  you, 
to  pedal  with  one  foot  at  a  time,  holding  the  other 
foot  free.  This  will  enable  you  to  determine  the 
amount  of  pressure  it  is  necessary  to  exert  to  cause 
the  wheels  to  revolve. 

When  both  feet  are  on  the  pedals,  they  oppose 
each  other.  The  weight  should  be  lifted  from  the 
ascending  pedal,  or  else  the  descending  foot  must 
push  the  other  foot  up  until  that  foot  is  in  position 
to  exert  a  downward  pressure.  This  instruction  ap- 
plies to  forward  pedaling  only;  for  back  pedaling  or 
backing,  the  movement  should  be  reversed.  Prac- 
tise pushing  first  with  one  foot  and  then  with  the 
other,  taking  the  weight  off  the  opposite  pedal  in 
each  case.  At  each  push  of  the  pedal,  a  little  pull 
on  the  handle-bars,  pulling  with  the  hand  on  the 
same  side  on  which  you  are  pushing  with  the  foot, 
will  keep  the  wheel  from  falling.  Look  well  ahead. 
The  bicycle  covers  the  ground  very  rapidly,  and  the 
eye  does  not  at  first  receive  impressions  quickly 
enough  to  enable  you  to  know  where  to  look  and 
what  to  look  for. 

As  soon  as  your  teacher  will  allow  it,  take  the 
wheel  for  a  little  walk.  This  may  seem  rather  an 
absurd  proceeding,  but  it  will  assist  you  greatly  in 
learning  the  feel  and  tendencies  of  the  machine. 
Lead    the    bicycle    about   carefully,    holding  the 


INCORRECT  POSITION— LEANING  AGAINST  THE  INCLINATION 


FOR  BEGINNERS. 


25 


handles  with  both  hands  and  avoiding  the  revolving 
pedals.  Learn  to  stand  it  up,  to  turn  it  quickly,  and 
to  back  it  in  a  limited  space. 

The  machine  heretofore  has  been  arranged  for  you. 
Now  you  can  begin  to  think  how  you  would  like  to 
have  it  adjusted.  You  will,  perhaps,  find  fault  with 
the  saddle.  The  saddle  is  a  very  important  adjunct, 
and  much  depends  upon  its  proper  adjustment.  A 
large,  soft  saddle  is  usually  preferred  by  the  begin- 
ner, and  perhaps  this  is  a  good  kind  to  learn  to 
balance  on;  but  it  is  a  very  poor  kind  to  wheel  on, 
for  many  reasons. 

At  first,  in  practising  pedaling,  the  height  of  the 
saddle  should  permit  the  hollow  of  the  foot  to  rest 
firmly  on  the  pedal  when  the  pedal  is  lowest.  The 
ball  of  the  foot  only  should  press  on  the  pedal.  The 
foot  should  be  made  to  follow  the  pedal  as  early  as 
possible.  Point  the  toe  downward  on  the  last  half 
of  the  down  stroke,  and  keep  pointing  it  until  the 
pedal  is  at  its  lowest,  following  the  pedal  with  the 
foot,  and  pointing  downward  until  the  pedal  is  half 
way  on  the  up  stroke.  This  carries  the  crank  past 
the  dead  centre.  To  acquire  a  proper  method,  atten- 
tion should  be  directed  to  each  foot  alternately. 

To  learn  to  balance,  have  the  saddle  raised  as  high 
as  possible,  so  that  the  ball  of  the  foot  just  touches 
the  pedal  at  its  lowest.  Practise  wheeling  in  this 
way,  with  an  instructor,  or  alone  on  a  smooth  sur- 
face where  you  are  sure  to  be  undisturbed. 

The  hands  naturally  take  a  position  where  it  is 
easy  to  grasp  the  handles  of  the  handle-bars.  The 
handle-bar  conveys  two  principal  movements  to  the 


26 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


first  wheel — a  short  wiggling  movement  and  a  long 
or  steering  sweep.  The  handle-bars  also  assist  in 
maintaining  the  seat  at  first. 

The  beginner  usually  exerts  too  much  pressure 
on  the  pedals,  and  has  to  pull  correspondingly  hard 
on  the  handles  to  correct  the  falling  tendency  of  the 
machine.  This  is  very  hard  work,  and  stiff  arms  and 
shoulders  and  blistered  hands  may  be  often  thus  ac- 
counted for;  they  are  the  result  of  badly  balanced 
pedaling.  To  be  able  to  sit  comfortably  at  work, 
and  to  feel  that  it  is  not  so  hard  after  all,  is  a  great 
advance. 

Now,  the  question  of  that  other  foot.  By  this  time 
which  *'the  other  foot"  is  will  have  become  quite 
evident;  it  is  always  the  foot  to  which  attention  for 
the  moment  is  not  directed,  and  which  consequently 
may  meet  unexpected  disaster — a  lost  pedal,  per- 
haps, with  its  accompanying  inconveniences. 

Downward  pressure  with  the  foot  is  easily  ac- 
quired and  needs  little  effort.  To  take  the  pressure 
off  the  ascending  pedal  at  the  right  moment  is  a 
more  difficult  matter.  Usually  considerable  practice 
in  cycling  is  necessary  before  the  unused  lifting 
muscles  are  strengthened  sufficiently  by  exercise  to 
permit  them  to  do  their  work  easily. 

There  is  a  third  movement  of  the  handle-bars — a 
quick  twist  in  the  direction  the  machine  is  leaning 
if  about  to  fall;  it  is  made  suddenly,  and  brings  the 
wheel  back  to  its  original  position.  If  the  w^heel 
were  stationary,  and  the  front  wheel  were  turned, 
the  bicycle  would  fall  in  an  opposite  direction  from 
the  front  wheel.    If  the  wheel  is  about  to  fall,  it  can 


FOR  BRGIMNERS. 


27 


be  prevented  from  doing  so  by  throwing  the  balance 
the  other  way  by  means  of  the  handle-bars.  A 
similar  result  is  accomplished  by  wiggling  the  front 
wheel,  and  when  a  bicycle  is  moving  very  slowly,  a 
continuous  wiggle — changing  the  balance  as  the  ma- 
chine inclines  from  side  to  side — is  necessary  to 
keep  it  upright. 

The  body  should  incline  with  the  rear  wheel  and 
maintain  the  same  plane  with  it,  becoming  as  much 
as  possible  a  part  of  the  wheel,  as  though  united  by 
a  straight  bar  going  from  the  base  of  the  tire  to  the 
top  of  the  head. 

The  rear  wheel  and  all  the  weight  that  it  carries  is 
governed  by  the  front  wheel  and  controlled  by 
means  of  the  handle-bars.  The  rear  wheel  support- 
ing all  the  rider's  weight,  the  power  is  applied  to 
that  wheel.  The  front  wheel  serves  only  for  balance 
and  steering. 

It  is  not  necessary  to  provide  a  complete  outfit  to 
take  the  first  lesson.  If  you  possess  a  pair  of  knick- 
erbockers, so  much  the  better.  Wear  an  old  dress, 
easy  shoes  and  gloves,  and  a  hat  that  will  stay  on  un- 
der any  conditions.  The  clothing  should  be  as  loose 
as  possible  about  the  waist.  Wear  flannels,  and  no 
tight  bands  of  any  kind  or  anything  elastic.  As 
respiration  is  increased  b}^  the  exercise,  the  cloth- 
ing should  be  loose  enough  to  allow  of  a  long  deep 
breath,  drawn  easily,  taken  by  expanding  the  chest 
at  the  lower  ribs  to  fill  the  lungs.  This  precaution 
being  taken,  giddiness  and  short-windedness  can  re- 
sult only  from  over-exercise.  Ten  or  fifteen 
minutes*  practise  is  enough  at  first;  and  a  half 


28 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


hour's  lesson  later,  with  several  stops  for  rest,  is  the 
best  rule  for  many  people,  particularly  those  unac- 
customed to  active  exercise. 

If  you  are  an  equestrian,  you  will  meet  with  many 
unexpected  problems.  The  bicycle  will  do  nothing 
for  you,  and  the  lack  of  horse-sense  must  be  supplied 
by  your  own  intelligence.  It  is  well,  when  learning, 
to  remove  all  bicycle  accessories.  They  are  only  in 
the  way,  and  add  weight  and  distract  the  attention. 
The  propelling  of  the  bicycle — that  is  the  one  idea 
to  keep  in  mind.  Make  the  machine  go;  shove  it 
along.  Never  mind  if  you  are  not  quite  comfortable 
or  at  ease  at  first.  Sit  on  your  saddle  and  stay  there. 
Do  not  try  to  balance  the  machine.  Lean  the  way 
the  machine  inclines,  not  away  from  it,  as  it  will  be 
your  first  impulse  to  do.  The  bicycle  is  not  to  be 
fought  against;  it  is  to  be  propelled  and  controlled; 
and  the  art  is  not  difficult  to  acquire. 

Avoid  starting  a  bicycle  on  a  down  grade  when  you 
are  learning.  For  on  a  slight,  even  an  almost  im- 
perceptible incline,  the  cycler  must  back-pedal ;  but 
the  beginner  wishes  to  propel  the  bicycle,  and  for 
that  purpose  must  use  an  altogether  different  muscu- 
lar combination. 


CHAPTER  V. 


How  to  Make  Progress. 

You  have  learned  to  wheel  a  bicycle, — have  had 
some  lessons,  can  take  the  machine  and  mount  it, 
wheel  a  little  way,  and  fall  off ;  or  can  wheel  for  some 
time  without  a  dismount,  but  feel  utterly  exhausted 
after  a  short  spin.  You  have  accomplished  what 
you  attempted, — you  can  wheel  a  bicycle;  but  you 
feel  dissatisfied.  You  have  tried  to  ride  with 
friends,  perhaps,  and  have  had  to  give  it  up;  yet 
you  feel  that  you  should  be  able  to  do  what  others 
have  done  and  are  doing  all  the  time.  It  is  very 
discouraging. 

What  you  should  have  now  is  a  suitable  and  com- 
fortable wheeling  outfit.  You  perhaps  have  a  bicy- 
cle of  your  own;  if  not,  a  good  wheel  may  be  hired 
reasonably.  The  matter  of  dress  is  now  all-impor- 
tant, and  a  costume  suitable  for  cycling  should  be 
selected ;  it  is  impossible  to  do  good  work  or  to  prac- 
tise comfortably  unless  you  are  properly  dressed. 

Choose  for  a  practice  ride  a  pleasant  day,  with 
little  or  no  wind,  and  neither  too  hot  nor  too  cold. 
The  atmospheric  conditions  are  an  important  factor 
in  bicycling;  indeed,  beginners  are  often  discour- 
aged by  external  conditions  which  really  have  noth- 


30 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


ing  to  do  with  their  mastery  of  the  machine.  Take 
the  bicycle  out  on  a  smooth  road,  where  you  may 
have  two  or  three  miles  free  from  traffic,  and  as  level 
as  possible.  If  the  road  is  muddy  or  slippery,  wait 
for  the  proper  conditions.  Unless  the  surface  is 
smooth  and  dry,  it  is  better  to  take  the  bicycle  back 
without  attempting  to  mount  it.  If  two  or  three 
miles  of  good  road  are  not  accessible,  a  quarter-mile 
stretch  or  even  less  will  serve.  Select  a  good  path- 
way, however  short. 

See  that  the  wheel  is  adjusted  to  suit  you ;  the  sad- 
dle of  a  comfortable  height,  certainl}^  not  too  high; 
the  handle-bars  convenient  to  grasp.  Assure  your- 
self that  all  the  nuts  are  secure,  the  saddle  and 
handle-bars  firm.  Spin  the  pedals  to  see  that  they 
revolve  easily.  Make  up  your  mind  before  mount- 
ing how  far  you  want  to  go;  mount  the  machine, 
wheel  it  for  this  distance,  and  dismount.  Do  not 
try  to  look  about  while  wheeling.  Give  your  whole 
attention  to  the  bicycle  and  keep  your  eyes  fixed  in 
the  direction  you  are  travelling.  Avoid  hollows  and 
cart-ruts,  though  these  should  not  occur  if  the  lo- 
cality for  practice  is  well  chosen.  If  an  unexpected 
hollow  or  hump  should  be  encountered,  hold  hard  to 
the  handle-bars  and  press  firmly  on  the  pedals,  ris- 
ing at  the  same  time  a  little  from  the  saddle.  The 
pedals  are  most  important  parts,  the  controlling 
power  being  centred  in  them.  If  there  is  a  good 
hand-brake  on  the  bicycle,  it  is  well  to  note  its  action 
and  to  understand  how  to  apply  it;  for  in  case  of  a 
lost  pedal,  its  application  might  give  a  little  confi- 
dence.   By  a  ''lost  pedal"  is  meant,  not  that  part  of 


NOW  TO  MAKE  PROGRESS. 


31 


the  machine  is  literally  lost,  but  that  the  foothold  is 
missed  on  it,  and  so  control  of  the  wheel  lost  for  the 
moment. 

If  out  of  breath,  wait  until  rested.  Rest  for  a  few 
minutes  in  any  case,  and  look  about,  and  note  the 
surface  wheeled  over.  Then  plan  another  spin,  of 
perhaps  a  few  hundred  feet.  Fix  upon  an  objective 
point,  wheel  to  it,  and  dismount.  Rest  thoroughly, 
and  mount  again.  Be  careful  to  avoid  becoming 
chilled  while  resting,  stopping  only  long  enough  to 
restore  the  natural  breathing  and  to  look  over  the 
road. 

Half  an  hour  of  this  kind  of  work  at  first  every 
suitable  day  is  enough.  If  you  are  strong  and  accus- 
tomed to  active  exercise,  the  time  may  be  prolonged 
to  an  hour  or  an  hour  and  a  half;  or  you  may  prac- 
tise twice  daily,  morning  and  afternoon,  or  after- 
noon and  evening.  Cycling  weather  is  an  uncertain 
quantity,  and  all  possible  advantages  should  be  tak- 
en of  it.  If  tired  after  the  first  day's  practice,  do 
not  attempt  to  resume  it  until  entirely  rested,  even 
if  it  is  necessary  to  wait  for  two  or  three  days;  for 
unless  the  wheel  is  well  understood  and  the  wheeler 
fairly  practised,  it  is  hard  work.  The  practised  cy- 
clist controls  the  bicycle  without  conscious  effort, 
and  may  direct  his  attention  to  his  surroundings; 
but  the  novice  must  concentrate  his  attention  on  his 
machine. 

A  bicycle  should  always  be  handled  carefully;  for 
though  it  is  made  strong  enough  for  the  emergencies 
of  being  thrown  and  pulled  and  twisted,  none  of  these 
things  improve  it.     Keep  the   polish  free  from 


32 


B  rev  CLING  FOR  LADIES. 


scratches,  and  the  more  delicate  parts  free  from 
dents.  Do  not  let  the  bicycle  fall  or  throw  it  down 
carelessly.  Learn  to  balance  it  against  a  curb  or 
post  or  fence  or  any  other  convenient  object,  with- 
out injury  to  the  bicycle  or  to  the  supporting  surface. 

A  bicycle  will  balance  in  this  way:  The  front 
wheel  kept  from  moving  at  either  the  tire  or  the 
centre  of  the  frame;  the  pedal  resting  against  some 
firm  object. 

Do  not  wheel  near  anything,  but  give  yourself  as 
much  room  as  possible.  A  practised  cyclist  can  take 
a  bicycle  w^herever  it  is  possible  to  walk,  but  it  is 
sometimes  a  feat  to  do  this. 

The  proper  position  cannot  be  too  soon  acquired. 
Sit  erect  and  not  too  far  from  the  handle-bars. 
Let  the  hands  grasp  the  handles  in  an  easy,  natural 
position.  The  saddle  should  be  quite  over  the 
pedals  to  give  a  natural  movement,  forward,  down, 
back,  and  up.  The  bicycle  is  sensitive,  and  yields 
to  almost  unconscious  direction;  but  if  the  eye  is 
not  trained  to  judge  distances,  steering  will  be  diffi- 
cult at  first.  It  is  necessary  to  look  well  ahead,  to 
decide  quickly  what  you  will  do,  and  to  do  it.  Pedal 
fast,  but  do  not  hurry.  Don't  try  to  find  out  how 
fast  you  can  go.  This  is  not  a  good  time  for  such 
an  experiment;  it  will  be  easy  later  to  test  your 
speed.  Pedal  fast  enough  to  keep  the  machine  run- 
ning easily  and  smoothly  and  to  feel  it  take  care  of 
itself  a  little.  It  is  easier  to  guide  and  control  it 
when  it  is  in  motion  with  the  wheels  rolling  rapidly. 

It  is  not  a  good  plan  to  select  a  very  light  wheel 
for  practice.    The  tendencies  and  the  peculiarities 


I/O  IV  TO  MAKE  PROGRESS. 


33 


of  the  bicycle  are  more  readily  determined  when 
there  is  a  little  weight  to  resist.  Be  careful  to  wear 
nothing  tight,  particularly  shoes,  gloves,  waistband, 
or  hat;  for  they  might  prove  a  source  of  discomfort 
or  even  danger. 

Learn  to  steady  the  bicycle  as  soon  as  you  can.  It 
will  wnggle  and  wobble  from  a  number  of  causes. 
The  front  wheel  must  be  kept  steady.  Wobbling 
results  from  losing  the  sense  of  direction  for  a  mo- 
ment. To  overcome  the  difficulty,  either  stop  and 
dismount,  or,  if  it  is  possible,  increase  your  speed. 

Before  taking  a  bicycle  out,  have  any  oil  that  may 
have  settled  on  the  outside  of  the  bearings  wiped 
off,  and  add  a  little  fresh  oil  to  the  oil-cups.  The 
chain  or  power  gear  should  be  lubricated,  and  any 
superfluous  lubricant  carefully  removed.  The  ease 
with  which  the  bic3^cle  runs  depends  on  proper  clean- 
ing and  oiling;  an  illy  cared  for  or  badly  oiled  ma- 
chine, moreover,  is  very  unpleasant  to  handle. 

A  course  of  practice  will  inspire  confidence,  and 
wobbling  will  occur  less  and  less  frequentl3^  Then 
the  inequalities  of  surface  will  be  noticed,  and  the 
cyclist  will  wonder  why  it  is  harder  to  wheel  in  some 
places  and  in  certain  directions.  Parts  of  the  road 
are  covered,  the  wheeler  being  almost  unconscious 
of  exerting  any  force,  and  again  in  places  the  foot 
seems  to  be  pushed  up.  Ease  and  comfort  in  wheel- 
ing are  dependent  to  a  large  degree  on  the  wind  and 
to  a  much  larger  degree  on  the  grades  and  hills.  A 
very  little  grade,  a  very  slight  rise,  quite  unnctice- 
able  to  the  pedestrian,  is  disagreeably  obvious  to  the 
bicyclist.    The  difficulty  presented  may  be  over- 


34 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


come  by  pushing  on  the  pedal  at  the  right  place  as  it 
descends,  and  at  the  right  time,  time  and  place 
beijig  also  adjusted  to  the  weight  and  power  of  the 
bicyclist.  To  push  at  just  the  right  time  on  a  grade 
assures  an  easy  ascent.  Any  difficulty  in  pedaling 
may  be  traced  to  a  wrong  application  of  power. 

Hill-climbing  and  grade  work  require  thought 
and  practice.  Do  not  be  discouraged  because  a  little 
bit  of  a  hill  seems  quite  impossible.  Overcoming 
grades  is  no  easy  matter,  and  is  usually  learned  slow- 
ly; every  time  a  grade  is  attempted,  however,  some 
progress  is  made.  Wheel  as  far  as  it  is  possible  to 
go  comfortably;  then  dismount,  and  walk  the  rest 
of  the  way.  Never  try  to  mount  on  an  up  grade  un- 
less you  are  expert,  for  this  is  a  difficult  and  most 
fatiguing  thing  to  do.  When  mounting,  notice  the 
grade,  and  if  it  is  downward,  do  not  have  the  mount- 
ing pedal  at  its  full  height;  and  select  a  clear  place 
to  mount  in.  If  an  up  grade  must  be  wheeled  over, 
it  is  often  advisable  to  mount  in  a  downward  direc- 
tion, wheel  far  enough  for  a  start,  and  then  turn  to 
ascend  without  dismounting.  Learn  to  pedal  slow- 
ly and  steadily  and  to  start  and  stop  easily.  These 
things  may  be  practised  at  convenient  times,  and 
with  sufficient  practice  will  be  mastered,  but  mean- 
while need  keep  no  one  from  attempting  a  moderate- 
ly long  run. 

Uncertain  attempts  at  mounting  are  very  fatigu- 
ing. Get  some  one  to  mount  and  start  you  when  off 
for  the  first  long  outings;  the  energy  saved  can  be 
better  utilized  in  wheeling.  Do  not  be  afraid  to 
wheel  over  small  inequalities  if  their  direction  is  at 


now  TO  MAKE  PROGRESS. 


35 


right  angles  to  the  direction  of  the  bicycle;  but 
avoid  all  ruts  and  depressions  parallel  with  the 
wheel's  direction.  It  is  easy  to  slip  into  them,  and 
difficult  to  get  out  of  them  without  a  spill. 

Never  eat  a  full  meal  before  starting  on  a  bicycle 
trip;  if  possible,  set  the  time  for  starting  at  least  an 
hour  after  eating.  Ten,  twenty,  and  thirt)^  miles 
are  often  covered  after  the  first  or  second  trial.  It 
is  better  to  sit  on  your  wheel  and  pedal  slowly  than 
to  dismount.  Getting  on  and  off,  stopping  and  start- 
ing, are  much  more  fatiguing  than  wheeling;  and  it 
is  well  to  economize  your  strength  at  this  stage. 
Always  see  that  the  tool-kit  is  in  place  on  the  bicycle, 
and  never  go  far  without  a  wrench  and  a  screw 
driver. 

The  tires  also  should  receive  close  attention;  they 
should  be  properly  inflated,  and  the  hand-pump 
carried  on  a  convenient  place  on  the  machine.  It  is 
never  well  to  use  a  tire  that  is  not  properly  inflated. 
Avoid  all  broken  glass,  nails,  etc.,  and  do  not  rest 
the  wheel  against  a  barbed  wire  fence. 

The  wheeler  who  desires  to  succeed  cannot  too 
soon  begin  to  observe  and  take  notes.  Early  learn 
to  use  the  wrench  yourself,  and  study  how  to  apply 
that  instrument  properly.  Study  the  different  parts 
of  the  bicycle,  and  note  how  they  are  put  together; 
and  particularly  observe  each  nut  and  screw,  and  de- 
termine its  purpose.  Each  nut  must  be  at  its  proper 
tension  to  hold  securely.  Study  the  valves  of  the 
tires  and  learn  their  construction;  and  be  sure  you 
know  how  to  apply  the  pump-coupling  properly. 
Learn  the  names  and  uses  of  the  different  parts  of 


36 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


the  bicycle,  and  study  their  construction.  This  is 
mechanical  geography,  if  I  may  use  such  a  term. 
Learn  to  care  for  your  health  and  how  to  prepare 
your  S3^stem  to  resist  fatigue.  Then  you  will  find 
that  you  have  mastered  the  subject,  and  are  pre- 
pared to  avail  yourself  of  the  many  pleasures  of  the 
sport. 

The  oftener  discouraged,  the  oftener  the  opportu- 
nity to  hope  again.  The  art  of  bicycling  is  a  purely 
mechanical  attainment ;  and  though  its  complications 
may  at  first  seem  hopeless,  sufficient  practice  will 
result  in  final  mastery. 


CHAPTER  n. 
Helping  and  Teaching;  What  to  Learn, 

Accuracy  is  the  first  principle  of  cycling;  and  the 
would-be  bicyclist  should  learn  as  early  as  possible 
that  ease  of  movement  and  precision  of  movement 
are  inseparable;  and  that  bruises  and  bumps  and 
wrenches,  though  they  may  have  an  educational 
value,  are  not  a  necessary  accompaniment  of  the 
sport.  The  skilful  instructor  need  never  allow  a 
scratch  or  a  bruise.  Some  people  want  to  learn 
everything  at  once;  but  only  so  much  should  be 
done  at  each  attempt  as  can  be  done  accurately,  if  it 
be  only  walking  the  machine  about  and  standing  it 
up.  This  exercise  is  helpful,  for  walking  a  bicycle 
about  requires  a  series  of  accurate  movements,  and 
accurate  movement  is  necessar}^  in  learning  mount- 
ing and  propelling. 

The  bicycle  is  a  marvel  of  adjustment,  and  the  bi- 
cyclist is  obliged  to  adopt  movements  that  corres- 
pond with  the  movements  of  the  bicycle.  The  more 
accurate  this  correspondence  of  movement,  the  great- 
er the  ease  of  propulsion. 

The  lines  and  angles  of  the  levers  of  feet  and  legs 
must  be  studied  to  so  apply  them  as  to  secure  the 
best  results.    Avoid  undue  tension.    Learn  just  how 


38 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


much  to  lean  the  bicycle  in  mounting,  just  where  to 
place  the  foot,  where  to  stand  in  relation  to  the  han- 
dle-bars, and  where  to  place  the  weight  on  the  ma- 
chine. This  understood,  mounting  is  accomplished. 
The  bicycle  may  be  mastered,  and  easily  mastered, 
by  remembering  all  the  things  not  to  do  and  by- 
doing  all  the  things  that  should  be  done. 

To  assist  another  to  do  what  you  do  not  know  how 
to  do  yourself  is  not  an  easy  task;  yet  there  are 
people  who  are  willing  to  undertake  it. 

A  bicycle  is  so  nicely  balanced  that  it  is  easy  to 
hold  it  up  if  it  is  taken  hold  of  in  the  right  way. 
Grasp  the  back  of  the  saddle  firmly  with  one  hand, 
take  hold  of  one  of  the  handles  with  the  other,  and 
the  machine  is  in  your  power.  A  person  seated  on 
the  saddle  with  a  firm  hold  of  the  handles  of  the 
handle-bar,  becomes,  as  it  were,  a  part  of  the  ma- 
chine, and  when  sitting  quite  still  is  governed  by 
the  same  laws  of  balance  that  control  the  bicycle. 

Take  hold  of  a  bicycle  with  some  one  seated  in  the 
saddle,  and  move  it  a  few  inches  forward,  then  a 
few  inches  backward,  and  it  becomes  at  once  per- 
ceptible that  but  little  force  is  necessary  to  overcome 
the  inertia  of  the  combined  weights  of  wheel  and 
rider.  The  wheel  has  a  tendency  to  fall  to  either 
side,  but  it  is  eas}^  to  balance  the  weight  on  the  tires. 
Then  hold  the  wheel  a  little  toward  you,  for  it  is 
easier  and  less  fatiguing  than  to  hold  it  from  you. 
If  the  bicycle  is  allowed  to  incline  from  you,  it  will 
pull  you  over;  if  it  inclines  toward  you,  you  can 
support  its  weight  against  the  shoulder.  If  the  rider 
sits  still  and  inclines  with  the  machine,  it  is  easily 


IIKf.PING  AXD  rEACniNG. 


39 


righted;  but  if  the  rider's  weight  is  thrown  in  a  di- 
rection opposite  to  the  inclination  of  the  bicycle,  the 
tendency  to  fall  is  increased,  and  the  inclined  bicycle 
is  pushed  over. 

Before  assisting  another  person  with  a  bicycle,  it 
is  well  to  note  all  the  tendencies  of  the  machine. 
This  may  be  done  by  taking  a  bicycle  and  putting 
it  in  all  the  different  positions  mentioned.  The  mo- 
tions are  the  same  whether  or  not  there  is  any  one 
in  the  saddle,  and  it  is  well  to  learn  to  manage  the 
machine  without  exerting  too  much  force.  Stand  on 
the  left-hand  side  of  the  bicycle,  and  hold  the  saddle 
with  the  right  hand.  The  steering  may  be  done 
with  the  left  hand,  and  the  bicycle  kept  upright  by 
wiggling  the  front  wheel.  It  is  better  to  do  this  than 
to  attempt  to  hold  the  front  wheel  still.  Walk  the 
bicycle  about  by  the  handle-bars  only,  and  you  will 
find  that  to  keep  the  wheel  straight  it  is  necessary  to 
hold  the  bars  stiff,  and  this  is  quite  a  difficult  under- 
taking. Allowed  to  move  gently  from  side  to  side, 
the  wheel  is  more  easily  controlled. 

When  assisting  a  person  for  the  first  time,  stand 
beside  the  machine,  see  that  the  pedal  farthest  from 
you  is  raised  to  its  greatest  height,  and  move  the  bi- 
cycle forward  until  the  pedal  is  commencing  its 
down  stroke.  Then  let  the  wheeler  step  in  beside 
the  bicycle,  in  front  of  you  and  on  the  same  side  of 
the  machine,  and  grasp  both  handles  firmly.  Stand 
as  close  as  possible  to  the  bicycle,  having  it  inclined 
toward  you  at  such  an  inclination  that  the  weight  of 
the  wheeler,  stepping  to  the  opposite  pedal,  will 
right  it.    Then,  while  you  hold  the  bicycle  still,  the 


40 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


wheeler  should  step  on  the  raised  pedal,  stand  upon 
the  pedal  with  the  knee  stiff,  and  then  settle  slowly 
on  the  saddle;  the  other  foot  must  find  the  down 
pedal.  Do  not  let  the  machine  move  yet,  but  have 
the  beginner  go  over  these  movements  again,  prac- 
tising them  from  both  sides  of  the  machine  until  a 
little  confidence  is  felt. 

It  is  all  important  to  get  on  the  saddle  quickly 
and  easily  and  without  necessity  for  readjustment. 
If  a  skirt  is  worn,  it  should  be  arranged  before  plac- 
ing the  weight  on  the  pedal,  and  the  knee  should  be 
slightly  bent  when  the  pedal  is  lowest.  The  saddle 
should  be  the  right  height;  the  handle-bars  should 
be  a  trifle  high,  that  is,  when  the  rider  sits  erect ; 
the  hands  should  rest  easily  and  comfortably  on  the 
hand-grips.  Now  the  thing  for  the  rider  to  do  is  to 
ride  and  hold  on  to  the  handles.  Don't  let  the 
wheel  get  away  from  you.  To  prevent  an  accident, 
should  this  happen,  the  beginner  should  know  how 
to  come  off  the  bicycle.  An  active  person  can  step 
to  the  ground  before  the  wheel  has  time  to  fall.  To 
get  off,  step  on  the  pedal  that  is  down,  and  throw 
the  other  foot  over. 

If  the  saddle  is  not  right,  dismount  the  wheeler  in 
this  way:  Have  the  wheeler's  feet  firmly  placed  on 
both  pedals,  and  see  that  the  down  pedal  is  on  the 
side  on  which  you  are  standing.  Pull  the  machine 
a  little  to  that  side,  and  see  that  the  foot  is  on  the 
down  pedal.  Then  direct  the  wheeler  to  step  on 
this  down  pedal,  throwing  all  the  weight  on  it,  and 
to  pass  the  raised  foot  over  in  front  of  the  down  foot 
to  the  ground.    The  foot  on  the  dowm  pedal  should 


HELPIXG  A. YD  TEACHING 


41 


not  be  removed  until  the  other  foot,  placed  on  the 
ground,  has  taken  the  rider's  weight. 

Say  that  you  are  now  going  to  move,  and  let  the 
wheeler  mount  as  before.  Show  that  a  wiggling 
movement  must  be  kept  up  with  the  front  wheel, 
and  say  that  you  will  help  to  do  it.  See  that  the 
wheeler  has  both  handles  held  firmly,  and  then  grasp 
the  bars  just  in  front  of  the  handle.  Keep  firm  hold 
of  the  saddle,  and  control  the  balance  and  push  by 
that,  letting  the  bars  do  their  own  work. 

A  learner  always  pushes  too  hard  on  the  pedals. 

Take  the  machine  about,  and  trot  it  up  and  down, 
holding  it  firmly  and  keeping  it  balanced.  Should 
it  pull  you  over,  the  wheeler  can  step  off  without 
difficulty. 

It  is  much  easier  for  two  than  for  one  to  help  a  be- 
ginner. A  trio  of  novices  can  form  a  very  fair 
school.  A  bicycle  is  inclined  either  to  pull  or  to 
push,  and  if  supported  on  both  sides,  the  pulling 
tendency  is  avoided  and  the  pushing  tendency  read- 
ily corrected.  If  ladies  are  helping  one  another,  the 
best  way  is  for  two  to  hold  the  bicycle,  standing  one 
on  each  side  of  the  machine.  Both  should  hold  the 
saddle  and  both  should  hold  the  handle-bars  just  be- 
yond the  handles  and  above  the  hands  of  the  wheel- 
er. One  should  instruct,  and  the  other  help  to  hold 
the  machine. 

Let  a  beginner  first  learn  to  mount,  then  to  dis- 
mount, practising  these  movements  several  times 
before  starting;  then,  having  made  sure  that  the 
pedal  on  that  side  is  two-thirds  up,  come  to  the  left 
hand  side  of  the  wheel,  step  on  the  pedal,  and  be 


42 


BICYCUXC  FOR  LADIES. 


seated  in  the  saddle;  then  put  the  weight  on  the 
pedal  that  is  down,  and  step  off  with  the  other  foot. 
Repeat  several  times,  mounting  from  each  side,  dis- 
mounting on  the  same  side  and  on  the  opposite  side, 
at  command,  and  repeating.  Tilt  the  wheel  as  the 
weight  goes  on  the  pedal.  Dismount  the  pupil,  and 
walk  the  wheel  about  between  you,  wiggling  the 
front  wheel.  Then  mount  3'our  pupil,  and  proceed 
as  already  explained.  After  the  pupil  begins  to 
propel  the  wheel,  very  little  assistance  from  the  in- 
structor is  necessary,  and  care  should  be  taken  not 
to  confuse  the  pupil  as  to  the  amount  of  work  they 
are  doing.  Call  attention  to  the  ease  with  which 
the  wheel  is  brought  up  when  inclined  to  fall,  and 
explain  about  turning  and  steering  and  wiggling, 
and  what  these  motions  are  for.  You  cannot  propel 
a  bicycle  unless  you  know  what  you  are  doing;  there 
cannot  be  guess-work  about  it.  The  perfect  confi- 
dence that  comes  with  familiarity  and  practice  m.ust 
precede  success. 

Given  three  people  with  one  bicycle,  all  can  learn 
to  ride,  helping  each  other  in  turn.  Having  learned 
to  mount  and  dismount,  the  next  thing  is  to  learn  to 
start  the  bicycle.  The  weight  should  be  allowed  to 
start  the  bicycle  as  soon  as  the  foot,  pressing  on  the 
pedal  as  it  descends,  brings  the  wheeler  to  the  saddle. 

The  stop  should  be  learned  next.  The  wheeler 
should  be  reminded  to  notice  which  is  the  down 
pedal,  and  to  step  on  it  with  all  the  weight  just  as  it 
begins  to  rise.  This  will  stop  the  machine,  and  the 
dismount  is  made  in  the  usual  way  by  throwing  the 
other  foot  over,  and  stepping  with  that  on  the  ground. 


II EL  PING  A  ND    TEA  CHING. 


43 


The  foot  that  has  stopped  the  machine  should  not 
leave  the  pedal  too  soon,  but  remain  on  it  long 
enough  to  control  the  bicycle. 

As  soon  as  the  wheeler  can  pedal  a  little  and  has 
the  balance  well  enough  to  ride  without  assistance, 
the  next  thing  is  to  learn  to  ride  over  ordinary  ob- 
structions, and  to  remain  on  the  wheel  for  a  given 
number  of  minutes  without  dismounting.  All  this 
can  be  taught  in  an  ordinary  room  or  on  a  piazza; 
and  both  teacher  and  pupil  will  find  a  smooth  sur- 
face, such  as  a  board  floor  or  a  pavement,  best 
adapted  for  the  work.  Attention  cannot  too  soon  be 
directed  to  taking  the  weight  off  the  ascending  ped- 
al, and  the  exercise  should  not  be  prolonged  for  a 
moment  after  this  becomes  a  difficult  thing  to  do. 

At  first  the  practice  leaves  the  beginner  much  agi- 
tated and  breathless;  but  these  conditions  are  over- 
come after  a  few  lessons,  though  experienced  riders 
sometimes  experience  a  return  of  them  when  they 
find  mounting  difficult  and  do  not  notice  the  grade 
they  are  attempting.  The  sensitiveness  of  the  wheel 
sometimes  puzzles  the  beginner,  and  the  sense  of  ad- 
justment is  often  difificult  to  acquire. 

Nervous  work  and  nervous  effort  are  noticeable 
in  no  other  sport  in  the  same  marked  degree.  Some 
seize  and  adopt  its  salient  points  at  once  and  almost 
unconsciously,  but  the  majority  are  not  so  fortunate. 
The  first  fifteen  minutes  on  a  bicycle  are  frequently 
enough  to  cause  thorough  exhaustion.  The  best 
remedy  for  this  is  to  take  the  wheel  and  walk  it  about ; 
the  pupil  should  be  left  alone  with  it.  If  fifteen 
minutes'  work  is  too  much,  alternate  five  minutes' 
work  with  rest  at  the  next  lesson. 


44 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


The  balance  and  distribution  of  strength  for  the 
pull  by  the  hands  is  quite  important  in  directing  and 
controlling  the  machine.  The  feet  are  used  to 
propel  and  to  balance.  The  teacher  should  note 
carefully  if  the  beginner  errs  by  incorrect  i)edaling 
or  by  too  much  pull  on  the  handles,  and  correct  the 
wrong  tendency. 

Balance  by  pedaling  comes  next  in  order,  and  can- 
not be  practised  too  early;  and  as  by  this  time  a  fair 
amount  of  speed  will  have  been  attained,  the  natural 
balance  begins  to  be  acquired. 

Balanced  pedaling  and  swaying  are  very  different, 
and  should  not  be  confused.  The  bicycle  may  be  pro- 
pelled, balanced,  and  controlled  entirely  by  the 
pedals;  and  as  this  is  the  best  and  most  important 
mode  of  wheeling,  it  should  early  be  understood  and 
attempted. 

The  adjustment  of  the  machine  should  now  be 
taken  up,  and  the  wheeler  should  know  how  and 
why  the  bicycle  can  be  changed  to  suit  individual 
peculiarities.  The  wiggling  tendency  of  the  front 
wheel  lessens  as  the  wheeler  acquires  confidence; 
and  its  unsteadiness  can  be  overcome  and  controlled 
with  the  balance  and  by  pedaling,  with  the  swaying 
of  the  body  or  the  pressure  of  either  foot. 

There  is  much  to  avoid  as  well  as  much  to  do. 
Incorrect  position  means  difficult  work,  almost  im- 
possible propulsion  and  possible  personal  injury. 
The  knowledge  that  everything  is  firmly  screwed  up 
about  the  bicycle,  and  particularly  that  the  saddle  is 
secure,  cannot  be  too  soon  acquired.  Never  attempt 
to  mount  or  even  to  try  the  bicycle  unless  the  sad- 


HELPING  AND  TEACHING. 


45 


die  is  properly  secured  and  immovable.  If  anything 
breaks,  it  is  not  necessarily  your  fault;  if  anything 
is  insecure,  blame  no  one  for  not  attending  to  some- 
thing you  should  yourself  have  attended  to.  Always 
examine  the  pedals  to  see  that  they  turn  easily;  and 
be  sure  about  that  saddle.  It  is  a  good  deal  of 
trouble  to  screw  the  nut  up  tight  for  a  few  minutes, 
or  even  for  half  a  minute,  but  it  should  be  done. 

When  adjusting  the  saddle,  never  be  hurried  when 
tools  are  to  be  used,  for  it  is  necessary  to  apply  them 
carefully  to  insure  accuracy ;  and  a  nut  really  requires 
serious  attention,  for  often  a  good  deal  depends 
upon  it.  If  screwed  hurriedly,  the  thread  is  in 
danger  of  being  injured,  and  on  that  thread  the  hold- 
ing power  of  the  nut  depends. 

When  the  beginner  can  balance  and  propel  the  bi- 
cycle for  a  little  v/ay  alone,  the  really  tedious  part  of 
learning  often  begins.  At  this  point  beginners 
become  discouraged,  for  there  seems  to  be  noth- 
ing new  to  learn;  yet  the  results  attained  are 
unsatisfactory.    What  is  needed  is  practice. 

Practise  on  a  smooth  piece  of  road,  with  some  one 
running  beside  the  bicycle  to  give  confidence  and 
prevent  falls.  The  proper  position  in  mounting 
should  be  studied.  In  mounting  a  drop-frame  ma- 
chine, never  step  over  the  frame  and  place  the  foot 
on  the  ground;  it  is  an  awkward  and  ungainly 
method.  Take  a  proper  position,  then  be  sure  every- 
thing is  right,  and  last  of  all,  step  on  the  pedal,  and 
you  are  moving. 

A  good  way  to  practise,  if  you  have  no  one  to  help 
you,  is  to  mount  the  bicycle  in  the  gutter,  and  limp 


46 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


along;  or  if  in  the  country,  a  roadside  fence  may 
give  the  needed  assistance.  Grasp  a  post  firmly,  and 
holding  by  it,  try  to  mount;  and  study  the  tenden- 
cies and  the  balance  of  the  bicycle  without  letting  go 
the  post. 

Make  up  your  m.ind  how  to  mount,  start  the  pedal 
properly,  and  keep  trying  until  you  can  ride  a  little. 
If  a  little,  why  not  more?  Keep  on  practising,  avoid- 
ing faults. 

For  instruction,  the  bicycle  should  be  fitted  with 
an  instructor's  handle,  and  the  pupil  provided  with 
a  belt  having  one  handle  or  more.  The  instruction 
handle  and  a  hold  on  the  handle-bar  are  sufficient 
safeguard  for  most  pupils,  but  the  belt  will  often 
give  confidence  to  the  timid  and  aid  the  instructor. 


CHAPTER  yil. 


A  Few  Things  to  T^emember. 

Two  important  points  for  the  bicyclist  to  study 
are  avoidance  of  road  traffic  and  consideration  of  the 
surface  ridden  over.  The  law  of  the  road  applies  to 
all  traffic  passing  over  the  road;  the  law  of  mechan- 
ics to  the  surface  of  the  road  as  it  affects  the  bicycle 
and  the  cycler.  In  cities,  on  much-used  thorough- 
fares, careful  work,  quick  eyes,  experience  and  cau- 
tion are  demanded  to  insure  safety. 

The  law  of  the  road,  "Keep  to  the  right,  pass  on 
the  left  anything  going  in  the  same  direction, "  is 
explicit,  and  if  always  observed  would  render  colli- 
sions almost  impossible.  The  avoidance  of  careless 
and  unobservant  travellers  is  quite  a  study.  Passing 
to  the  right,  you  can  see  and  be  seen;  passing  on  the 
left,  a  traveller  moving  in  the  same  direction  does 
not  become  aware  of  your  intention  without  being 
notified.  You  give  notice  to  prevent  others  from 
changing  their  direction  and  to  enable  them  thus  to 
avoid  crowding. 

To  pass  a  vehicle  on  the  road,  when  travelling  in 
the  same  direction,  involves  increase  of  speed  if  the 
vehicle  in  front  maintains  its  pace;  should  it  go 
slower  or  stop,  and  the  roadway  permits,  a  change 


48 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


of  pace  is  neither  necessary  nor  desirable,  unless  you 
wish  to  steady  your  machine.  In  nearing  any  vehi- 
cle or  person  coming  from  the  opposite  direction, 
keep  your  share  of  the  road.  Be  always  alert  and 
observant;  do  not  fail  to  give  ample  room  to  the  ap- 
proaching vehicle;  but  on  the  other  hand,  do  not 
permit  yourself  to  be  crowded  or  inconvenienced, 
and  keep  enough  of  the  roadway  on  your  right  in 
reserve  in  case  a  change  of  direction  becomes  neces- 
sary. 

The  importance  of  having  your  machine  at  all 
times  perfectly  under  control  cannot  be  over-esti- 
mated. Put  faith  in  your  pedaling,  and  never  ride 
at  greater  speed  than  you  can  determine  and  check 
at  will.  Dependence  on  any  brake,  however  perfect 
its  action,  is  bad  practice. 

Vehicles  approaching  pass  each  other  on  the  right. 
In  case  of  collision,  the  vehicle  which  has  main- 
tained the  proper  side  of  the  roadway  has  the  advan- 
tage in  case  of  legal  controversy.  In  passing  a  ve- 
hicle drawn  by  horses,  the  bicycle  should  keep  to  the 
centre  of  the  roadway  when  possible,  leaving  the 
curb  for  the  horse-drawn  vehicle.  The  bicycle  can 
only  draw  away  from  the  curb,  and  is  limited  to  one 
direction.  The  centre  of  the  roadway,  therefore, 
affords  the  best  opportunity  for  a  change  of  direction. 

Sit  well  on  your  saddle,  observe  the  adjustment  of 
the  centre  of  gravit)^  but  ride  on  the  pedals,  using 
the  weight  as  much  as  possible.  Trust  to  the  pedals 
only  for  rough  riding  and  for  unexpected  inequali- 
ties of  surface.  The  study  of  the  mechanics  of  bal- 
ance, resistance,  and  friction  is  most  interesting  in 


49 


this  connection,  as  their  action  affects  cycler  or  wheel 
or  the  combined  mechanisms. 

The  law  of  the  road  is  simple  and  very  generally 
understood,  though  there  are  reckless  and  ignorant 
people  who  disregard  it.  The  law  defines  where  you 
shall  ride,  how  you  shall  pass,  and  sets  a  limit  to  in- 
crease of  speed  beyond  what  is  considered  compati- 
ble with  the  general  safety.  There  is,  besides,  the 
unwritten  law  of  courtesy,  more  often  observed  than 
disregarded ;  and  there  is  the  law  you  make  for  your- 
self. 

The  traffic  of  a  crowded  thoroughfare  may  be  ana- 
lyzed, and  the  conduct  of  a  wheel  explained  and  sim- 
plified, though  travel  on  such  routes  is  difficult  at 
best  and  had  better  be  avoided.  Given  a  long, 
straight  road,  with  two  streams  of  travel  from  oppo- 
site directions.  One  of  these  streams  will  consist  of 
vehicles,  quadrupeds,  and  pedestrians,  few  maintain- 
ing an  even  rate  of  progress,  fewer  still  the  same 
rate.  The  law  requires  that  you  pass  on  the  left, 
and  you  must  await  the  opportunity  to  do  so.  When 
a  clear  way  opens,  take  immediate  advantage  of  it, 
and  increase  your  speed.  Should  there  not  be  room 
enough  to  pass,  signal,  and  the  vehicle  in  advance  is 
bound  to  make  way  for  you.  Should  there  be  a  free 
road  to  the  right,  you  may  take  it,  but  only  with  the 
consent  of  the  traveller  ahead,  and  then  at  your  own 
risk. 

Never  ride  more  than  t\vo  abreast.  Riding  in  sin- 
gle file,  with  ample  room  for  turning,  is  better  on  a 
crowded  street  or  when  making  time.  For  moderate 
wheeling,  the  cyclists  being  disciplined  and  drilled, 


BICYCIJXG  FOR  LADIES. 


the  distance  between  bicycles  may  be  shortened. 
But  control  of  the  wheel  should  be  absolute  before 
this  is  attempted.  When  travelling  at  even  a  mod- 
erate rate  of  speed,  a  certain  distance  between  wheels 
should  be  observed.  When  in  single  file,  turn  on 
the  same  line,  but  not  at  the  same  time  as  the  leader. 
Inexperienced  wheelers  are  apt  to  turn  at  the 
moment  the  wheel  ahead  turns.  Should  you  be  fol- 
lowing close,  keep  on  your  own  line,  unless  you  see 
good  cause  to  change  your  direction.  If  the  leader 
wishes  to  stop,  let  him  turn  out:  if  3^ou  are  wanted, 
you  will  know  soon  enough.  Gain  all  the  dis- 
tance you  can  between  dismounts.  A  little  drill 
and  the  understanding  of  a  few  signals  will  prove 
ver}^  useful. 

For  the  public  at  large,  the  bicycle  may  be  spe- 
cialized to  suit  individual  needs,  and  locomotion  be- 
comes simplified,  distances  are  reduced,  and  the  ob- 
literated landscape  of  railroad  travel  takes  form  and 
substance.  Cycling  means  travel  over  well-con- 
structed highways,  with  telephone  and  telegraph, 
post-office  and  express  office,  usually  easily  acces- 
sible. To  enjoy  the  full  freedom  that  wheeling 
should  give,  little  luggage  should  be  carried,  yet 
that  little  must  include  all  necessaries. 

When  a  party  of  six  or  even  twelve  start  to  wheel 
a  given  distance,  what  are  the  problems  to  be  met? 
All  being  fairly  expert  cyclists,  in  good  practice,  so- 
ciability is  incidental  while  making  time.  On  the 
road  attention,  strict  attention,  to  business  and  to 
the  signals  is  necessary.  Conversation  is  not  pro- 
hibited; it  is  entirely  dependent  upon  the  nature  of 
the  surface  you  are  travelling. 


I'l'.w  mix  as  TO  remember. 


51 


How  to  keep  together  is  a  vexed  question,  and  a 
very  nice  adjustment  of  animate  and  inanimate 
mechanism  would  be  necessary  to  its  satisfactory 
settlement.  The  better  way  is,  all  knowing  the  road, 
to  wheel  along  independently,  with  an  occasional 
halt,  not  necessarily  a  dismount,  assembling  at  in- 
tervals of  half  or  three-quarters  of  an  hour.  The 
leader  should  keep  back  until  the  roller  of  the  party 
is  hailed,  and  has  reported,  then  increase  speed 
again  until  the  next  interval  has  elapsed.  Another 
plan  is  to  wheel  with  only  a  given  number  of  min- 
utes headway,  this  arrangement  keeping  the  roller-up 
always  within  hailing  distance. 

.  A  good  leader  deserves  implicit  confidence.  He 
has  responsibilities  aside  from  wheeling,  for  the  com- 
fort and  convenience  of  others  must  be  intelligently 
studied,  and  consideration  for  each  individual  cyclist 
in  the  party  makes  constant  demand  on  the  qualities 
of  tact  and  decision;  in  other  words,  the  leader  must 
possess  good  judgment  and  be  as  well  a  thorough  bi- 
cyclist. 

The  present  rate  of  wheeling  averages  ten  miles 
an  hour,  and  greater  speed  is  undesirable,  except 
for  special  purposes.  A  point  to  keep  in  mind  is 
that  every  five  m.inutes'  halt  is  a  mile  lost.  The 
time  lost  in  slowing  and  stopping  should  also  be 
carefully  taken,  as  it  is  of  value  in  reckoning  pos- 
sible mileage. 

There  are  grades  to  hesitate  about,  and  there  are 
grades  to  avoid.  If  a  grade  seems  possible,  try  it, 
but  dismount  the  instant  it  becomes  hard  work.  It 
is  better  to  dismount  too  soon  than  to  persist  too 


5^ 


Hli  YCI.iyC  FOR  LADIES. 


long.  Without  regard  to  the  inclination,  there  are 
two  principal  kinds  of  grades — the  increased  grade 
and  the  decreased  grade.  In  mounting  the  increased 
grade,  more  and  more  power  is  required  at  every 
stroke  to  push  the  machine  upward.  In  mounting 
the  decreased  grade,  this  additional  power  is  not 
necessary,  and  the  ascent  is  accomplished  with  little 
fatigue.  Increase  of  grade  means  application  of  more 
power  in  ascending,  and  an  increase  of  momentum 
in  descending.  This  is  on  the  whole  the  most  dan- 
gerous kind  of  bicycle  travel ;  for  over-work  on  the 
ascent,  loss  of  pedals  or  dangerous  coasting  on  the 
descent,  are  to  be  expected,  and  danger  should  be 
looked  for,  and  observed  in  time  to  be  avoided. 

It  is  always  well  to  walk  an  increasing  grade,  if 
the  hill  be  long  and  steep,  both  in  ascending  and 
descending.  The  decreasing  grade  has  many  pleas- 
ant features,  and  on  a  well-known  road  may  be  rid- 
den up  or  down  with  ease  and  with  little  danger  of 
injury.  It  is  interesting  to  watch  the  effect  of  indi- 
vidual adjustment  to  hill-work,  a  group  of  bicyclists 
being  almost  always  scattered  when  mounting  a 
grade. 

When  and  where  to  apply  power  and  when  to  make 
the  push  tell  best  on  his  own  machine,  each  cyclist 
must  determine  by  practice  and  experience.  Some- 
times a  long  and  apparently  easy  down-grade  is  ren- 
dered dangerous  by  its  increase  of  pitch;  and  seem- 
ingly easy  roads  are  often  difficult  to  travel  on  ac- 
count of  an  increasing  but  almost  imperceptible  as- 
cent. Unless  power  is  applied  to  the  stroke  at  the 
right  place,  much  inconvenience  from  fatigue  will 


./  /■7-:ir  11  fix  as  ro  remi-.m  b/-:r. 


53 


be  felt,  and  will  soon  overcome  the  ambitious  bi- 
cyclist. 

When  short  expeditions  are  to  be  undertaken — all 
trips  of  more  than  an  hour's  duration  being  so 
classed — remember  that  lack  of  preparation  means 
delay,  and  that  ignorance  entails  discomfort.  If  the 
start  is  to  be  an  early  one,  go  over  the  bicycle  care- 
fully, see  that  the  lamp  is  in  order,  that  matches  are 
convenient,  tools  and  repair-kit  in  place,  a  small  en- 
velope of  sewing  materials  with  needle  and  thread 
and  another  of  red-cross  supplies  in  the  pocket. 

I  have  often  been  laughed  at  for  taking  out  my 
lamp  for  a  short  afternoon's  ride  with  friends  who 
could  ride  well  enough  for  their  own  satisfaction; 
and  as  often  have  I  been  obliged  to  help  with  my 
lantern's  light  belated  wheels  coming  in  close  behind 
me.  A  lantern  is  a  convenience  at  dusk,  or  even 
earlier,  enabling  others  to  see  and  avoid  you;  and 
this  helps  more  than  the  uncertain  light  annoys. 

For  luncheon  on  a  short  trip,  it  is  quite  safe  to 
depend  on  the  road ;  if  you  carry  luncheon,  a  couple 
of  bread-and-butter  sandwiches  well  wrapped  in  wa- 
terproof paper,  and  thin  slices  of  cheese  in  a  sepa- 
rate paper,  or  hard  chocolate  and  water-biscuit,  are 
as  good  as  anything;  and  such  a  luncheon  may  pre- 
vent delay  in  swampy  or  foggy  or  damp  country  from 
becoming  dangerous. 

vStudy  the  country  you  are  to  travel  and  the  road- 
surface,  understand  your  map,  know  your  route,  its 
general  direction,  etc.  Always  observe  the  road 
you  cover;  keep  a  small  note-book,  and  jot  down 
everything  of  interest.     Use  the  pocket-compass, 


54 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


even  in  your  home  locality,  to  fix  general  direction; 
for  when  detained  at  night,  such  knowledge  may 
prove  useful.  Fog  and  rain  or  a  moonless  night  are 
bewildering,  rendering  familiar  roads  weird  and 
strange;  and,  unlike  the  driver  or  equestrian  in  the 
dark,  a  bicyclist  must  trust  to  himself  alone.  Wheel- 
ing in  the  dark,  however,  has  some  advantages, 
as  you  are  apt  to  ride  in  a  straight  line,  and  not 
turn  out  for  bad  places  in  the  road;  on  the  other 
hand,  a  certain  amount  of  risk  is  necessarily  taken. 
There  should  be  no  close  riding,  and  constant  care 
should  be  exercised  for  the  avoidance  of  collision. 

Cycling  offers  endless  opportunities  for  the  for- 
mation of  clubs,  and  cycling  clubs  there  are  of  all 
ages  and  sizes.  A  simple  form  of  club  for  the  ear- 
lier phases  of  the  sport  may  be  organized  in  this 
way:  Buy  two  bicycles,  and  form  as  small  a  club  as 
can  manage  their  purchase.  Keep  a  register,  and 
pass  the  bicycles  from  member  to  member,  for  say 
a  week  at  a  time,  repairs  in  case  of  accident  to  be 
paid  for  by  the  member  using  the  wheel  at  the  time 
of  the  accident.  The  cIuId  may  later  be  enlarged  by 
receiving  any  desired  number  of  members  and  pur- 
chasing additional  wheels  in  proportion.  But  noth- 
ing is  so  satisfactory  as  a  chosen  mount  of  your  own, 
adjusted  to  suit  3^our  individual  needs  and  kept  for 
your  own  exclusive  use.  A  bicycle  exactly  ad- 
justed to  your  liking  should  be  jealously  devoted 
to  your  individual  use.  A  beautiful  machine 
should  be  kept  free  from  finger-marks.  Keep 
a   chamois  and   a  clean  piece  of   cheese-cloth  at 


A  FEW  THINGS  TO  REMEMBER. 


hand  where  it  is  kept,  and  use  them.  Nickel  hold 
its  polish  if  not  attacked  by  acid  or  grease.  Enam 
el  should  be  treated  differently,  with  cold  water 
sponge  and  chamois,  after  light  dusting. 


CHAPTER  yJIL 


The  Art  of  JVbeeling  a  Bicycle. 

There  are  three  very  important  methods  of  con- 
trolling the  bicycle,  namely,  steering  by  the  hands, 
guiding  by  foot-pressure  on  the  pedals,  and  guid- 
ing by  the  swaying  of  the  body;  and  these  methods 
may  be  used  separately  or  in  combination. 

The  wheels  are  kept  in  motion  either  by  pedaling, 
or  simply  by  gravity  in  descending  a  grade.  The 
use  of  the  hands  on  the  handle-bar  is  two-fold  for  the 
inexperienced — for  steering  and  for  correcting  un- 
due pressure  on  the  pedals.  The  hand  opposite  the 
pedal  that  receives  too  much  pressure  corrects  the 
tendency  of  the  bicycle  by  an  extra  pull  on  the  han- 
dle-bars. This  is  very  good  exercise,  but  it  is  a  use- 
less expenditure  of  force,  and  cannot  be  prolonged 
without  great  fatigue.  It  is  the  work  of  hill-climb- 
ing done  on  the  level.  The  feet  are  on  the  pedals, 
and  the  natural  tendency  is  to  press  equally  at  all 
times  on  both  pedals  and  pull  at  the  same  time  on 
both  handles.  One  pedal  must  descend,  and  the 
other  pedal  must  ascend ;  they  are  attached  to  the 
same  axle,  which  is  turned  by  either  pedal  or  both 
pedals.  As  the  pedals  are  always  on  opposite  sides 
of  a  circle,  one  is  always  coming  up,  and  its  upward 


THE  ART  OF  IV II  EE  LING  A  BICYCLE. 


57 


tendency  is  resisted  by  any  pressure,  however  slight. 
The  lifting  of  the  foot,  therefore,  trom  the  ascend- 
ing pedal  means  easy  wheeling.  This  is  one  of  the 
hardest  things  to  realize.  If  there  is  little  or  no 
pressure  to  resist  from  the  up-coming  pedal,  it  is  ne- 
cessary to  expend  but  little  force  to  propel  or  push 
the  down  pedal ;  only  enough,  indeed,  to  overcome 
the  weight  or  inertia  of  the  bicycle  and  the  bicyclist 
and  of  surface  friction,  provided  there  is  no  grade. 
But  of  grades,  there  are  many;  and  to  this  is  due 
the  infinite  variety  of  the  sport  of  cycling,  the  mus- 
cular development  and  increased  respiration  of  the 
cycler. 

The  handle-bars  should  at  all  times  be  ready  to 
receive  a  sudden  grip  or  squeeze.  Grip  the  handles 
hard  when  you  want  to  hold  on,  and  only  pull  as 
much  as  is  absolutely  necessary;  for  if  the  arms  are 
stiff  and  rigid  from  pulling  on  the  bars,  they  will 
not  be  sensitive  enough  to  control  the  bicycle.  The 
handles  of  the  bar  are  the  ends  of  a  pair  of  levers; 
and  the  nearer  the  hand  to  the  centre  of  the  bar,  the 
less  power  is  needed  to  oppose  the  other  hand. 
When  there  is  a  tendency  to  pull  hard  on  the  handles, 
gradually  slip  the  hands  near  the  middle  of  the 
bar,  and  the  pull  will  ease  up.  The  front  wheel,  to 
run  easily,  should  run  steadily;  and  the  less  wiggle 
there  is,  the  better  for  steady  travel. 

The  pedal  is  the  projection  on  the  crank  adapted 
to  the  use  of  the  foot.  There  are  many  varieties  of 
pedals,  of  differing  sorts,  weights,  patterns,  and  pur- 
poses. The  foot  placed  on  the  pedal  pushes  it  down ; 
the  push  is  communicated  to  the  wheel  to  propel  the 


BICYCUXG  I' OK  LADIES. 


bicycle  forward.  As  the  pedal  leaves  the  dead  cen- 
tre, the  power  begins  to  take  effect,  and  continues 
until  the  dead  centre  below  is  reached.  Now,  it  is 
necessary  to  push  at  just  the  right  time  and  place; 
if  too  soon  and  too  hard,  the  wheels  of  the  bicycle 
will  go  too  fast,  and  must  be  retarded  by  pressing 
down  on  the  up-coming  pedal.  The  natural  weight 
pressure  of  the  foot  is  more  than  enough  to  propel 
the  bicycle  over  ordinary  surfaces  at  a  fair  rate  of 
speed,  without  the  application  of  great  muscular 
power. 

The  foot  should  be  placed  squarely  on  the  pedal, 
the  ball  of  the  foot  onl}^  resting  on  it,  and  the  toe 
pointing  downward.  The  foot  may  be  made  to  per- 
form divers  duties,  and  numberless  new  combina- 
tions of  pressure  can  be  and  are  called  for  and  ap- 
plied. 

To  appl}'  more  power  in  the  stroke,  begin  to  push 
when  the  pedal  is  all  the  way  up,  the  toe  pointing 
down  until  at  the  lowest  part  of  the  stroke,  ready  to 
follow  the  pedal  around,  pushing  it  backwards,  and 
helping  to  lift  it.  Here  the  toe-clip  helps,  and  holds 
the  foot  on  the  pedal,  in  the  place  where  the  ten- 
dency to  leave  it  is  greatest.  Balanced  pedaling  is 
a  little  different,  and  weight-pressure  on  the  pedal 
is  used  as  a  factor  to  overcome  the  front  wheel. 

Use  the  weight  as  much  as  possible  to  propel,  and 
reserve  the  push  for  hard  grade-work.  Keep  the 
knees  well  turned  in;  it  squares  the  foot  and  pre- 
vents the  ankle  from  receiving  hard  knocks.  ,  When 
the  knee  is  turned  out,  the  ankle  bones  are  turned  in, 
and  so  receive  many  a  bruise  that  could  have  been 


THE  ART  OF  WnEEIJIVG  A  BICYCLE.  59 


avoided.  To  keep  the  ankles  from  interfering,  turn 
the  knees  in,  and  ride  square  leg. 

Controlling  a  bicycle  on  a  down-grade  requires 
pressure  on  the  ascending  pedal.  Point  the  heel 
down  or  hold  the  toe  up,  and  an  even  pressure  will 
be  maintained.  Let  the  lift  come  with  the  heel  well 
squared  and  the  leg  as  straight  as  possible,  the  weight 
to  be  supplied  at  the  right  point  on  the  up  stroke  to 
control  the  machine.  Always  use  the  weight  when 
possible  as  a  supplementary  driving  power. 

The  pedals  differ  in  construction  and  in  material, 
being  differently  adapted  for  racing  and  for  road 
work.  A  pedal  with  a  good  broad  resting  surface 
for  the  foot  is  very  comfortable,  though  a  "rat-trap" 
pedal  used  with  a  stiff-soled  shoe  is  lighter  and  pre- 
ferable. Toe-clips  are  desirable  for  those  who  can 
use  them  easily,  but  for  a  novice  they  are  dangerous, 
being  liable  to  cause  the  mishaps  they  are  intended 
to  prevent.  Experienced  bicyclers  prefer  any  dis- 
comfort to  that  of  a  lost  pedal,  and  when  wheeling 
with  only  a  light,  even  pressure,  toe-clips  are  good 
reminders;  but  their  principal  use  is  to  apply  more 
power  and  help  the  foot  to  carry  the  pedal  around 
and  back. 

The  swaying  of  the  body  controls  the  bicycle  from 
the  saddle.  In  walking  the  bicycle  about,  it  is  soon 
perceived  that  it  may  be  directed  by  holding  the 
saddle  only.  The  pressure  comes  from  the  saddle, 
and  the  bicycle  is  swayed  by  the  rider,  by  leg  press- 
ure against  the  saddle.  There  is  little  or  no  shoulder 
movement,  and  the  body,  though  flexible,  does  not 
move  perceptibly.    When  starting  a  machine,  hold 


Go 


BICYCL/XC  FOA'  LA  DIES. 


it  well  balanced  by  the  handle-bars,  and  know  how 
much  inclination  to  allow.  Take  hold,  and  mount 
steadily  and  easily,  and  move  off  quietly,  noting  the 
running  of  the  bicycle.  Gradually  increase  the 
speed,  leaning  a  little  forward  to  lessen  any  sudden 
strain  and  to  help  the  push  on  the  pedals.  Then  in- 
crease the  stroke  to  the  desired  speed,  and  the  ma- 
chine will  take  care  of  itself.  Speed  power  may  be 
increased,  and  it  is  good  practice  to  slow,  and  start 
again  at  will. 

Figure  wheeling,  with  a  good  leader,  is  capital 
practice  to  insure  steadiness  and  increase  the  power 
of  control  over  the  bicycle.  It  is  not  easy  to  stop 
suddenly  when  going  at  a  good  rate  of  speed,  and  it 
is  well  to  know  3^our  limit  of  distance  in  such  case; 
nor  is  it  easy  to  spring  alertly  from  the  saddle  when 
bringing  up  in  a  dangerous  position,  even  when 
frightened  into  doing  it.  Back  pedal  hard,  grip  with 
the  hands  and  press  down,  holding  the  bicycle  still 
as  you  reach  the  ground.  The  pedals  will  not  get  in 
the  way,  and  it  is  well  to  remember  not  to  let  go  of 
the  machine  if  you  do  not  want  to  get  hurt.  To 
jump  off  and  hold  the  bicycle  still  may  at  times  pre- 
vent collisions. 

The  cyclist,  however  sure  of  his  skill,  should  not 
throw  his  machine  at  any  one,  even  inadvertently. 
There  is  much  unnecessarily  fine  riding  done — dash- 
ing between  two  passing  vehicles,  for  instance,  or 
rushing  through  a  gap  instead  of  wheeling  slowly 
behind  a  wagon  until  an  open  space  is  reached;  but 
some  prefer  the  stimulation  and  excitement  of  danger 
to  safety,  and  like  to  perform  such  hazardous  feats. 


THE  ART  OF  WHEELING  A  BICYCLE.         6 1 


Steering  is  a  subject  for  serious  consideration ;  a 
sharp  eye,  quick  determination,  constant  care,  and  a 
steady  hand  are  needed.  A  knowledge  of  steering  is 
essential  for  safe  coasting;  and  as  one  of  the 
pleasures  of  cycling  is  to  descend  easily  the  hill  you 
have  climbed,  a  fair  degree  of  steadiness  should  be 
attained.  Brakes  are  important  aids.  Learn  to 
brake  with  the  foot,  but  do  not  resort  to  this  expedi- 
ent unless  compelled  to. 

Now  to  consider  hill-work.  The  resistance  of  the 
grade  is  always  perceptible;  it  is  not  always  recog- 
nized. As  the  angle  of  ascent  increases,  the  powers 
of  the  bicyclist  are  taxed. 

The  spindle  of  the  pedal  describes  a  circle.  The 
foot  part  of  the  pedal  revolves  around  the  spindle, 
and  permits  the  foot  to  take  any  angle  that  is  needed 
for  the  best  application  of  power,  the  plane  always, 
however,  remaining  parallel  with  the  spindle.  This 
arrangement  of  the  pedal  allows  of  ankle-motion 
within  certain  limits;  and  to  give  greater  efficiency, 
the  foot  and  ankle  may  move  in  adjustment  with  the 
weight  and  power  to  be  applied.  This  is  the  much- 
talked-of  ankle-motion.  The  pressure  may  be  applied 
to  the  pedal  by  this  ankle-motion  at  any  part  or  at 
all  parts  of  the  circle  that  the  pedal  describes. 

As  constructed,  the  pedal  permits  free  ankle  and 
instep  movement,  prevents  cramping  of  the  foot,  and 
allows  the  foot  the  same  freedom  that  it  has  in  walk- 
ing or  running.  Ease  of  work  depends  on  proper 
application  of  power.  To  be  able  to  apply  just  the 
right  amount  of  push  to  carry  the  crank  past  the 
dead  centre,  and  to  pull  it  past  the  lowest  dead 


62 


BICYCLT.YG  FOR  LADIES. 


centre,  and  to  follow  the  pedal  accurately,  is  the  aim 
of  all  good  pedal  work.  The  push  down  is  almost 
instinctive;  but  the  lifting  of  the  weight  from  the 
ascending  pedal  can  be  acquired  only  by  practice, 
when  the  muscles  have  become  sufficiently  ac- 
customed to  the  work  to  move  without  the  effort  of 
mental  concentration  that  they  seem  to  require  in 
the  beginning. 

The  power  of  the  stroke  may  be  given  by  applying 
the  weight  after  the  dead  centre  is  passed. 

The  weight  should  be  entirely  removed  from  the 
ascending  pedal,  and  the  balance  and  s\a  ay  used  to 
take  the  pull  off  the  handle-bars  by  throwing  the 
weight  from  side  to  side  for  that  purpose.  The 
weight  and  balance  should  be  directed  in  this  way: 
If  the  push  on  the  down  pedal  only  is  used,  it  must 
be  corrected  by  a  pull  on  the  handle;  this  pull  in- 
creases as  the  grade  obstructs  the  wheel.  Skilful 
hill-work  shows  in  the  lessened  pull  on  the  handles. 

In  travelling  on  the  level,  the  ascending  foot  is 
pushed  up,  and  rested  by  being  lifted.  There  is  no 
reason  why  the  pushing  muscles  should  be  stronger 
than  the  lifting  muscles  of  the  leg  except  that  they 
are  accustomed  to  do  more  work. 

Always  try  to  ride  a  hill,  but  never  begin  by  look- 
ing at  the  top  to  see  how  far  off  it  is.  Pay  no  more 
attention  to  the  surface  than  is  absolutely  required 
by  the  nature  of  the  surface.  Concentrate  all 
thought  on  the  pedals  and  how  best  to  push  or  take 
the  pull  off  the  handle-bars.  Lean  a  little  forward  if 
necessary,  and  do  not  try  to  increase  the  stroke.  The 
number  of  strokes  is  bound  to  lessen  if  the  power  is 


THE  ART  OF  WHEELING  A  BICYCLE.  63 


not  increased  proportionately  on  the  ascent.  And 
how  can  the  power  be  effectively  applied  unless  the 
work  is  done  intelligently  by  mental  application,  or 
instinctively  by  the  use  of  accustomed  muscles? 

Hills  should  be  ridden  easily,  or  not  ridden  at  all. 
It  is  easier  to  wheel  up  an  ascent  than  to  walk  up, 
if  the  wheeling  is  properly  done.  Always  stop  before 
the  hill  proves  too  much  for  you.  Never  think  any 
incline  too  steep  to  attempt;  this  is  the  first  move 
on  the  road  to  successful  hill-climbing. 

The  seat  for  hill-work  should  be  made  to  support 
the  body.  The  bicyclist  should  not  be  obliged  to 
cling  to  the  handles  to  keep  from  slipping  off  over 
the  saddle;  there  should  be  something  else  to  push 
against.  To  get  all  possible  power  out  of  the  levers, 
there  should  be  a  sufficiency  of  fulcrum  for  the  lever 
to  work  against;  and  the  saddle  should  certainly  be 
made  to  do  duty  in  hill-work. 

If  there  is  no  support  from  the  rear  of  the  saddle, 
the  fulcrum  must  be  located  at  the  handle-bars, 
which  should  have  all  possible  strain  removed  from 
them  to  lessen  the  pedal  work.  A  saddle  placed  at 
this  angle  is  of  little  use  as  a  fulcrum  on  an  incline,  -j 
In  all  work,  levers  and  fulcrums  are  kept  in  position 
by  the  hands,  unless  the  weight  is  supported  from 
the  saddle.  If  this  principle  of  the  application  of 
power  is  considered,  the  usual  difficulty  of  hill-climb- 
ing is  overcome.  Why  should  it  be  harder  to  wheel 
up  hill  than  to  walk  up  and  push  a  bicycle? 

In  the  first  place,  it  is  necessary  to  be  able  to  stay 
on  the  bicycle  without  holding  yourself  on ;  in  the 
next  place,  to  know  how  to  apply  the  power;  and 


64 


BICYCL/XG  FO/s!  LADfES. 


then  to  perform  the  work,  keeping  all  essential 
points  well  in  mind.  Wheel  up  hill  with  the  mouth 
shut,  org-etoff;  wheel  slowly;  concentrate  power  to 
apply  it  most  effectively. 

Power  is  needed  in  overcoming-  both  the  crank 
dead  centres.  The  weight  should  be  applied  to  force 
the  crank  downward,  and  the  weight  lifted  to  let  the 
other  crank  rise.  The  body  s\vays  to  ease  the  handle 
pull,  and  the  bicycle  mounts  steadily.  The  inertia, 
of  course,  becomes  more  apparent  as  the  weight  is 
resisted  by  gravity;  so  do  not  attempt  to  force  or 
strain,  with  the  idea  that  hill-climbing  is  something- 
that  must  be  done.  It  should  be  done  only  when  it 
can  be  done  easily. 

The  rule  for  climbing  universally  recommended 
reads,  "Pay  no  attention  to  the  hills.  Ride  them." 
This  is  good  as  far  as  it  goes,  but  it  is  of  little  assist- 
ance in  mounting  an  incline. 

There  are  two  kinds  of  grades  independent  of  the 
angle — the  increase  grade  and  the  decrease  grade, 
in  ascending,  and  in  descending  as  well ;  for  descend- 
ing is  only  the  reverse  of  ascending.  In  approach- 
ing an  ascending  grade,  always  note  its  character, 
whether  long  or  short,  what  the  pitch  is,  and  particu- 
larly if  the  angle  of  ascent  increases  or  decreases  at 
the  top  of  the  incline,  and  prepare  for  the  work  be- 
fore you. 

Each  hill  has  its  peculiarities,  which  must  be 
studied  and  conquered.  The  actual  mounting  to  the 
top  is  not  all  you  have  to  do;  you  should  mount  in 
proper  trim,  arriving  at  the  summit  fresh  and  fit. 
It  is  most  saddening  to  see  some  one  else  mount  a 


TirE  ART  OF  WnEEIJXC.  A  lUCYCfJ'.. 


hill  easily,  leaving  you,  puffing  and  pushing,  half 
way  up,  and  to  know  that,  when  you  reach  the  top, 
speechless  and  exhausted,  that  exasperating  person 
will  be  seated  there,  cool,  contemplative,  and  com- 
fortable. 

Intelligent  practice,  however,  should  result  in 
scientific  attainment.  The  saddle  should  be  adjusted 
in  relation  to  tlie  pedals  for  the  carrying  of  the 
cranks  past  the  dead  centre.  The  angle  of  the  saddle 
should  be  studied,  and  the  adjustment  permit  of  its 
use  as  a  fulcrum  in  hill-work,  while  admitting  of 
balance-work  on  a  level  and  of  comfort  and  ease  in 
coasting.  It  should  support  the  weight  when  the 
feet  are  on  the  forks,  not  merely  permit  of  balancing. 

In  stud5nng  this  adjustment,  weight,  length  of 
limb,  strength,  and  the  work  to  be  done  should  all  be 
taken  into  consideration.  The  rule  that  what  is  lost 
in  speed  is  gained  in  power  should  comfort  the  hill 
climber  when,  half-way  up  a  grade,  the  bicycle 
gradually  loses  speed,  and  seems  to  be  stopping,  in 
spite  of  all  efforts  to  the  contrary. 

In  mounting,  the  machine  is  started  by  the  plac- 
ing of  the  weight  on  the  pedal,  and  in  hiJl-climbing 
the  weight  should  be  used  to  force  the  pedal  down 
and  around.  The  bringing  of  the  pedal  into  position 
where  the  weight  will  take  effect  is  the  true  secret 
of  success.  Follow  this  by  making  the  weight 
carry  as  far  as  possible,  prolonging  its  usefulness 
by  pushing  the  pedal  back  past  the  lowest  dead 
centre,  and  following  and  lifting  it.  But  it  is  use- 
less to  prolong  the  work  if  the  commencement  of 
the  stroke  is  not  executed  in  an  effective  manner. 


66 


niC)'i7./.V(;  /-OA'  LADIES. 


The  up-coming  pedal  must  either  be  pulled  up,  or 
have  all  weight  removed  to  permit  the  power  to  be 
fully  effective  on  the  down  pedal.  What  is  the  point 
where  power  applied  will  begin  to  tell?  If  the  up- 
per dead  centre  is  left  to  be  overcome  by  the  down- 
ward stroke  of  the  foot  on  the  pedal,  the  foot  on  the 
ascending  pedal  is  doing  no  work,  only  kept  from 
doing  harm,  held  in  a  cramped  position. 

After  carrying  the  crank  past  the  lower  dead 
centre,  the  weight  is  removed  and  the  angle  of  the 
foot  changed  from  pointing  the  toe  down  to  holding 
the  toe  up  and  dropping  the  heel.  As  the  foot-rest 
will  follow  the  sole  of  the  foot,  it  is  a  simple  matter 
to  change  the  pressure  from  pushing  and  pulling  lip 
to  pressing  and  shoving  over.  Before  the  crank  has 
arrived  at  the  top  of  the  circle,  say  at  sixty  degrees, 
the  heel  should  be  lowered,  and  the  attention  di- 
rected to  pushing  the  cranks  over  and  past  the  dead 
centre.  As  the  top  of  the  circle  is  reached,  the  foot 
levels,  and  prepares  to  point  the  toe  to  make  an  ef- 
fective downward  thrust.  Rise  from  the  saddle  a 
little  at  this  point,  to  make  the  weight  more  effective, 
and  prepare  to  carry  the  pedal  back  as  far  as  pos- 
sible. This  method  leaves  very  little  time  for  the 
foot  to  change  its  angle.  From  the  toe  pointing 
downward  to  the  toe  held  up  ready  to  push,  the 
change  from  pull  to  push  is  abrupt,  and  hill- work 
depends  on  correct  ankle-motion  more  than  anything 
else.  The  ankle-motion  may  be  corrected  b}"  sway- 
ing, the  hands  meanwhile  being  held  lightly  on  the 
handle-bars  ready  for  emergencies,  but  not  used  for 
the  work  of  climbing. 


THE  ART  OF  IVirEF.lJh'G  A  BTCYCI.E. 


67 


The  breathless  condition  induced  by  extra  work 
may  be  remedied;  for  the  upper  chest  is  forced  to 
expand,  while,  if  the  arms  are  held  rigid,  a  plentiful 
supply  of  air  for  the  lungs  is  not  insured.  (See 
Chapter  on  Exercises).  Free  combustion  is  needed 
for  the  extra  power  exerted. 

The  bicycle  and  its  load  are  lifted,  and  a  given 
weight  requires  a  given  power  to  lift  it.  That 
power  must  be  supplied  by  the  stored  force  of  the 
human  body,  and  must  be  utilized  to  the  best  advan- 
tage if  the  work  is  to  be  prolonged.  Hill-work  is 
not  impossible  of  achievement;  but  it  requires  intel- 
ligent work  unless  one  applies  mechanical  laws  in- 
tuitively. Easy  hill-work  is  delightful;  it  is  work, 
hard  work,  but  work  done  without  strain.  Nothing, 
on  the  other  hand,  can  be  more  injurious  than 
forced  hill-climbing;  the  strain  on  heart  and  lungs 
is  severe,  particularly  for  one  wearing  a  tight  belt, 
or  any  constrictive  clothing  about  the  waist. 

Because  a  hill  looks  rough  and  the  surface  difBcult, 
it  does  not  at  all  follow  that  it  will  be  bad  wheeling. 
If  the  tires  are  not  too  full,  inequalities  of  surface 
are  an  assistance,  helping  to  block  the  wheels,  and 
preventing  them  from  slipping  back,  while  the  soft 
tire  takes  up  the  stones  and  bumps,  holding  on  by 
them.  Always  look  well  at  your  hill  on  approaching 
it;  study  its  inclination,  determine  its  grade,  and 
the  nature  of  its  surface,  and  quickly  decide  how 
best  to  attack  it. 

,  On  mounting  the  top  of  a  grade,  never  hurry  or 
increase  speed;  wheel  along  slowly  and  easily,  with 
the  mouth  shut,  until^rested  and  really  ready  to  start 


68 


B/CVCLIXG  FOR  r.ADTES. 


Up.  If  there  is  a  good  coast,  don't  hurry  to  it,  but 
keep  working  gently  until  the  balance  of  the  respira- 
tory organs  is  fully  restored.  Then  take  the  coast, 
and  all  the  benefits  of  hard  work,  and  rest,  and  the 
exhilarating  effects  of  swift  motion  and  free  oxida- 
tion are  fully  realized. 

To  work  in  balance  or  equilibrium  is  the  aim  of 
hill-work,  and  there  should  not  be  too  abrupt  a 
transition  after  severe  exertion.  Pedal  along  at  a 
pace  to  restore  the  breathing  after  hard  work,  then 
change;  never  dismount  when  breathless,  but  wheel 
along  slowly.  The  strain  is  thus  much  less  than  by 
forcing  the  body  to  accommodate  itself  to  a  change 
of  position  just  when  a  general  easing  is  required,  a 
general  slackening  of  all  the  muscles  that  have  been 
at  work. 

Rest  always  before  dismounting  long  enough  at 
least  to  restore  breathing;  and  rather  than  coast 
after  climbing,  back-pedal  gently  and  slowly  if  the 
grade  should  descend  from  the  top  of  the  ascent. 

Never  let  a  hill  get  the  better  of  you,  if  it  is  one 
that  3^ou  have  a  chance  to  attack  a  second  time. 
Set  to  work  and  study  it.  Find  out  the  changes  of 
grade,  and  prepare  for  a  change  in  the  amount  of 
power  at  the  proper  place  in  the  incline.  See  if  the 
grade  is  simple,  prolonged,  or  compound.  If  the 
surface  is  very  smooth,  it  will  be  more  difficult. 
There  is  a  bit  of  road  that  I  remember  well,  a  country 
road,  seemingly  good  enough,  with  a  little  grade 
perhaps  in  some  places;  but,  one  after  another,  it 
dismounted  us  all.    A  heavy  Telford  pavement  was 


77//-;  Ak'T  oi'\rin:i-:j  fX(;  ./  iifcvcir:.  69 

laid,  but  there  wos  still  a  mile  and  a  half  of  that 
road  that  winded  the  best  of  us  every  time.  Though 
it  was  up  grade  all  the  way,  experience  had  taught 
us  that  at  places  we  must  stop,  and  mount  again  and 
go  on.  Our  machines  were  heavy,  but  this  fact  did 
not  explain  what  puzzled  us;  for  it  ought  not  to  be 
easier  to  start  a  heavy  wheel  up  a  grade  than  to  con- 
tinue to  wheel  up  steadily.  Knowing  this  bit  of  road 
so  well,  we  were  on  the  lookout  to  note  its  effect  on 
others;  and  there  were  always  wheels  lined  up  at 
some  part  of  the  road,  and  a  curious  variety  of  ex- 
pressions on  the  countenances  of  their  riders — puz- 
zled defeat  on  those  unacquainted  with  the  road,  and 
sad  determination  on  those  who  knew  it  too  well. 

After  a  careful  study  of  this  grade,  that  was  long 
but  not  steep,  and  seemingly  not  difficult,  we  found 
it  made  up  of  a  series  of  differently  inclined  planes 
and  curves,  the  up-curves  all  against  us;  and,  taken 
from  foot  to  top,  there  was  a  continued  increase  of 
pitch,  with  certain  changes  that  were  all  against 
wheeling;  and  moreover  a  generally  increasing  pitch 
for  the  whole  distance,  and  four  places  of  change  of 
grade,  each  change  an  increase  of  pitch  and  an  in- 
creased angle  of  ascent.  The  smooth  surface  con- 
cealed these  difficulties  at  first,  making  the  deceptive 
stretch  appear  easy  and  inviting.  It  waslike  the  in- 
side of  a  curved  line  set  with  scollops. 

To  overcome  this  most  difficult  kind  of  incline, 
wheel  along  at  a  good  pace,  note  the  increase  of 
grade,  and  drop  the  heel  at  the  beginning  of  the 
down  stroke,  or  rather  while  the  pedal  is  half  way 


70 


BICYCLl.YG  FOR  LADIES. 


on  the  up  stroke  and  the  foot  is  prepared  to  resist 
the  change.  Take  into  consideration  the  fact  that 
an  increase  of  power  is  necessary;  look  where  to 
apply  it,  adjust  the  balance  of  the  body  to  the  work, 
and  your  work  will  be  effective. 


CHAPTER  IX. 


Position  and  Power. 

The  racing  wheelman  has  adopted  a  position  that 
has  received  much  censure — a  position  accepted  as 
the  one  enabling  applied  power  to  produce  the  great- 
est speed.  If  this  position  is  analyzed  and  compared 
with  the  erect  position,  several  interesting  features 
may  be  noted,  and  by  comparing  the  two  positions, 
important  information  may  be  gathered. 

The  bicyclist  seated  upon  the  saddle,  not  against 
it,  has  little  power  for  work.  The  thrust  is  down- 
ward; there  can  be  no  forward  push  or  backward 
thrust,  unless  the  hands  grip  the  handle-bars  and 
pull  against  the  push,  if  the  push  needed  is  greater 
than  can  be  resisted  by  the  weight  of  the  body. 

The  power  of  the  stroke  is  all  in  the  downward  di- 
rection; there  can  be  but  little  power  in  the  forward 
thrust;  the  most  important  part  of  the  stroke  in  hill- 
climbing  is  that  given  by  getting  behind  the  pedal 
and  pushing  it  down.  If  the  saddle  be  too  far  for- 
ward, power  is  again  lost  in  the  push  and  thrust,  and 
the  up-and-down  motion  must  do  the  work,  and 
power  is  lost  on  the  down  thrust,  though  added  in 
the  upward  and  backward  push. 

We  may  conclude  that  a  proper  position  has  much 


72 


lUCYCLIXG  FOR  LADIES. 


to  do  with  the  work  of  bicycling;  that  there  is  more 
than  one  correct  position,  different  positions  being 
adapted  to  different  work.  The  racing  position  on 
the  bicycle  is  the  position  for  speed,  and  is  the  posi- 
tion of  the  running  athlete.  It  is  not  adapted  to 
moving  at  a  moderate  pace  or  to  being  rnaintained 
for  any  length  of  time.  It  is  the  position  in  which 
power  may  be  most  readily  converted  into  speed; 
where  the  leverage  may  be  applied  with  the  greatest 
efficiency,  and  the  greatest  amount  of  work  accom- 
plished in  the  least  possible  time. 

The  drop  position  also  takes  the  strain  off  the 
upper  leg  muscles,  and  is  desirable  on  that  account, 
apart  from  the  fact  that  more  power  may  be  exerted 
from  that  position.  The  leg  does  not  straighten  out, 
and  is  always  ready  to  give  a  powerful  stroke  and 
maintain  an  increased  or  even  speed.  It  is  a  posi- 
tion of  continuous  movement;  and  if  the  weight  and 
all  the  muscles  are  not  directed  to  propel,  the  weight 
is  improperly  supported  on  all  fours. 

The  position  for  speed  where  the  weight  is  dis- 
tributed between  handle-bar,  saddle,  and  pedals  is 
not  suitable  for  road  work,  nor  can  it  be  maintained 
for  any  long  period  without  injurious  results.  It  is 
the  position  where  power  is  best  converted  into  speed. 

For  prolonged  work  a  different  position  is  de- 
manded. Here  speed  is  not  a  necessary  factor,  but 
ease  of  movement  and  continuous  movement  are  es- 
sential. We  are  not  anxious  to  convert  power  quick- 
ly, but  rather  to  reserve  our  powers,  and  use  them 
slowly. 

For  pleasure  riding  and  ordinary  exercise,  the  erect 


POSITION  AND  POWER. 


73 


position  is  the  best.  The  drop  position  is  the  racing 
or  running  position;  the  erect  position,  the  position 
of  ease. 

Here  the  saddle  question  presents  itself.  The 
saddle  should  support  the  weight  while  seated,  or, 
in  the  racing  position,  hold  the  weight;  it  should  not 
hamper  movement,  and  should  be  comfortable  for 
coasting.  In  moving  over  the  ground,  the  relative 
position  for  the  balance  of  the  cyclist  changes  accord- 
ing to  the  grades;  and  the  seat  should  be  adjusted 
so  as  to  be  adaptable  to  the  different  positions  re- 
quired to  enable  the  bicyclist  to  change  the  balance 
for  the  work  of  the  moment. 

There  is  also  the  position  adapted  to  quick  work 
and  exercise.  Change  in  adjustment  of  the  applica- 
tion of  power  varies  with  the  amount  of  work  done 
by  the  bicyclist  in  covering  a  certain  distance.  The 
resistance  caused  by  change  of  speed  and  varied 
wind  resistance  have  also  to  be  taken  into  the  calcu- 
lation. People  of  different  lengths  of  leverage  must 
study  the  different  adjustments  of  the  machine  to 
produce  the  best  results  for  the  different  kinds  of 
work  required  of  the  machine. 

When  a  hill  is  to  be  surmounted,  the  climb  should 
be  made  without  effort,  that  is,  effort  understood  in 
its  technical  sense.  The  position  should  be  such  as 
to  permit  of  work  being  done  by  the  foot,  and  the 
power  should  be  applied  at  the  right  time  and  place. 
Assistance  by  a  pull  on  the  handle-bars  means  les- 
sened power  on  the  stroke.  Effort  succeeds  effort. 
The  work  should  be  done  by  the  foot,  the  pelvis 
being  the  fulcrum.    The  saddle  should  be  the  real 


74 


B/CVCLLVG  FOK  LADIES. 


fulcrum.  If  the  hands  are  used  to  do  the  work  by 
pulling,  the  pelvis  becomes  the  only  fulcrum,  and 
the  bicycle  saddle  is  not  used  at  all  for  the  applica- 
tion of  power.  The  weight  should  be  made  to  do  as 
much  of  the  work  as  possible,  and  the  added  resist- 
ance of  lever  pressure  made  auxiliary. 

To  obtain  leverage  for  the  hands,  it  is  necessary 
to  use  a  fulcrum.  Where  is  that  fulcrum  located? 
Each  set  of  muscles  pulls  on  its  point  of  application 
— the  hand  on  the  arm,  the  arm  on  the  shoulder,  the 
shoulder  on  the  thorax,  the  thorax  on  the  pelvis.  If 
more  power  is  needed,  it  must  require  effort. 

In  hill-climbing,  effort  is  a  physiological  phenom- 
enon associated  with  great  expenditure  of  force.  In 
making  an  effort,  exerting  force,  the  air-passages  of 
the  lungs  are  closed,  the  air  in  them  making  of 
them  an  air-cushion,  as  it  were,  which  acts  as  a  ful- 
crum for  certain  extra  muscular  combinations.  This 
accounts  for  the  feeling  of  suffocation  experienced  in 
severe  hill-climbing,  which  should  never  be  pro- 
longed. The  hill  should  be  climbed  with  the  hands 
held  easil5^  not  gripping  the  handles;  and  gripping 
and  pulling  on  the  handles,  it  should  be  remembered, 
lessen  the  power  for  prolonged  work.  Squeezing 
the  handle-bars  induces  involuntary  lung  compres- 
sion, and  pulling  on  them  adds  to  the  strain.  Lean 
forward,  if  need  be,  to  balance  and  maintain  the 
equilibrium,  but  do  not  maintain  the  centre  of  grav- 
ity by  pulling  on  the  handles. 

The  fixed  position  of  the  arms,  when  sitting  with 
spinal  column  erect,  certainly  prevents  a  full,  free 
inflation  of  the  lungs;  the  shoulders  are  held  fixed, 


POWER  A. YD  POSTTION. 


75 


and  between  the  saddle  and  the  fixed  shoulders  there 
is  no  up  and  down  lung-play.  In  running,  the  fore- 
arms and  shoulders  permit  free  chest  expansion.  In 
the  racing  position  on  a  bicycle,  the  arms  and 
shoulders  take  the  same  relative  position  as  in  run- 
ning, and  a  full,  free  lung  expansion  is  obtained. 

No  rigidity  is  maintained  between  shoulders  and 
saddle  in  the  racing  drop-position. 

For  speeding  and  work  of  that  kind,  the  position 
that  allows  of  the  greatest  flexibility  as  well  as  the 
greatest  leverage  is  the  position  to  be  chosen. 

In  travelling  and  in  every-day  wheeling,  the  posi- 
tion should  be  one  permitting  the  minimum  expendi- 
ture of  power;  the  weight  should  be  supported,  yet 
the  position  should  be  such  as  to  permit  the  weight 
to  be  used  as  a  propelling  power.  The  hands  should 
be  held  where  they  are  supported  and  in  the  position 
where  they  can  most  easily  control  the  wheel  under 
any  change  of  conditions.  The  saddle  should  be 
placed  where  the  foot  can  act  most  effectively  at  all 
parts  or  at  as  many  parts  as  possible  of  the  circle 
that  the  pedal  describes.  The  height  of  the  saddle 
should  be  calculated  to  permit  of  extension  of  the 
leg  without  supporting  the  weight  on  the  saddle, 
which  causes  compression  of  the  larger  veins  and 
arteries.  The  foot  should  at  all  times  be  fully  on 
the  pedal;  that  is,  the  position  should  permit  of 
throwing  all  the  weight  on  to  the  pedals,  whatever 
the  position  of  the  cranks  at  the  moment.  The 
handle-bar  should  be  adjusted;  also  length  of  arm 
and  relative  position ;  and  the  weight,  height,  a-nd 
curve  of  bar  adapted  to  suit  individual  build. 


76 


BfCVCLIXC  FOK  LADIES. 


Length  of  crank,  gear,  height,  position,  and  ad- 
justments of  saddle  may  be  used  as  factors  in  adjust- 
ment of  position  for  ease  of  movement  and  preven- 
tion of  fatigue.  Each  individual  has  different 
combinations  of  lever  power,  varying  with  the 
lengths  of  the  different  parts  of  different  limbs. 
One  ma}^  have  a  long  thigh-bone  with  short  lower 
leg;  another  may  have  just  the  reverse  combination 
— short  thigh-bone  and  long  lower  leg. 

The  crank  is  the  lever  of  application  of  power;  the 
gear,  the  power  in  resistance.  The  gear  determines, 
in  a  sense,  how  much  force  is  needed;  the  length  of 
crank,  combined  with  the  levers  of  foot  and  leg,  the 
proper  or  most  comfortable  lever  for  overcoming 
that  resistance.  Long-limbed  people  do  well  on 
long  cranks,  short-limbed  people  on  short  cranks, — 
the  question  of  length  of  limb  to  be  determined,  not 
by  actual  measurement,  but  as  to  the  proportions  in 
weight  and  length  of  limbs  generally.  Either  too 
long  or  too  short  a  crank  will  produce  numbness  and 
fatigue.  The  leg  and  foot  on  the  crank  as  it  works 
form  a  crank  lever  movement.  The  crank  of  a  bicycle 
should  be  of  such  length  as  to  permit  of  the  great- 
est amount  of  force  being  conveyed  along  the  lever 
movement  with  the  least  resistance. 

The  sprocket-wheel  is  the  weight  to  be  moved  by 
the  crank;  but  the  crank  is  only  one  of  a  series  of 
levers. 

The  knee,  the  ankle,  and  the  pedal-pin  must  re- 
volve in  a  circle  or  a  part  of  a  circle;  and  each  indi- 
vidual must  find  out  the  size  of  circle  that  is  deter- 
mined by  the  crank  that  will  best  move  in  adjust- 


POWER  AND  POSITION. 


77 


ment  with  his  individual  lever  combination.  A 
small  circle  on  the  pedal  may  mean  cramped  or 
uncomfortable  movement  for  a  long-limbed  cyclist; 
or  a  large  pedal  circle  too  great  distance  to  traverse 
on  the  stroke  for  a  short-limbed  cyclist.  A  stout 
person  working  on  a  high  gear,  with  a  crank  adapted 
to  his  requirements,  makes  fewer  strokes  of  the 
pedal  for  distance  traversed,  but  expends  more 
power  at  each  stroke;  therefore,  when  wishing  to  re- 
duce weight,  he  should  use  a  low  gear,  working 
rapidly,  and  when  wishing  to  travel  easily,  a  higher 
gear.  A  thin  person  should  be  careful  to  choose 
such  a  length  of  crank  and  such  a  gear  as  will  give 
ease,  so  that  undue  fatigue  may  be  avoided. 

The  position  of  the  saddle  should  be  most  carefully 
considered.  It  should  be  just  far  enough  back  to 
permit  of  getting  a  forward  pressure  on  the  pedal 
against  the  crank,  as  it  were,  at  the  top  of  the  stroke, 
and  yet  have  something  to  work  against  in  hill- 
climbing.  The  tilt  or  inclination  should  be  studied 
as  well  as  the  build  of  the  saddle;  its  height  from 
the  pedal  should  allow  the  foot,  when  on  the  pedal, 
at  its  most  distant  point  from  the  saddle,  to  press 
with  the  ball  firmly  on  the  pedal;  and  yet  the  saddle, 
when  the  leg  is  extended,  should  not  press  so  as  to 
compress  the  large  blood  vessels  of  the  inside  of  the 
leg  as  it  rests  against  the  saddle. 

The  handle-bar  adjustment  permits  of  individual 
preference  to  a  certain  extent.  The  handles  should 
be  within  easy  reach  of  the  hands  and  below  the  line 
of  the  elbow.  If  above  the  level,  power  is  lost,  and 
the  controlling  sense  of  direction  as  well.    The  grip 


1^ 


lUCVClJXC  FOR  LAnrF.s. 


on  the  handles  is  instinctive,  and  as  there  is  much 
work  for  the  hands  to  do,  they  should  be  able  to  grip 
easily  and  quickly,  and  to  move  easily  in.  all  direc- 
tions that  the  handles  take,  retaining  their  control- 
ling power  undiminished.  A  position  with  the  hands 
reaching  down  a  little  gives  more  power  than  a  posi- 
tion with  the  hands  reaching  up;  and  in  this  posi- 
tion the  leverage  of  the  elbows  and  the  power  of  the 
shoulder  and  upper  arm  may  be  more  effectively 
exerted. 

Speed  work  should  be  done  only  on  a  track  or  a 
place  set  apart  for  that  kind  of  work;  and  the  most 
delicate  adjustment  and  balance  of  weight  and  pres- 
sure should  be  studied  to  produce  the  proper  results. 
Scorching,  also,  to  be  effective,  should  be  done  only 
on  a  track,  and  the  position  for  the  work  should  be 
planned  most  carefully.  High  speed  over  rough 
surfaces  on  even  well-made  roads  may  prove  disas- 
trous if  the  position  for  the  work  is  not  a  correct  one. 
Serious  injury  may  result  to  the  bicyclist  working 
incorrectly,  with  wheel  out  of  adjustment. 

Scorching  and  racing,  however,  are  not  properly 
part  of  the  subject  of  bicycling,  but  are  a  sport,  and 
should  be  separately  considered. 

The  adjustment  of  position  may  be  changed  for 
rest  or  for  any  particular  purpose;  but  for  practical 
purposes  it  is  well  to  adopt  a  fixed  adjustment  of 
handle-bar  and  saddle  and  length  of  crank  and  gear, 
and  adhere  to  that,  endeavoring  to  acquire  the  best 
form  on  a  machine  adapted  to  suit  your  individual 
requirements. 

A  bicycle  should  be  used  only  by  the  person  for 


rowi'iR  Axn  rosrriox. 


79 


whom  it  has  been  adjusted;  for  comfort  on  a  bicycle 
depends  on  such  infinitely  small  adjustments.  Never 
lend  a  bicycle  or  a  tool,  and  never  make  any  change 
in  adjustment  by  guess.  For  ordinary  use,  the  sad- 
dle should  be  a  little  back  of  the  pedals  and  not  too 
high,  and  the  handles  within  easy  reach.  This  will 
allow  of  the  balance  and  adjustment  of  weight  and 
balance  to  suit  changing  conditions  of  surface  and 
grade. 

Sprinting  is  often  tempting,  and  comparatively 
harmless.  Scorching  is  a  form  of  bicycle  intoxica- 
tion, and  the  taste  once  acquired,  the  bicyclist  craves 
its  excitement,  caring  little  for  the  other  pleasures 
of  the  sport.  The  scorcher  sees  little,  hears  little, 
and  is  conscious  of  little  but  the  exhilaration  of  the 
moment,  and  seems  to  be  imbued  with  the  idea  of 
consuming  a  certain  amount  of  tissue  in  a  given 
time.  Scorching  is  a  form  of  bicycling  hardly  to  be 
commended,  and  reckless  scorching  is  to  be  con- 
demned at  all  times.  Sprinting  consumes  a  large 
quantity  of  material  in  a  limited  time,  and  though  it 
is  well  at  times  to  practise  speeding,  still  the  getting 
up  of  speed  involves  considerable  expenditure  of 
power  and  greatly  increased  momentum,  and  should 
be  indulged  in  only  by  those  who  understand  the 
limit  of  their  powers  and  know  what. they  hold  in 
reserve. 

The  wheel  of  to-day  was  evolved  on  the  race-track 
and  for  the  conditions  determined  thereon;  and  the 
amateur  bicyclist  owes  much  to  the  professional 
wheelman.  Improvements  in  construction,  in  de- 
tail, and  in  adaptability  have  reached  a  certain  limit, 


8o 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


a  limit  of  possibilities  in  certain  directions.  It 
behooves  us  now  to  accept  the  machine  and  to  adapt 
ourselves  to  its  requirements  and  to  avail  ourselves 
of  all  that  it  offers. 

The  elasticity  of  the  machine,  the  resiliancy  of  the 
tire,  rigidity  of  frame,  position,  vibration,  and  con- 
cussion should  be  next  considered. 

On  a  bicycle  fitted  with  a  rigid  saddle  and  with 
hard  tires,  well  blown  up,  the  vibration  that  is  con- 
veyed through  the  entire  machine  is  very  perceptible, 
even  on  a  smooth  wheeling  surface.  Over  uneven 
country,  Belgian  blocks,  or  other  rough  or  corrugated 
surfaces,  the  vibration  produces  concussion;  and  if 
too  erect  and  rigid  a  position  is  maintained,  fatigue, 
if  nothing  worse,  is  sure  to  result. 

On  a  horse  the  position,  while  erect,  is  studied  to 
lessen  the  concussion;  the  weight  is  carried  well 
under  to  avoid  it.  The  flexible  curve  of  the  spinels 
there,  though  not  perceptible,  as  the  body  is  held 
erect  and  in  balance.  The  lower  part  of  the  body 
becomes  part  of  the  saddle,  the  upper  body  flexible 
from  above  the  hips.  The  concussion  comes  as  each 
of  the  horse's  feet  is  placed  on  the  ground;  while 
concussion  on  the  bicycle  is  produced  by  the  change 
caused  by  each  inequality  of  surface.  The  pneumatic 
tire  lessens  this  to  a  degree,  if  not  blown  up  too 
hard;  for  inequalities  sink  into  the  yielding  surface 
that  would  make  a  wheel  with  a  hard  tire  bump. 

The  frame  should  be  stiff  to  hold  its  direction, 
and  the  saddle  elastic  enough  to  interrupt  the  vibra- 
tion'of  the  frame.  The  position  on  the  saddle 
should  be  studied  to  prevent  tension  or  compression 


POWER  AND  POSITION. 


8i 


of  any  of  the  joints,  large  or  small;  and  the  spine 
should  be  easily  erect,  not  stiff  and  rigid,  but  flexible. 

The  sense  of  balance  and  the  adjustment  required 
to  balance  the  bicycle  tends  to  keep  the  body  flexible. 
The  danger  to  be  avoided  is  concussion  induced  by 
a  rigid  position — a  position  where,  the  bones  being 
held  closely  against  each  other  by  tense  muscles, 
shock  is  easily  conveyed  over  the  entire  body. 

Let  the  weight  come  well  on  the  saddle,  in  such  a 
position  that  it  can  be  shifted  to  the  pedals  at  will; 
and  let  the  whole  trunk  be  flexible,  elastically  flexi- 
ble, equally  in  all  directions.  Then  the  bicycle  may 
be  controlled  almost  unconsciously  and  from  the 
saddle,  the  hands  being  used  only  in  an  auxiliary 
manner.  The  front  wheel  may  be  steered  and  con- 
trolled from  the  saddle  by  means  of  the  power  over 
the  front  wheel  gained  by  the  bicycle  frame  con- 
struction. 

Bicycling  can  be  thoroughly  enjoyed  only  when 
the  machinery  ceases  to  require  constant  and  concen- 
trated attention.  The  rhythmical  movements  of  a 
bicyclist  at  ease,  master  of  the  conditions,  comes  only 
with  confidence  and  the  persistent  practice  which 
causes  all  the  muscles  to  move  easily  together  in  un- 
interrupted combinations,  and  the  bicycle  no  longer 
to  require  conscious  attention. 


CHAPTFK  X, 


Difficulties  to  Ozrironie. 

There  is  the  mounting  difficulty  and  the  steering 
difficulty  and  the  pedaling  difficulty;  and  then  there 
is  the  general  difficulty  of  doing  all  these  things 
together. 

The  first  thing  to  do  after  learning  the  theory  of 
starting  and  stopping  the  machine  is  to  make  it  go. 
No  matter  what  happens,  keep  it  going,  the  faster 
the  better,  until  a  taste  is  acquired  for  the  pastime; 
until  the  going-forward -forever  idea  seems  to  have 
taken  possession  of  you. 

Then  you  want  to  try  it  again,  but  mounting 
seems  more  difficult  than  ever.  The  machine  will 
not  do  anything  it  ought  to  do;  it  bucks  and  kicks 
and  stops  and  spills  and  slips,  and  will  not  stand  still, 
or  even  move  on.  You  know  how  to  mount,  or  think 
you  know;  but  that  knowledge  does  not  seem  to  aid 
materially  in  overcoming  the  tendencies  of  the 
machine. 

Now  be  sure  that  you  do  know  what  to  do.  The 
first  thing  to  know  is  that  the  weight  placed  on  the 
pedal  starts  the  machine ;  that  the  foot  on  the  ground 
will  hold  the  machine,  and  keep  it  from  starting; 
that  the  machine  when  in  motion  will  move  without 


rRF.PARIXC,  TO   MOUNT — SHOWING  INCLINATION. 


DIFFICULTIES  TO  OVERCOME. 


83 


falling,  and  when  at  rest  will  not  stand  still  unless 
held  up. 

Then  determine  the  amount  of  inclination  the  bi- 
cycle requires  to  balance  against  your  weight.  The 
weight  placed  on  the  pedal  pulls  the  machine  up  to 
a  vertical  plane;  and  the  inclination  to  be  calculated 
for  soon  becomes  an  accepted  quantity.  In  gripping 
the  handles  and  inclining  the  machine,  the  balance 
that  is  felt  will  set  you  up  on  your  wheel. 

In  mounting,  the  beginner  is  apt  to  stand  too  far 
behind  the  mounting  pedal.  The  position  should  be 
beside  it,  and  the  mounting  foot  be  placed  over  the 
frame  and  on  the  pedal.  Then,  raising  the  weight 
by  means  of  the  handles,  step  off  the  ground,  letting 
the  pedal  take  the  weight.  Do  not  give  any  push 
from  the  foot  on  the  ground,  but  step  off  the  ground 
as  you  step  on  the  pedal.  Stepping  on  the  pedal 
sets  the  machine  in  motion,  and  rights  it  at  the  same 
time.  There  is  nothing  now  to  do  but  to  let  the 
pedal  lower  you  to  the  saddle,  and  hold  the  other  foot 
up  until  the  other  pedal  comes  around  and  carries 
the  foot  forward. 

In  mounting,  the  weight  should  be  distributed 
between  the  handles  and  the  pedal  until  seated  on 
the  saddle.  To  practise  mounting,  take  the  wheel, 
and  start  on  a  very  slight  down  grade.  Never  at- 
tempt to  practise  mounting  against  a  grade,  no 
matter  how  slight  the  inclination.  A  careful  in 
structor  teaches  mounting  and  dismounting  thor- 
oughly; but  if  a  poor  method  has  been  acquired, 
practise  alone  until  you  have  gained  confidence 
and  perhaps  a  few  bruises.    The  only  way  to  succeed 


84 


BICYCLIXG  FOR  LADIES. 


is  to  try  and  try  again.  Practise  fifteen  minutes  at 
a  time,  for  it  is  fatiguing  work;  and  do  not  become 
discouraged.  With  sufficient  practice,  the  difficulty 
vanishes. 

Never  practise  mounting  when  tired;  for  you 
should  be  alert,  and  all  your  muscles  responsive. 
But  persist;  practise  first  mounting,  and  then  dis- 
mounting; and  then  rest  by  walking  the  machine 
about  to  learn  its  balance. 

Any  one  who  rides  or  drives,  or  rows  or  sails, 
knows  something  of  the  art  of  steering, — pulling  or 
pushing  on  one  side  or  the  other  to  change  direction, 
— and  on  mounting  a  bicycle  has  only  to  apply 
knowledge  already  acquired.  In  steering  a  bicycle, 
look  directl}^  over  the  centre  of  the  handle-bars  in 
the  direction  you  wish  to  take,  and  push  or  pull  the 
wheel  until  the  centre  of  the  bars  coincides  with 
your  objective  point.  This  is  really  what  is  done; 
but  the  machine  is  so  delicately  sensitive  that  you 
change  its  direction  almost  without  knowing  that 
you  are  doing  so.  You  go  where  you  look;  the 
hands  follow  the  eye;  and  the  art  of  steering  a  bi- 
cycle resolves  itself  into  knowing  where  you  w^ant  to 
go,  and  looking  in  that  direction  as  you  move.  In 
steering  or  mounting,  always  have  an  objective 
point.  Look  up  the  road  well  ahead,  and  keep  the 
general  direction. 

A  difficulty  early  experienced  is  uncertain  steer- 
ing and  an  uncertain  sense  of  direction.  When  you 
are  out  for  practice,  look  well  ahead  towards  the  end 
of  your  road  over  the  handles.  Novices  run  into 
anything  they  look  at,  and  must  concentrate  their  at- 


INCORRF.CT  MOUNTING  TOSITION- 


DIFFICULTIES  TO  OVERCOME. 


tention,  therefore,  on  the  direction  the  bicycle  ought 
to  take. 

The  weight  inclined  from  side  to  side  steers  the 
bicycle;  pressure  on  either  pedal  steers  it  as  well. 

Correct  and  effective  pedaling  is  a  very  difficult 
attainment,  to  be  acquired  only  with  care  and 
practice.  First  make  the  bicycle  go,  then  study  how 
you  doit,  and  improve  your  method.  Keep  in  mind 
the  points  that  are  required  for  correct  pedaling. 
The  early  difficulty  experienced  is  to  keep  the  knees 
and  ankles  in  proper  line.  Turning  the  knees  in  and 
the  heels  out  will  prevent  the  ankle-bones  from  strik- 
ing, a  difficulty  that  many  experience. 

The  reason  that  mounting  is  so  difficult  for  some  is 
because  the  foot  is  placed  incorrectly  on  the  pedal, 
with  the  toe  pointing  out.  The  foot  should  be 
parallel  with  the  frame  of  the  bicycle,  and  the  knee 
turned  in;  or  else,  when  the  weight  is  raised,  the 
ankle  will  strike,  and  the  discomfort  of  the  blow  will 
render  the  attempt  to  mount  unsuccessful.  The  po- 
sition seems  awkward  until  correctly  acquired;  but 
the  awkwardness  is  due  usually  to  lack  of  confidence 
to  come  close  to  the  machine  and  to  taking  a  position 
too  far  back  of  the  mounting  pedal. 

The  change  of  direction  on  mounting  often  proves 
confusing,  and  the  bicycle  must  be  steadied,  and 
made  to  keep  its  direction  at  the  same  time. 

Choose  your  direction,  and  assure  yourself  of 
plenty  of  room  to  work  in,  away  from  trees  or  stones 
or  other  objects  that  might  prove  a  source  of  danger 
in  case  of  collision.  Then  mount  and  go.  Keep 
these  two  ideas  well  in  mind.    If  you  are  uncom- 


86 


BIC  )  ■(  7,  l\C  FOR    LA  J)JKS. 


fortable,  stop  and  get  off;  don't  try. to  adjust  any- 
thing while  in  motion.  When  you  get  on,  go. 
You  cannot  get  on  and  keep  still.  Do  not  get  on 
unless  you  are  ready  to  go;  keep  going  when  you 
are  on;  and  the  mounting  difficulty  vanishes. 

Steer  steadily,  and  be  quick  without  haste.  A 
hurried  change  of  direction  can  only  be  made  with- 
out danger  of  a  spill  by  an  expert,  and  then  only  in 
an  emergency  or  for  track-work.  Bicycling  requires 
precision,  and  haste  or  hurry  is  out  of  place,  while 
quick  and  alert  movement  is  required. 

Take  the  bicycle  out  and  do  as  much  as  you  can 
with  it.  Part  of  the  fun  is  conquering  difficulties, 
and  each  difficulty  overcome  is  an  achievement. 

Another  difficulty  experienced  is  striking  the 
saddle  in  mounting.  This  is  usually  due  to  spring- 
ing from  the  ground-to  the  saddle,  or  attempting  to 
do  so,  instead  of  stepping  on  the  mounting  pedal, 
and  supporting  and  holding  the  weight  on  the 
handle-bars.  Of  course,  if  the  w^eight  is  not  sup- 
ported on  the  machine,  and  the  machine  is  started, 
it  cannot  carry  the  weight  forward.  The  saddle 
will  strike,  and  push  you  over.  Mount  by  means  of 
the  handle-bars;  let  them  take  you;  shift  the  weight 
up  by  them  on  to  the  pedal.  Then  lower  the  weight 
to  the  saddle,  step  clear  of  the  ground,  and  lean  a 
little  over  the  bars  if  necessary  to  clear  the  saddle. 

In  mounting  a  bicycle,  you  mount  up  on  the  pedal, 
and  settle  from  that  down  to  the  saddle.  If  the  pedal 
strikes  the  other  foot,  it  is  because  the  foot  is  not 
held  up.  Do  not  be  in  dread  of  that  other  foot;  hold 
it  well  up  out  of  the  way,  using  the  mounting  foot 
to  make  the  machine  go. 


nrFFICULTIES  TO  OVERCOME. 


87 


Too  great  inclination  of  the  machine  will  spoil  the 
mount,  and  insntficient  inclination  will  have  the 
same  effect.  The  front  wheel  must  be  held  in  line 
with  the  frame,  and  any  wrong  tendency  corrected 
by  the  handle-bars  after  the  weight  is  raised  on  the 
pedal,  and  the  machine  is  upright. 

Many  good  tires  are  ruined  by  ineffectual  efforts 
to  mount.  The  machine  is  pulled  against  the  tire, 
and  it  is  hard  to  understand  why  the  tires  are  not 
torn  off  or  ripped  to  pieces.  The  light  wheels  are 
not  made  to  stand  such  usage;  and  it  is  a  mistake  to 
subject  a  new  wheel  to  it.  The  rubber  is  pulled 
sidewa3^s  (a  proper  way  to  pull  a  tire  off),  and  the 
novice  is  fortunate  if  the  bicycle  is  not  all  pulled  out 
of  true  by  being  strained  in  directions  not  calculated 
to  resist  wear  and  strain.  A  twenty-pound  wheel 
may  be  pulled  out  of  true  and  so  bent  and  untwisted 
by  ineffectual  mounting  efforts  that  it  cannot  be  re- 
stored without  labor  that  amounts  to  practically  re- 
building the  bicycle. 

In  turning  a  bicycle,  always  lean  in  the  direction 
the  machine  is  inclined.  Lean  in  the  direction  you 
want  to  go,  and  very  little  correction  will  be  needed 
from  the  handle-bars.  In  turning,  lean  with  the 
wheel,  and  meet  it  with  the  handle-bars.  Meeting 
the  machine  is  done  continually,  and  is  done  by 
swinging  the  front  wheel  to  meet  the  inclination  of 
the  bicycle  on  whichever  side  it  has  a  tendency  to 
fall.  Bringing  up  is  done  by  pulling  the  wheel 
around  a  little  further  quickly,  and  very  quickly 
back  again.  The  frame  is  lifted  by  the  front  wheel. 
This  is  explained  in  the  principles  of  bicycle  con- 


88  BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 

striiction.  When  an  obstacle,  as  a  car  track  or  rut 
in  the  road,  is  met,  the  obstacle  must  be  crossed 
squarely;  or  if  obliged  to  make  a  different  angle, 
the  angle  should  be  met  with  the  front  wheel  at  the 
instant  of  contact,  and  a  proper  balance  maintained 
with  the  pedals. 

To  stop  and  stand  still,  pedal  slowly  until  the 
machine  is  almost  ready  to  stop;  then  "catch  the 
pedals  half  w^ay,  "  that  is,  stand  en  them,  rising  from 
the  saddle,  having  the  pedals  at  equal  heights,  and 
alternate  the  pressure.  Hold  the  saddle  firmly, 
pressing  against  both  sides  to  feel  the  balance  and 
to  hold  the  balance  by  means  of  the  saddle  between 
the  pedals  with  the  weight  on  the  feet. 

As  you  catch  the  pedals,  give  the  front  wheel  a 
sudden  twist  towards  the  back  pedal,  which  will  pre- 
vent the  bicycle  from  falling  on  that  side;  then  con- 
trol the  balance  by  the  weight  on  the  other  pedal,  and 
if  necessary  restore  balance  by  a  quick  twist  of  the 
front  wheel.  The  best  way  to  practise  this  is  to  stop 
near  a  smooth  wall,  and  use  that  to  assist  to  steady 
the  balance. 

Two  people  can  stop  and  stand  still  in  this  way, 
crossing  hands  as  in  skating,  gripping  the  inner 
handles  of  the  bicycles,  and  stopping  by  holding  the 
pedals  and  controlling  the  front  wheels  by  the 
handles,  using  the  outer  hand.  This  makes  a  very 
pretty  and  effective  pause. 

Numbness  undoubtedly  comes  from  interrupted 
circulation,  caused  either  by  the  clothing  or  the 
method  of  working.  Numbness  of  the  hands  and 
fingers  may  be  traced  generally  to  tight  clothing. 


ff 


DIFFICUL  TIES  TO  0  VERCOME,  89 

and  after  all  surface  pressure  is  removed  may  safely 
be  attributed  to  a  too  tight  gripping  of  the  handles. 
A  large  soft  glove  often  aids  to  prevent  numbness  of 
the  fingers;  if  gloves  are  not  worn,  the  hand  is  apt 
to  grasp  too  closely.  Change  of  position,  too,  will 
tend  to  counteract  numbness.  It  is  not  well  to  work 
too  long  at  a  time  without  a  rest,  if  there  is  any  ten- 
dency of  this  kind.  Walk  up  hill  or  on  the  level  to 
restore  the  circulation. 

Numbness  of  the  foot  can  be  caused  by  surface 
pressure,  the  shoes,  or  the  saddle.  Sitting  too  close 
to  the  saddle  while  working,  instead  of  carrying  the 
weight  on  the  pedals,  is  apt  to  produce  numbness  of 
the  feet.  Garters  or  belts  will  have  the  same  effect, 
and  must  be  watched  and  regulated.  A  shoe  adapted 
for  walking  is  not  at  all  suitable  for  serious  bicycle 
exercise;  the  strains  and  pressure  all  come  in  the 
wrong  places,  and  confine  and  numb  the  feet.  Free 
ankle  movement  is  imperative,  and  freedom  for  the 
lower  muscles  of  the  calf  of  the  leg;  room  for  the 
feet,  and  especially  for  the  toes  to  spread  and  to  as- 
sist in  pressing  the  pedal.  The  sole  of  the  shoe 
should  be  stiff,  to  prevent  bruises  from  the  pedals  or 
from  irregularities  on  the  ground. 

Concussion  and  a  consequent  vibratory  movement 
of  the  bicycle  are  impossible  to  avoid,  but  they  need 
not  affect  the  wheeler  injuriously.  Numbness  is 
sometimes  due  to  a  condition  of  the  nerves  of  the 
parts  affected  by  the  vibratory  movement.  To  pre- 
vent this  condition  of  affairs,  never  wheel  with  the 
weight  on  the  hands,  nor  grip  the  handles  of  the 
handle-bars  too  tight.    Rest  the  hands  lightly  on  the 


90 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


handles,  and  be  prepared  to  squeeze  hard  when 
necessary.  Study  the  best  position  and  most  con- 
venient height  for  the  hands  when  the  machine  is 
best  under  control,  and  the  jar  and  vibration  are  not 
perceived.  All  joints  of  wrist,  elbow,  and  shoulder 
should  transmit  any  motion,  not  locate  it,  by  being 
fixed  or  rigid  at  any  point. 

The  tire  of  the  wheel  should  not  be  hard,  nor 
should  the  saddle  be  fitted  with  springs;  and  it 
should  be  so  placed  as  to  allow  the  rider  to  rise  easily 
on  the  pedals  for  rough  wheeling.  These  rules  being 
observed,  serious  danger  from  this  cause  need  not  be 
apprehended. 

Wheeling  over  cobble-stone  pavement  or  over  good 
Belgian  blocks  produces  a  marked  vibration  in  the 
bicycle.  It  would  be  a  satisfactory  test  for  adjust- 
ment of  position  to  be  able  to  wheel  over  such  a  sur- 
face with  comfort,  feeling  the  vibration  of  the  bi- 
cycle hardly  at  all. 

The  difficulty  experienced  in  wheeling  over  rough 
surface  is  caused  by  lack  of  confidence  and  by 
general  stiffness  of  all  the  muscles,  which  causes  the 
full  force  of  the  vibration  to  be  felt.  In  carrying 
the  weight  on  the  pedals,  the  vibration  is  less  in- 
tensely felt.  To  grip  the  handles  for  rough  surface 
riding  is  almost  involuntary,  but  it  is  accompanied 
by  acute  discomfort  from  vibration.  Pedal  work 
only  will  meet  this  difficulty. 

There  are  different  methods  of  mounting.  The 
pedal  mount  is  usually  the  one  first  attempted  on  a 
drop-frame  bicycle;  the  mount  over  the  wheel  on  a 
diamond-frame. 


DIFFICUL  TIES  TO  O  VERCOME. 


91 


The  diamond-frame  mount  from  the  peg  is  made 
in  this  way:  Standing  directly  behind  the  machine, 
the  handles  of  the  handle-bars  are  grasped  firmly. 
One  foot  is  placed  on  the  peg,  and  the  wheel  in- 
clined away  from  that  foot;  the  foot  on  the  ground 
gives  a  shove,  and  the  bicycle  moves  off,  carrying 
the  weight  on  the  peg;  and  the  other  foot  swings 
forward  to  catch  the  pedal,  which  was  a  little  behind 
the  top  of  the  circle  on  starting. 

The  drop-frame  has  several  rather  pretty  pedal 
mounts  and  vaults.  In  one,  the  bars  are  held,  and 
the  machine  is  started.  Watch  the  rhythm  of  the 
pedal,  and  as  it  passes  the  top  of  the  stroke,  incline 
the  machine  away  from  you,  place  the  other  foot  on 
the  pedal,  swing  the  foot  next  the  machine  over  in 
front,  and  catch  the  other  pedal  as  it  rises;  then  sit 
easily  on  the  saddle.  The  vault  is  made  after  start- 
ing the  machine,  running  or  hurrying  along,  and 
springing  from  the  ground  to  the  saddle,  using  the 
handles  to  help.  The  pedals  are  found  after  being 
seated  on  the  saddle;  and  the  machine  moves  with 
the  momentum  given  it  in  running  before  rising  in 
the  vault. 

There  is  a  mount  from  the  pedal  on  the  same  side 
on  which  you  are  standing.  Start  the  bicycle,  and 
keep  along  with  it,  watching  the  pedals.  As  the 
pedal  near  you  comes  up  and  over  the  top  of  the 
curve,  step  on  it  with  the  outside  foot,  inclining  the 
machine  well  away  from  you;  at  the  same  time  the 
weight  will  carry  the  pedal  around  with  you,  and  as 
it  rises,  the  other  pedal  and  the  saddle  can  be  found. 
The  same  mount  may  be  made  without  starting  the 


92 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


machine.  Hold  the  machine  inclined  from  you; 
place  the  outside  foot  against  the  pedal  until  it  is  at 
its  furthest  point  away  from  you;  hold  the  bicycle 
firmly,  and  step  on,  swinging  the  foot  off  the 
ground  around  to  the  other  pedal,  in  front  of  the 
saddle,  not  behind  it.  On  the  diamond-frame,  the 
same  mount  is  made,  only  the  foot  is  swung  behind 
the  saddle,  not  in  front  of  it,  as  is  possible  on  the 
drop-frame  machine. 

To  stop  the  bicycle  with  another  person  on  it, 
grasp  the  handle-bars,  and  take  hold  of  the  shoulder 
of  the  person  propelling  the  bicycle,  if  necessary. 


\ 


CHAPTER  XL 


Dress, 

The  matter  of  dress  for  bicycling  is  quite  impor- 
tant from  the  hygienic  standpoint. 

Clothing  should  be  most  carefully  selected,  with 
the  view  to  an  equal  distribution  of  weight  and  an 
even  thickness  of  material ;  it  should  have  no  con- 
stricting, no  tight  bands  anywhere,  but  should  per- 
mit of  absolute  freedom  of  movement,  and  be  warm 
enough  to  prevent  chilling  through  too  great  radia- 
tion of  heat,  yet  porous  enough  to  allow  of  free 
evaporation. 

All  seasons  of  the  year  permit  of  c^^cling;  the  bi- 
cyclist therefore  has  opportunity  for  much  variety 
in  dress.  The  essentials  are  knickerbockers,  shirt- 
waist, stockings,  shoes,  gaiters,  sweater,  coat,  no 
skirt,  or  skirt  with  length  decided  by  individual 
preference,  hat  and  gloves. 

The  knickerbockers  should  be  very  carefully  cut; 
smooth  and  tight  just  over  the  top  of  the  hips,  and 
fitting  easily  below;  not  fulled  or  gathered ;  full  at 
the  knees,  and  boxed  or  finished  with  a  band  and 
button  and  button-hole;  nothing  elastic  on  any  ac- 
count. The  stockings  should  be  worn  folded  on  the 
boxed  part  of  the  knickerbockers,  below  the  knees, 
and  rolled  down  and  held  by  the  band  of  the  knicken 
bockers,  being  fastened  below.    This  arrangement 


94 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


does  away  with  garters,  which  compress  surface  cir- 
culation, or  pull  if  attached  at  the  waist,  causing 
pressure  where  they  pull,  and  are  most  objectionable 
for  many  reasons.  The  knickerbockers  should  be 
made  of  cloth  or  woollen  material. 

The  shirt-waist  should  have  wristbands  or  sleeves 
finished  to  open  a  little  way,  and  button;  the  neck 
finished  with  a  band,  with  a  detachable  collar  of  the 
same  material.  The  body  of  the  waist  should  be 
shaped  to  the  figure  at  the  sides  and  back,  gathered 
slightly  in  the  front,  and  finished  at  the  waist=line 
without  a  band,  and  may  be  of  the  same  material  as 
the  rest  of  the  suit.  The  knickerbockers  should 
button  to  this  waist,  the  places  for  the  buttons  being 
reinforced.  The  stockings  should  preferably  be  of 
wool,  and  of  a  seasonable  weight. 

The  combination  of  knickerbockers,  shirt-waist, 
and  stockings  forms  the  essential  part  of  a  cycling 
costume.  A  union  under-garment  may  be  worn  and 
the  knickerbocker  suit;  over  this  a  coat  and  a  skirt 
if  desired,  wdth  a  sweater  for  an  extra  wrap. 

Bicycling  is  warm  work,  and  the  clothing  should 
always  be  rather  light  in  weight.  For  touring  it 
must  all  be  carried  on  the  wheel,  and  yet  be  heavy 
enough  for  comfort  when  not  exercising,  and  not 
too  heavy  for  work,  and  should,  moreover,  allow  of 
adjustment  for  changes  in  temperature  or  for  any 
required  change  in  distribution.  To  this  end,  all 
the  clothing  should  be  of  one  color  or  of  colors  that 
look  well  together.  The  knickerbockers,  waist,  and 
skirt  should  match;  then  if  the  coat  is  removed,  the 
costume  looks  complete.    An  outfit  might  consist  of 


DRESS. 


95 


two  suits  complete,  of  different  weights;  sweaters  of 
different  weights;  wool  stockings,  heavy  and  light, 
that  will  roll  below  the  knee  without  being  either 
bulky  or  tight. 

The  knickerbockers  are  better  fastened  with  a 
button,  the  button  being  in  just  the  right  place,  than 
with  a  strap  and  buckle,  which  is  liable  to  be  pulled 
too  tight  at  times. 

The  shoes  should  be  low,  made  of  thin  leather, 
laced  well  down  toward  the  toe,  with  light  uppers, 
and  soles  stiff  yet  flexible,  and  made  with  grooves 
to  take  the  pedals  and  prevent  slipping.  Blocks  or 
cleats  on  the  soles  to  fit  the  pedals  are  sometimes 
preferred,  but  are  hardly  so  good  for  general  work. 

The  gaiters  may  be  made  of  almost  any  suitable 
material,  leather,  canvas,  or  woollen,  to  match  or  con- 
trast with  the  rest  of  the  costume.  They  should 
fit  easily  around  the  ankle  and  over  the  instep,  and 
should  never,  on  any  account,  extend  more  than  half 
way  to  the  knee.  The  muscles  of  the  calf  of  the  leg 
must  have  room  to  work ;  and  gaiters  badly  cut,  or 
too  tight  or  too  long,  would  impede  circulation  and 
restrict  muscular  action. 

The  sweater  should  come  well  up  around  the  neck, 
and  pull  down  easily  below  the  saddle;  it  is  better 
too  long  than  not  long  enough  to  cover  the  large 
muscular  masses  that  have  been  at  work,  and  may 
be  turned  up  if  in  the  way.  It  should  slip  on  easily, 
and  be  soft  and  woolly,  and  not  so  cumbersome  that 
the  coat  cannot  slip  on  over  it  and  be  buttoned  up  to 
the  throat. 

The  coat  should  be  cut  long-waisted,  and  easy 


96 


BICYCLTA'G  FOR  LADIES. 


across  the  shoulders,  single-breasted,  and  made  to 
button  close  to  the  throat;  the  collar  to  roll  and  re- 
main open,  but  so  cut  that  it  may  be  easily  turned 
up  to  the  ears.  The  sleeves  should  be  finished  with 
two  buttons  and  button-holes,  so  that  they  may  be 
turned  up  a  little  if  desired. 

There  are  occasions  when  a  covert  coat  made  of 
close  cloth  may  be  useful,  when  out  in  very  cold 
weather  or  standing  in  the  wind  without  shelter; 
but  it  cannot  be  generally  recommended. 

Pockets  in  any  part  of  the  dress  should  be  made 
of  woollen  material.  Cotton  retains  moisture,  and 
a  cotton  pocket  or  a  pocket  lined  with  cotton  may 
become  damp  and  clammy  and  cold,  acting  almost 
like  a  damp  compress.  The  fewer  pockets,  the 
better;  but  a  number  are  often  found  convenient. 
Everything  if  possible  should  be  carried  on  the 
wheel,  not  in  the  pockets.  Metal  condenses  moisture 
and  interrupts  evaporation. 

As  the  skirt  should  always  open  at  the  side,  and 
fasten  with  several  buttons,  a  convenient  pocket 
may  be  placed  in  the  placket-hole;  a  watch-pocket 
in  the  skirt  is  a  good  thing,  but  the  watch  is  better 
carried  on  the  wheel ;  and  a  pocket  should  be  set  aside 
for  matches, where  they  may  always  be  found  quickly. 

Collars  and  culfs  of  linen  or  of  celluloid,  of  silk  or 
of  the  same  material  as  the  suit,  may  be  used  for 
touring ;  but  soft  neckwear  should  be  worn  if  possible. 

If  a  neck-muffler  is  worn,  it  should  be  of  cash- 
mere, not  of  silk. 

Neatness  is  most  important.  Each  article  of 
dress  should  be  carefully  adjusted  and  fastened. 


VKESS. 


97 


Never  use  pins  or  put  things  carelessly  together, 
hoping  they  will  stay,  but  be  sure  that  every  article 
of  dress  fits  and  is  securely  fastened,  and  it  will 
never  need  a  thought  after  it  is  in  place. 

In  warm  weather  gloves  with  one  button  are  most 
comfortable;  for  cooler  weather,  four  buttons,  fast- 
ened about  the  wrists,  keep  the  hands  warm. 

The  adjustment  of  the  covering  of  wrists  and 
ankles  makes  the  greatest  difference  in  comfort  in 
wheeling.  In  cold  weather,  hands  and  feet  should 
be  kept  warm;  in  hot  weather,  it  is  comfortable  to 
work  with  the  cuffs  turned  back  and  wearing  low 
shoes  without  gaiters.  Indeed,  in  hot  weather  it  is 
important  not  to  encase  the  ankles  in  heavy  boots  or 
leggings,  as  these  would  ensure  overheating. 

The  outfit  may  be  completed  with  a  number 
of  hats  —  a  light  straw  for  summer,  a  soft  felt  for 
touring,  and  a  small  and  becoming  hat  for  the  park. 
The  hat  should  be  chosen  to  stay  on  easily,  and  not 
pinned,  but  fastened  under  the  hair  with  elastic,  and 
the  hair  dressed  to  stand  any  amount  of  blowing 
about. 

The  skirt  should  not  reach  more  than  half  way 
below  the  knee,  and  the  hem  and  all  seams  should 
be  finished  on  the  outside;  then  there  will  be  noth- 
ing to  catch  or  pull.  The  width  around  the  bottom 
may  be  a  matter  of  choice,  but  the  skirt  need  not  fall 
behind  the  pedal  when  furthest  back,  and  should  be 
cut  full  enough  in  the  front  to  permit  the  knees  to 
work  easily.  The  top  of  the  skirt  should  take  the 
place  of  a  waistband,  following  the  curves  of  the 
figure,  made  to  flare  at  the  top  of  the  waist,  and 


98 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


fitted  snugly  over  the  hips  and  hanging  from  them. 
It  may  be  worn  with  or  without  a  belt. 

The  coat  should  be  long  enough  to  touch  the  sad- 
dle or  hang  an  inch  or  two  below  it,  to  protect  all 
the  vital  organs  and  as  much  of  the  working  masses 
of  muscle  as  possible. 

The  sweater  may  be  worn  for  coolness  or  warmth. 
As  an  outside  garment,  it  allows  the  air  to  pass 
through  its  mesh  easily;  worn  under  another  gar- 
ment, it  is  very  warm,  retaining  the  heat. 

The  color  of  a  bicycle  suit  may  be  chosen  for  the 
kind  of  work  to  be  done;  its  texture  may  be  decided 
suitable  if,  a  piece  being  held  over  the  mouth,  it  is 
possible  to  inhale  and  exhale  through  it  easily.  The 
cloth  should  be  firm  enough  to  stand  wear  and  rough 
usage;  smooth  enough  to  shed  dust  easily;  and  of  a 
quality  that  will  stand  being  wet  without  shrinking, 
and  will  turn  the  rain  if  caught  in  a  shower.  It 
should  be  firm,  elastic,  soft;  have  what  is  known  as 
substance;  be  very  light  in  weight  and  yet  not  cling- 
ing; and  possessing  all  these  qualities,  the  ideal 
cloth-  for  bicycling  should  not  be  so  expensive  that 
it  cannot  be  renewed  easily. 

Simplicity  in  detail  for  any  garment  made  to  work 
in  is  always  commendable,  and  a  bicycle  dress  must 
be  simple  to  be  suitable. 

A  corset,  if  one  is  worn,  should  not  extend  below 
the  waist-line,  and  should  have  elastic  side-lacing. 

To  choose  what  to  wear  when  the  weather  is 
changeable  is  rather  difficult;  and  the  bicyclist  start- 
ing early  in  the  morning  for  an  all-day  outing  must 
expect  changes  of   temperature  during  the  day. 


DA'KSS. 


99 


Starting,  the  coat  ma)^  be  folded  on  the  handles,  and 
the  sweater  worn ;  later,  as  the  sun  grows  warmer, 
the  sweater  may  be  removed;  at  the  noonday  halt, 
the  coat  may  be  donned  while  lunching,  as  it  usually 
seems  chilly  coming  under  cover;  later  in  the  after- 
noon the  sweater  is  again  of  use;  and  before  the 
evening  is  advanced,  the  coat  worn  over  the  sweater 
often  proves  acceptable. 

For  touring,  only  an  extra  change  of  underwear, 
with  a  change  of  neckwear,  is  needed  to  carry  on  the 
wheel. 

To  look  well  at  all  times  when  bicycling,  it  is 
necessary  to  remember  the  possible  conditions  that 
may  be  encountered,  and  to  wear  no  garment  that 
may  prove  incongruous. 

When  touring,  of  course,  fresh  toilettes  may  be 
indulged  in  at  the  expense  of  extra  luggage.  The 
chief  pleasure  of  bicycling  is  independence  and  the 
joy  of  being  free;  yet  a  long  trip  without  access  to 
the  conveniences  and  even  the  luxuries  of  civiliza- 
tion, should  not  be  attempted.  A  trunk  may  be  sent 
home  as  soon  as  it  has  been  proved  unnecessary,  or 
sent  ahead  and  met  at  intervals;  but  its  non-arrival 
should  never  be  allowed  to  disconcert  the  traveller. 

It  is  an  accepted  fact  that  bicycling  cannot  be 
properly  enjoyed  unless  the  clothing  is  suitable.  Of 
course,  one  can  take  a  drop-frame  bicycle,  mount, 
and  wheel  slowly  for  a  short  distance,  barring  incon- 
veniences, in  ordinary  dress;  so  can  one  swim  a 
little  if  unexpectedly  placed  in  the  water.  Bicycling 
requires  the  same  freedom  of  movement  that  swim- 
ming does,  and  the  dress  must  not  hamper  or  hinder. 


CHAPTER  XIL 


Watch  and  Cyclometer. 

Suitably  attired,  with  a  bicycle  of  the  latest 
model  and  most  perfect  construction,  it  matters  little 
whether  the  residence  be  in  town  or  country,  for  the 
largest  city  is  soon  left  behind.  The  country,  when 
the  highway  ceases  to  be  passable,  is  easily  travers- 
able on  the  foot-trodden  pathway  beside  it.  Wher- 
ever the  foot  has  trodden,  the  wheel  may  follow,  if 
the  path  be  well  defined ;  and  as  the  wheel  can  be 
carried  easily,  there  is  no  limit  but  the  limit  of  en- 
durance in  crossing  country  that  cannot  be  wheeled 
over.  But  in  order  to  cover  distance  without  dis- 
mounting and  within  a  time  limit,  where  the  speed 
attained  is  an  element  to  be  considered,  good  roads 
should  be  chosen. 

The  bicycle  multiplies  our  power  of  advancing  by 
five.  One  who  can  walk  three  miles  in  an  hour  can 
wheel  fifteen  miles  on  a  bicycle,  given  all  the  condi- 
tions necessary  to  attain  that  speed  for  the  period  of 
an  hour.  The  wonderful  speed  of  the  running  and 
sprinting  athlete  is  again  multiplied  by  five,  for  a 
short  time,  in  the  contests  where  wheeling  records 
are  made. 

While  increasing  the  distance  travelled  the  bicycle 


WATCH  AXD  CVCI.OMK'J'F.R. 


lOI 


has  greatly  decreased  the  time  limit.  A  person 
travelling  afoot  at  the  rate  of  three  miles  an  hour 
(the  average  walking  gait)  covers  a  mile  in  twenty 
minutes,  and  at  the  end  of  an  hour  is  not  more  than 
three  miles  from  the  starting  point.  On  a  bicycle  a 
mile  is  covered  usually  in  four  minutes  or  less.  The 
average  distance,  owing  to  the  varied  resistance  met, 
is  not  usually  so  great;  and  more  power  may  be  ex- 
pended in  the  hour  than  is  required  to  walk  three 
miles  in  the  same  length  of  time.  Six  miles  may  be 
the  record  for  an  hour  on  a  wheel,  and  yet  the 
amount  of  work  done  be  very  great.  Until  the  po- 
sition is  adjusted  to  suit  individual  requirements, 
the  output  of  power  to  accomplish  a  certain  distance, 
even  though  it  be  a  short  one,  is  necessarily  great. 
Considerable  study  is  necessary  to  work  out  the  per- 
fect individual  adjustment  of  the  bicycle,  weight  of 
clothing,  and  amount  of  practice  requisite  to  easy, 
rhythmical  movement;  but  that  once  attained,  the 
world  lies  before  you. 

Bicycling  trains  and  quickens  the  perceptions;  it 
cultivates  and  develops  courage,  judgment,  and  dis- 
crimination as  well  as  prompt  decision  and  quick 
and  accurate  sight.  The  hand  follows  the  eye 
without  effort;  and  the  machine  responds  to  each 
impression  received  without  conscious  expenditure 
of  power. 

To  cyclists  is  due  the  keen  public  interest  recent- 
ly aroused  in  good  roadways  and  in  legislation  to 
effect  their  construction,  and  the  consequent  im- 
provement in  public  highways.  For  years  the  ama- 
teur cyclists  of  the  country  labored  to  this  end  in 


I02 


BICYCLIXG  FOR  LADIES. 


the  interest  of  the  sport,  the  League  of  American 
Wheelmen  intelligently  preparing  the  minds  of  the 
public  on  the  subject. 

To  be  accomplished  as  a  bicyclist  means  something 
more  than  knowing  how  to  wheel  a  bicycle  and  to 
be  able  to  get  about  on  it.  It  is  necessary  besides 
to  keep  informed  of  the  laws  and  ordinances  relating 
to  bicycles  and  to  vehicles  in  general;  to  possess  a 
complete  and  accurate  knowledge  of  the  wheel  as  a 
machine;  to  be  able  to  do  for  it  all  that  can  be  done 
one's  self  or  to  direct  another  who  has  not  this 
knowledge;  to  know  the  country  travelled,  know 
distance  and  direction;  the  use  of  map  and  compass, 
and  how  to  travel  without  them,  finding  the  direc- 
tion by  sun  or  stars,  or  even,  if  need  be,  without 
either;  to  understand  the  effect  of  time  and  season 
on  the  face  of  nature  and  to  cultivate  the  senses  of 
the  woods. 

If,  while  touring  with  a  party,  you  find  that  you 
have  missed  the  way  in  a  strange  country  and  that 
something  about  the  bicycle  has  given  out,  calm 
decision  is  requisite.  Estimate  your  resources,  and 
keep  quiet.  Do  not  try  to  find  your  party;  let  them 
find  you.  Study  your  wheel-tracks;  if  off  the  line 
of  travel,  follow  them  carefully  to  where  they  join 
the  tracks  of  your  companions.  Then  wait  until 
some  one  comes  for  you.  Rest  or  be  busy  about  your 
wheel.  Do  what  you  can  easily,  not  to  be  tired  and 
worn  out  when  your  companions  find  you.  It  is  sel- 
dom wise  to  try  and  walk  after  the  party;  the  only 
object  in  moving  would  be  to  keep  warm,  for  a  chill 
must  be  avoided. 


WA  TCI/  A  ND  C  YCL OME  TER.  1 03 

There  is  a  wonderful  difference  in  the  distances 
covered  under  different  conditions.  Winds,  adverse 
or  favorable,  affect  the  bicyclist  more  than  anything 
else.  An  unfavorable  wind  is  one  directly  ahead  or 
that  can  be  felt  on  either  cheek  while  advancing.  A 
favorable  wind  is  one  that  blows  on  the  back,  or 
cannot  be  felt  on  either  cheek  while  looking  ahead. 
A  wind  blowing  directly  at  right  angles  with  the 
direction  of  the  wheel  is  a  favorable  wind;  you  un- 
consciously balance  against  it,  and  the  bicycle  glides 
forward  under  pressure  as  a  boat  does  with  the  sail 
trimmed  in. 

When  starting  out,  note  the  weather  conditions; 
what  the  prevailing  winds  are  and  what  the  changes 
are  likely  to  be  during  the  time  you  expect  to  be  on 
your  bicycle.  If  the  wind  is  west  or  northwest,  do 
not  take  that  direction  for  the  run  out,  unless  the 
trip  is  to  be  a  short  one.  Always  try  to  have  the 
wind  with  you,  both  going  and  returning.  Learn 
the  peculiarities  of  the  weather  and  study  the  govern- 
ment weather  reports;  they  are  of  quite  as  much 
assistance  to  the  bicyclist  as  to  the  mariner  who 
knows  how^  to  use  them  ;  for  winds  frequently  change 
their  direction,  and  the  indications  for  such  changes 
should  be  sought  and  studied. 

If  a  short  trip  is  planned,  as  the  wind  is  not  likely 
to  change  during  the  run,  start  out  against  the  w^ind ; 
that  is,  plan  to  do  the  hardest  work  first,  and  let  the 
wind  help  on  the  return.  Avoid  hard  work  when- 
ever possible.  Hill-climbing  against  the  wind  is  the 
hardest  kind  of  work;  with  the  wnnd  to  assist,  even 
quite  steep  hills  may  often  be  coasted  part  of  the 


I04 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


way  up,  and  all  easy  grades  taken  with  the  feet  off 
the  pedals.  Coasting  should  be  indulged  in  with 
discretion,  or  the  bicycle  may  run  away  with  you. 
Check  speed  at  the  first  indication  that  the  wheel  is 
escaping  control  by  applying  the  brake  and  catching 
the  pedal,  back  pedaling  at  the  same  time.  On  a 
public  road,  the  bicy:le  should  never  be  be3^ond 
control. 

To  thoroughly  enjoy  an  outing,  road,  direction, 
and  atmospheric  conditions  should  be  studied.  If 
you  are  out  for  several  hours'  spin  in  chill)^  weather, 
there  is  little  pleasure  to  be  had  in  exploring;  but 
in  weather  when  the  temperature  permits  of  stops 
without  danger  to  health,  frequent  dismounts  and 
short-distance  trips  across  country  are  enjoyable. 
One  of  the  pleasures  of  bicyclists  is  the  good  fellow- 
ship existing  between  them,  which  is  rarely  dis- 
turbed. On  the  bicycle  conversation  is  interrupted 
by  long  pauses,  by  intervals  of  silence,  when  each 
rider  is  alone,  with  opportunity  for  reflection  and 
mental  expansion. 

On  long  trips  note  first  the  general  direction  of  the 
road,  the  wind,  and  the  sun;  try  to  have  the  wind 
with  you  and  the  sun  behind  you  for  the  better  part 
of  the  day.  Be  able  to  change  your  plans  quickly 
to  meet  changed  conditions,  and  have  a  reserve  of 
grit  to  fall  back  on  if  things  do  not  go  quite  to  your 
liking.  Dressed  for  bicycling,  it  matters  little 
whether  it  rains  or  shines;  but  wind,  sand,  and  stones 
make  impossible  conditions  for  the  bicyclist.  When 
wind  has  reached  a  certain  velocity,  wheeling  be- 
comes unsafe.    Mud  causes  the  wheels  to  slip  and 


WA  TCH  AND  C  Y GLOME  TER. 


prevents  them  from  turning;  sand  does  the  same. 
A  surface  offering  little  or  no  resistance  is  impossible. 
Stones  are  dangerously  liable  to  cause  spills,  while 
ruts  and  bumps  twist  the  bicycle  and  are  apt  to  throw 
the  rider. 

In  the  autumn  months,  when  the  sun  sets  early,  a 
lantern  should  be  provided  even  when  it  seems  an 
absurdly  unnecessary  encumbrance;  for  a  town  or 
village  where  the  ordinances  are  strict  may  lie  on 
the  route,  and  the  unlucky  bicyclist  without  a  light 
must  go  afoot. 

Of  course,  speeding  cannot  be  attempted  with 
the  bicycle  encumbered;  but  with  all  the  extras, 
a  good  average  speed  may  be  maintained.  The 
bicyclist  wishing  for  freedom  from  all  encum- 
brance is  apt  to  forget  unpleasant  possibilities. 
A  punctured  tire  thirty  miles  from  anything  is 
such  a  possibility;  so,  though  the  tool-kit  weighs 
something,  it  can  never  prudently  be  dispensed 
with. 

Have  the  bicycle  all  ready,  and  start  free  from  care 
and  with  a  quiet  mind,  after  a  last  careful  and  reas- 
suring inspection  of  the  machine.  Starting  from  a 
town  with  a  perfectly  running  machine,  the  attention 
is  first  directed  to  getting  into  the  country  easily, 
either  by  train  or  by  wheeling.  In  wheeling,  streets 
free  from  traffic  and  with  the  best  possible  surfaces 
should  be  chosen. 

Country  wheeling  is  often  good  when  city  work  is 
impossible.  The  dangers  of  city  wheeling  are  traffic, 
car  tracks,  and  mud.  City  mud  is  usually  of  a 
greasy  nature,  very  difficult  to  wheel  over.  Even 


io6 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


pedaling  is  very  necessary,  and  uneven  pressure  on 
the  pedals  means  a  side  spill. 

In  wheeling  over  mud,  never  attempt  to  control 
the  machine  by  the  front  wheel;  it  must  be  con- 
trolled by  the  pedals.  If  too  much  pressure  is  used, 
there  is  nothing  left  but  to  step  off.  Do  not  try  to 
recover  by  means  of  the  front  wheel;  the  attempt 
will  be  useless,  and  a  fall  can  be  avoided  only  by 
stepping  o£E.  Keep  the  front  wheel  steady,  and  rely 
on  the  weight-carrying  wheel  to  take  you  clear  of 
the  mud.  Keep  a  sharp  lookout,  and  travel  slowly. 
Any  one  can  make  a  bicycle  go. 

Get  out  of  town,  and  then  be  ready  to  pedal  up  to 
time  on  the  first  clear  stretch  of  good  road.  Make 
time,  but  never  hurry.  Never  work  hard  over  hill- 
work  or  try  to  go  fast  against  the  wind.  When  using 
side-paths,  always  recollect  they  may  be  protected 
by  local  ordinances.  Keep  posted  on  the  law  of  the 
road,  taking  to  the  highway  on  approaching  towns 
and  villages.  If  the  work  is  hard,  travel  slowly,  and 
look  ahead.  Two  good  rules  are — To  travel  fast, 
look  well  ahead;  and  watch  the  ground  when  there  is 
a  hard  bit  of  road  to  pass  over. 

A  good  stiff  pull  against  the  wind  can  be  accom- 
plished easily,  really  easily,  if  you  take  your  time, 
giving  full  attention  to  pedaling,  and  keeping  the 
eyes  a  short  distance  ahead  of  the  wheel.  It  is  much 
easier  to  rest  on  the  bicycle  by  slowing  than  to  dis- 
mount. In  cold  weather,  never  stop  without 
seeking  shelter,  at  least  the  lee  of  bank  or  wall; 
and  keep  away  from  a  fire,  as  it  renders  one 
liable  to  take  cold.    Nothing  is  so  dangerous  in 


WA  TCH  A  A      C  YCL  OME  TER.  i  o  7 

frosty  weather  as  a  pause  of  even  a  few  minutes 
dismounted. 

In  warm  weather,  it  is  permissible  to  drink  water 
when  wheeling;  but  it  should  be  remembered  that 
the  bicyclist  passes  through  all  sorts  of  country,  and 
the  water  may  sometimes  be  anything  but  drinkable 
from  a  sanitary  point  of  view,  even  causing  typhoid 
and  other  fevers.  Water  that  has  been  boiled  is  un- 
palatable, but  it  is  safe;  boiled  and  cooled,  it  may  be 
rendered  more  palatable  by  shaking  it  or  pouring  it 
from  one  pitcher  to  another  to  mix  air  with  it.  Ice 
in  water  is  another  source  of  danger.  The  water, 
after  being  boiled  or  filtered,  should  be  placed  in 
bottles  with  absorbent  cotton  for  stoppers,  and  cooled 
by  being  placed  on  ice.  Muddy  water  may  be 
cleansed  with  a  piece  of  alum.  If  a  lump  of  alum  is 
stirred  about  for  a  second  or  two  in  a  pail  or  pitcher 
of  muddy  water,  and  then  the  water  allowed  to  settle, 
it  will  be  found  fit  to  boil  for  drinking.  Bottled 
waters  are  safest  when  the  country  is  unknown  or 
when  there  is  doubt  as  to  the  purity  of  the  local 
supply;  but  failing  these,  the  precautions  mentioned 
will  ensure  safety. 

Never  prolong  bicycle  exercise  without  eating, 
and  never  work  after  a  hearty  meal;  but  the  con- 
sumption of  a  couple  of  sandwiches  at  noon  cannot 
be  regarded  as  a  serious  meal;  and  it  is  often  better 
to  push  on  after  a  short  halt,  moving  slowly,  than  to 
sit  around  on  rocks  or  stumps  to  wait  for  a  proper 
digestive  period  to  elapse.  It  is  well  to  have  a  small 
reserve  supply  of  food,  such  as  chocolate  or  beef 
tablets,  to  tide  one  over  a  prolonged  period  between 


lo8  BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 

meals.  Milk  and  bread  and  cheese  are  good  to  take 
as  an  extra  meal.  Never  work  hungry  if  it  can  be 
avoided ;  the  bicycle  will  lag,  and  the  cyclist  wonder 
at  being  weary.  Keep  up  the  food  supply  by  all 
means,  for  fatigue  sets  in  quickly  with  the  desire  for 
food,  and  the  system  quickly  becomes  enfeebled. 

The  cyclometer  registers  each  revolution  of  the 
wheel,  and  by  an  ingenious  mechanism  the  dial  gives 
the  record  in  miles.  There  is  a  great  temptation  to 
roll  up  miles,  that  the  cyclometer  may  make  a  good 
showing;  indeed,  this  striving  after  mileage  often 
becomes  a  ruling  passion,  interfering  with  the  real 
pleasures  of  the  sport. 

The  pedestrian,  accustomed  to  noting  distances, 
can  usually  judge  the  rate  or  pace  travelled,  and  de- 
cide very  accurately  upon  the  distance  traversed, 
with  only  the  time  as  a  guide;  for  the  pace,  so  many 
miles  an  hour,  multiplied  by  the  number  of  hours, 
gives  the  distance. 

On  the  bicycle  the  pace  is  very  easily  estimated  in 
a  similar  manner.  Count  the  strokes  per  nnnute  as 
each  knee  rises,  divide  that  by  two,  and  you  have  the 
number  of  revolutions  of  the  crank.  The  gear  gives 
the  diameter  of  the  wheel  larger  than  the  one  on  the 
bicycle;  sixty-four  gear,  for  instance,  means  that  the 
crank  revolution  covers  a  distance  equal  to  a  wheel 
with  a  diameter  of  sixty-four  inches.  The  circum- 
ference of  a  wheel  is  three  times  its  diameter;  and 
64  multiplied  by  3  equals  192  inches  measured  on  the 
ground  for  one  revolution  of  the  crank.  Multiply 
the  distance  measured  on  the  ground  by  the  crank 
revolution    by   the  number  of  strokes   made  per 


PVA  rCH  A ND  C  YCL  OME  TER.  1 09 

minute,  divide  by  twelve  to  give  the  number  of  feet 
the  crank  has  covered  in  one  revolution,  and  you 
have  the  distance  in  feet  travelled  per  minute.  To 
find  the  rate  of  miles  per  hour,  multiply  that  result 
by  60  to  find  the  number  of  feet  travelled  per  hour, 
and  divide  the  result  by  5280,  the  number  of  feet  in 
a  mile.  The  watch  should  have  a  second  hand  for 
bicycle  work.  The  cyclometer  taken  for  five  minutes, 
then  multiplied  by  twelve,  gives  the  rate  of  mileage 
per  hour,  a  very  convenient  way  of  ascertaining  the 
rate  of  speed  per  hour. 

It  is  well  to  know  the  rhythm  of  stroke  of  a  certain 
rate  per  hour,  for  it  is  often  of  assistance  in  determin- 
ing distance,  and  will  frequently  prevent  a  hurr}^ 
when  train  connections  are  to  be  made,  by  assuring 
you  that  you  are  easily  travelling  a  pace  that  will 
take  you  to  your  destination  on  time. 

The  alertness  and  quickness  of  perception  that  bi- 
cycling cultivates  seem  marvellous.  A  road,  pre- 
viously accepted  as  ordinarily  good,  becomes  full  of 
pitfalls  that  the  wary  learn  to  avoid.  Slippery  or 
uneven  surfaces,  tacks  and  broken  glass,  are  to  be 
noted  and  avoided,  inequalities  allowed  for,  and 
preparation  made  to  overcome  the  tendency  of  the 
machine  on  unexpected  hard  bits  of  road. 

One  of  the  dangers  of  sidepath  wheeling  often  en- 
countered is  a  slippery  spot  or  a  place  where  the  sur- 
face may  give  way,  such  as  the  edge  of  a  bank  along 
which  the  path  runs,  with  a  fence  on  the  other  side. 
Here,  if  the  bicycle  slips,  the  bicyclist  is  pretty  sure 
to  be  thrown  against  the  fence.  In  sidepath  wheel- 
ing a  sharp  lookout  must  be  kept  for  these  slippery 


I  lO 


B/CVCLIXG  FOR  LADIES. 


spots  and  weak  edges,  and  also  for  stones  or  stumps 
that  run  through  the  uneven  surface. 

A  first  coast  on  a  hill  whose  pitch  has  been  miscal- 
culated, and  which  proves  steeper  than  was  antici- 
l)ated,  is  a  terrible  surprise.  To  find  one's  self  cling- 
ing desperately  to  a  runaway  machine,  with  no  hope 
save  in  the  ascending  grade  that  seems  so  far  away, 
is  anything  but  a  pleasant  experience.  In  such  case 
sit  still,  hold  fast,  keep  straight,  and  if  nothing  is  in 
the  way  to  collide  with,  there  is  hope,  barring  unex- 
pected surface  obstacles.  The  coaster's  safety  in 
steering  lies  in  swaying;  the  pedals  are  out  of  the 
question,  and  the  front  wheel  is  better  undisturbed. 
A  slight  inclination  to  either  side  will  alter  the  course 
of  the  bicycle  without  interfering  with  balance  or 
momentum,  and  the  hands  can  be  read}^  gripping 
hard,  to  keep  the  wheel  steady. 

In  coasting,  sit  well  in  the  saddle,  letting  that  take 
the  whole  weight,  and  do  not  push  too  hard  with  the 
feet  on  the  coasters.  The  feet  should  not  be  braced 
against  the  coasters,  but  should  rest  easily  against 
them  with  an  even  pressure. 

To  learn  to  coast,  practise  at  first  either  on  a 
slight  or  a  small  grade;  another  way  is  to  get  up 
speed  on  the  level,  and  take  one  foot  off  at  the  time. 
The  most  marvellous  experience  of  bicycling  is  to 
have  a  wind  carry  you  coasting  up  hill — a  wind,  too, 
that  is  seemingly  adverse,  or  at  least  not  directly 
favorable. 

Trust  to  the  map,  the  watch,  and  the  cyclometer 
to  locate  your  whereabouts,  and  do  not  place  too 
much  faith  in  answers  to  inquiries,  unless  you  are 


WATCH  AND  CYCLOME'IKR. 


1 1 1 


vSpeaking  to  a  bicyclist;  for  people  unaccustomed  to 
accurate  judgment  differ  greatly  in  their  estimation 
of  a  given  distance  or  a  general  direction.  You  need 
only  stop  three  or  four  times  in  a  mile  or  two,  and 
inquire  the  way  to  a  town  say  five  or  six  miles  dis- 
tant, to  be  convinced  of  this  fact. 


CHAPTER  XIII. 
Women  and  Tools. 

Most  women  can  sew  on  a  button  o-r  run  up  a  seam ; 
sewing,  in  fact,  is  regarded  rather  as  a  feminine  in- 
stinct than  an  art.  There  are  many  capable  people 
in  the  world,  both  men  and  women,  who  can  compre- 
hend at  a  glance  the  use  or  the  application  of  an 
article  or  an  idea — people  who  instinctively  use 
their  eyes  and  hands  with  ease  and  accuracy;  there 
are  others  who  learn  more  slowly  to  use  their  me- 
chanical senses;  and  there  are  also  those  whose  at- 
tention has  never  been  called  to  certain  simple  me- 
chanical facts  and  details  that  they  are  quite  capable 
of  understanding.  To  all  the  mastery  of  these  facts 
means  an  expenditure  of  more  or  less  time,  and  in 
this  busy  world  of  ours,  there  is  nothing  so  much  ap- 
preciated or  so  carelessly  wasted.  It  is  my  intention 
to  place  before  my  readers  a  few  simple  mechanical 
explanations. 

I  hold  that  any  woman  who  is  able  to  use  a  needle 
or  scissors  can  use  other  tools  equally  well.  It  is  a  very 
important  matter  for  a  bicyclist  to  be  acquainted  with 
all  parts  of  the  bicycle,  their  uses  and  adjustment. 
Many  a  weary  hour  would  be  spared  were  a  little  prop- 
er attention  given  at  the  right  time  to  your  machine. 


\ 


WOMEX  AXD  TOOLS. 


Ask  any  carriage  maker  or  coachman,  and  he  will 
tell  you  that  everything  on  wheels  needs  attention. 
Any  owner  or  lover  of  horses  will  say  that  horses  re- 
quire constant  care.  The  bicyclist  is  the  motor,  the 
horse;  the  bicycle,  the  vehicle.  These  ideas  should 
remain  distinct.  When  you  mount  a  wheel,  you  do 
not  mount  an  iron  horse;  you  are  a  human  propel- 
ling power,  and  the  bicycle  is  a  carriage. 

It  is  all  important  to  work  without  unnecessary 
effort,  and  for  this  you  must  have  a  knowledge  of 
bicycle  construction,  how  to  make  the  machine  run 
smoothly,and  how  not  to  injure  the  human  motor  or 
the  mechanism.  The  human  body  is  so  beautifully 
self-adjustable  that  it  may  be  safely  attributed  to  ig- 
norance or  neglect  if  anything  goes  wrong  with  it. 
Attention  should  always  be  paid  at  the  right  time  to 
nature's  warnings;  they  are  danger-signals,  and  if 
disregarded,  unpleasant  results  are  sure  to  follow.  A 
little  common-sense  goes  far;  and  with  that  and  a 
right  knowledge — not  necessarily  an  extensive  knowl- 
edge— of  the  working  of  the  human  machine,  there 
need  be  little  to  fear  from  injuries  resulting  from 
athletic  exercise. 

The  amount  of  work  different  individuals  can  per- 
form, of  course,  varies.  Find  out  how  much  work 
you  ought  to  do,  and  do  it.  A  physician  is  the  only 
competent  judge  of  your  limitations.  Never  at- 
tempt any  new  form  of  exercise  without  being  ex- 
amined for  it.  Sensible  people  when  they  purchase 
a  horse  require  a  veterinary  certificate  to  accompany 
the  guarantee;  and  the  work  the  horse  is  to  do  is 
planned  according  to  the  ascertained  amount  the 


114 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


animal  is  capable  of  performing.  If  it  is  right  for 
you  to  wheel  but  five  miles  every  other  day,  and  at 
a  certain  hour  only,  it  does  not  follow  that  that  is 
always  to  be  your  limit.  Practice  accomplishes  great 
results;  and  the  strength  and  endurance  that  come  of 
exercise  taken  regularly,  under  proper  conditions, 
seems  marvellous  to  those  who,  after  a  course  of 
proper  preparation,  attempt  and  accomplish  with 
pleasure  and  ease  what  at  first  seemed  impossible. 
It  is  hard,  of  course,  to  see  some  one  else  do  what 
you  would  like  to  do  and  cannot;  but  it  is  weak  not 
to  be  able  to  say,  "I  have  done  enough,  and  I  must 
stop. ' '   There  are  many  other  people  similarly  placed. 

The  bicycle  may  be  so  adapted  and  adjusted  as  to 
enable  bicyclists  of  different  powers  to  work  together 
and  enjoy  a  fair  amount  of  sociabilit}^ ;  for  if  one  has 
wheeled  around  the  world,  why  should  that  spoil 
one's  pleastire  in  wheeling  around  a  block?  To 
wheel  alone  is  not  much  pleasure.  Find  some  one 
to  wheel  around  the  block  with  you,  and  you  have 
the  beginning  of  a  club. 

Many  people  do  not  understand  what  is  best  for 
them.  The  experienced  athlete  knows  the  amount 
of  work  he  can  do,  and  what  must  be  done  and 
avoided  to  enable  him  to  do  his  work  well.  Women 
and  girls  are  able  to  do  good  work,  but  they  should 
not  expect  to  accomplish  such  a  result  through  igno- 
rance or  neglect.  They  must  be  willing  to  study 
and  to  give  proper  attention  to  important  details, 
and  their  knowledge  of  the  subject  must  be  sufficient 
to  enable  them  to  use  judgment  and  discrimination. 
Almost  any  form  of  athletics  will  aid  in  cultivating 


IVOMEX  AiVD  'J'OOLF.. 


these  qualities;  and  bicycling  has  besides  valuable 
educational  features  of  its  own.  A  certain  familiar- 
ity with  mechanics  is  assured  by  a  course  of  bicy- 
cling, for  it  is  impossible  to  handle  a  bicycle  with- 
out taking  some  degree  of  interest  in  its  construction. 

Women  must  expect  ridicule  and  little  sympathy 
from  experienced  cyclists  if  they  essay  feats  they 
should  not  attempt.  Many  decide  that  a  thing  must 
be  easy  of  accomplishment  because  they  have  seen 
some  one  do  it  easily.  Easy  muscular  work,  how- 
ever, is  the  result  of  strength,  confidence,  and  pre- 
cision of  movement,  which  come  only  from  practice. 
All  new  muscular  movements  and  combinations  of 
movements  must  be  learned ;  they  cannot  be  acquired 
hurriedly  with  good  results.  People  who  can  work 
well  are  usually  patient  with  a  beginner  who  is  doing 
his  best,  knowing  themselves  what  it  means  to  work 
hard  and  to  face  disappointment  and  failure  and  what 
is  involved  in  repeated  effort.  Theambitiousare liable 
to  over-exertion,  the  timid  not  to  practice  enough. 

There  is  much  prejudice  against  athletic  exercise 
for  women  and  girls,  man}'  believing  that  nothing 
of  the  kind  can  be  done  without  over-doing;  but 
there  is  a  right  way  of  going  about  athletics  as  every- 
thing else.  Prejudice  can  be  removed  only  by  sho\v- 
ing  good  results,  and  good  results  can  be  accom- 
plished only  by  work  done  under  proper  restrictions. 
To  do  a  thing  easily  is  to  do  it  gracefully ;  and  grace, 
without  properly  balanced  muscular  action,  is  im- 
possible; grace  is  the  embodiment  of  balance, 
strength,  and  intelligence.  Jerky  movement  indi- 
cates lack  of  muscular  development  and  training. 


ii6 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


The  human  machine  is  capable  of  a  seemingly  un- 
limited series  of  muscular  movements  and  combined 
muscular  motions.  Any  training  or  practice  of  mind 
or  muscles  assists  to  fit  them  for  new  combinations. 
But  little  time  is  necessary  to  learn  to  know  how  to 
do  and  what  to  do,  though  the  subjects  to  be  consid- 
ered, mechanics  and  physiology,  are. exhaustive  and 
extensive  in  their  range. 

It  is  always  a  pleasure  to  do  a  thing  well,  whether 
it  is  handling  a  needle  or  using  a  screw-driver;  and 
the  art  of  using  either  successfully  is  not  difficult  to 
acquire.  With  the  bicycle  it  is  necessary  to  know 
what  to  do;  the  human  motor,  unless  pushed  beyond 
reasonable  limits,  is  self-adjusting.  Over-taxing  is 
the  result  often  of  too  great  ambition,  of  failure  to 
keep  in  view  the  proper  aim  of  exercise,  and  sacrifi- 
cing health  and  ultimate  success  for  passing  vanity. 
The  bicycle  is  but  the  means  to  the  end,  first  of  all,  of 
health — health  of  mind  and  body.  The  human  me- 
chanism is  far  more  difficult  to  adjust  when  out  of 
order  than  the  mechanism  of  the  bicycle.  In  bicy- 
cling, the  two  machines  are  one  and  interdependent. 
The  foot  on  the  pedal  pushing  the  crank  is  but  one 
point  of  application  of  power  conveyed  by  a  series 
of  levers,  actuated  by  muscles,  controlled  by  nerves, 
supplied  and  directed  by  accumulated  power. 

We  hear  of  horse-power  as  a  unit ;  we  have  also 
human  power — the  amount  of  power  the  average  in- 
dividual can  exercise.  Food  supplies  material  to  be 
converted  into  power,  stored  and  transmuted  in  the 
human  system  either  for  use  or  waste,  as  the  case  may 
be.   Energy  or  power,  unless  applied  within  a  speci- 


WOMEN  AND  TOOLS. 


117 


fied  time,  is  given  off  as  heat,  etc.  Less  food  is 
needed,  loss  of  appetite  follows,  if  too  little  work  is 
done.  The  muscular  tissues  become  almost  useless, 
it  is  an  effort  to  do  any  kind  of  work;  the  power  is 
not  there.  By  gradual  and  persistent  practice, 
strength  is  acquired,  and  power  stored  in  reserve. 
Exercise  tends  to  strengthen,  not  to  weaken;  over- 
exercise  uses  up  stored  power  and  newly  acquired 
power  as  well;  longer  periods  of  rest  are  needed  to 
renew  the  wasted  tissues  than  is  necessary  when  ex- 
ercise is  not  carried  to  excess.  It  must  be  kept  in 
mind  when  bicycling  that  rider  and  wheel  are  a  com- 
plete, compound,  combined  mechanism,  and  mechan- 
icall)^  inseparable.  The  wheeler's  weight,  when 
shifted  or  inclined,  affects  his  equilibrium,  and 
wheeler  and  bicycle  are  as  much  one  as  a  skater  and 
his  skates. 

Levers  and  their  application ;  power,  stored,  dis- 
tributed,  or  wasted ;  how  to  prevent  v^aste  and  ac- 
quire reserve ;  proper  adjustment  to  mechanical  en- 
vironment, translated  to  mean  the  use  of  a  few 
common  tools,  and  their  application  to  the  adjust- 
ment of  the  bicycle;  and  the  care,  adjustment,  and 
proper  preparation  of  the  machine  for  work,  are 
points  of  such  importance  that  too  much  stress  can- 
not be  laid  on  them.  A  little  thought,  a  little  atten- 
tion at  the  right  time,  prepares  for  emergencies,  for 
cheerful  work,  and  for  the  enjoyment  of  the  exercise, 
and  the  health  and  accumulated  benefits  sure  to 
follow. 


CHAPTER  XI y. 


Tools  and  How  to  Use  Them. 

"A  NUT  is  a  piece  of  metal  adapted  to  screw  on  the 
end  of  a  bolt."  "A  bolt  is  a  stout  metallic  pin 
adapted  for  holding  objects  together."  The  nut  is 
to  the  bolt  what  the  knot  is  to  the  thread,  to  keep  it 
from  slipping  through.  Iron  and  steel  are  fibrous 
materials,  and  ver}^  hard;  though  strong,  they  are 
also  brittle.  Indeed,  these  metals,  and  metals  gen- 
erally, resemble  molasses  candy  in  their  nature  more 
than  any  other  familiar  substance  that  will  serve  for 
illustration.  When  heated,  they  become  soft  and 
liquid;  when  cold,  they  are  tough,  hard,  and  even 
brittle.  A  few  powerful,  sharp  blows  with  a  heavy 
object  are  enough  to  fracture  a  piece  of  metal.  Di- 
rect, heavy  blows  or  tapping  on  the  end  of  a  bolt 
will  flatten  and  alter  its  shape  sufficiently  to  cause 
the  edges  to  project,  a  very  little  seemingly,  but 
enough  to  render  it  useless. 

If  you  wish  to  remove  a  bolt  that  seems  to  fit  too 
tight  and  resists  ordinary  methods,  place  the  nut  on 
the  bolt,  and  screw  it  on  level,  so  that  the  end  of  the 
bolt  will  be  flush  or  even  with  the  top  of  the  nut. 
Then  lay  your  piece  of  wood,  quite  smooth  and  flat, 
on  the  nut  and  bolt,  covering  both,  and  hammer 


TOOLS  AND  HOW  TO  USE  THEM. 


119 


gently  on  that  with  a  heavy  hammer,  with  gentle, 
short,  sharp,  even  strokes.  The  most  obstinate  bolt 
will  usually  yield  to  this  method  of  persuasion. 
Should  a  burr  have  formed  on  the  end  of  a  bolt,  a 
file  is  necessary  to  remove  it;  and  filing  off  a  burr  is 
a  somewhat  lengthy  and  tedious  operation. 

Unscrew  a  nut  gently  and  examine  it.  On  the  in- 
side will  be  found  a  spiral  groove  and  a  spiral  ridge 
or  thread.  Examine  the  bolt,  and  observe  a  similar 
spiral  groove  and  thread.  These,  when  screwed  to- 
gether, prevent  slipping,  and  the  nut  cannot  be 
pulled  or  pushed  off.  To  remove  the  nut,  it  is  ne- 
cessary to  turn  it;  and  always  turn  one  way,  from 
left  to  right,  if  the  nut  lies  uppermost. 

To  keep  a  nut  from  unscrewing  by  jarring,  etc., 
screw  it  down  until  it  jams,  as  it  is  called,  firmly 
against  the  surface  it  rests  on.  If  screwed  too  tight, 
it  will  burst  or  break  the  thread,  or  if  enough  force 
is  applied  the  bolt  may  break.  This  hardly  seems 
possible  until  we  realize  that  in  the  wrench  we  pos- 
sess a  very  powerful  lever,  capable  of  destroying 
quite  a  large  bolt  and  its  accompanying  nut.  If 
pains  be  taken  always  to  start  a  nut  on  square  and  to 
turn  gently  and  firmly  and  not  too  fast,  the  previous 
instructions  may  prove  unnecessary. 

There  are  usually  two  kinds  of  wrench  in  a  bicycle 
outfit — an  adjustable  wrench  with  sliding  jaw,  and 
one  or  more  key-wrenches,  so  called  because  made 
to  fit  particular  parts  of  the  machine,  and  to  be  used 
for  them  only.  The  adjustable  wrench  with  sliding 
jaw  should  be  used  with  the  pressure  or  pull  coming 
on  the  angle  of  the  head,  and  the  sliding  jaw  so 


1 20 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


placed  as  to  hold  its  position,  the  wrench  applied  so 
that  the  greatest  strain  is  taken  at  the  strongest  part ; 
then  the  faces  of  the  jaw  keep  smooth  and  true,  and 
will  not  deface  the  plating  or  polish  of  the  machine. 

There  is  another  point  to  note — that  a  properly 
adjusted  wrench  starts  a  nut  easily,  while  if  the 
strain  is  taken  on  the  movable  jaw  of  the  wrench, 
there  is  give  enough  in  the  wrench  itself  to  prevent 
the  nut  from  starting,  and  the  wrench  slips  off  the  nut 
without  effecting  its  object.  The  handle  of  the 
wrench  acts  as  a  lever,  and  the  head  of  the  wrench 
forms  a  right  angle  with  the  handle;  it  is  here  that 
the  power  is  centred,  not  at  the  angle  made  by  the 
movable  jaw.  Of  course,  this  position  seems  the 
reverse  of  proper  until  it  is  analj^zed;  but  once 
understood  and  adopted,  it  will  prove  most  effec- 
tive. 

There  are  various  screws  in  and  about  the  machine. 
A  screw  is  defined  as  a  bolt  or  bar  having  a  thread 
cut  upon  it  spirally,  so  that  it  will  enter  a  hole  in 
which  a  corresponding  spiral  groove  and  thread  have 
been  cut,  or  on  which  they  will  be  formed  by  the 
screw  entering  the  hole.  The  thread  and  screw  in- 
terwind  and  prevent  the  screw  from  being  withdrawn 
unless  it  is  turned.  To  turn  the  screw,  a  notch  is 
cut  on  one  end,  which  is  made  flat  for  that  purpose, 
and  the  other  end  of  the  screw  is  pointed,  to  enable 
it  to  enter  the  hole  easily.  After  a  screw  is  placed 
and  started  in  its  proper  hole,  it  is  only  necessary  to 
turn  it  until  it  is  driven  home.  To  turn  the  screw, 
a  short  bar  is  flattened  thin  to  enter  the  notch  on  the 
end  of  the  screw. 


TOOLS  AND  HOW  TO  USE  THEM.  121 


The  screw-driver  should  be  held  and  turned  with 
one  hand,  and  steadied  and  guided  with  the  other. 
Metal  is  not  so  hard  but  that  the  leverage  of  the  screw- 
driver is  enough  to  bend  the  notches  on  the  end  of  a 
screw,  and  thus  render  it  useless.  The  question 
may  be  raised,  Why  are  not  screws  made  harder? 
If  metal  is  tempered  too  hard,  it  becomes  brittle,  and 
flies.  A  well-tempered  screw  should  be  neither  too 
hard  nor  too  soft,  but  adapted  for  its  particular  use 
or  position. 

A  screw  should  always  be  made  clean  before  it  is 
screwed  home,  any  particle  of  dust  or  rust  being 
liable  to  injure  the  thread  and  spoil  the  screw.  If 
the  screw  is  oily  or  greasy,  it  will  work  loose.  All 
screws,  bolts,  etc.,  therefore,  should  be  carefully 
wiped,  and  never  placed  where  there  is  any  chance 
for  even  a  little  dust  to  settle  upon  them.  A  nut 
with  a  small  grain  of  sand  inside  will  burst  or  break 
the  thread  of  the  bolt. 

Bolts  and  screws  are  used  to  hold  different  parts 
together  or  in  place  and  to  give  strength  and  firm- 
ness. 

There  is  usually  an  oil-can  belonging  to  every  ma- 
chine, and  a  bicycle  should  be  provided  with  a  good 
one,  small,  light,  and  easily  carried ;  and  special  care 
should  be  taken  that  it  does  not  leak.  A  greasy  oil- 
can is  unpleasant  to  handle  and  almost  useless,  as  it 
cannot  be  handled  properly.  The  least  possible 
amount  of  oil  that  can  be  used  is  the  proper  quantity. 
Greasy  bearings  only  collect  dust,  and  the  dust 
follows  the  oil  back  into  the  friction  surfaces,  where 
its  presence  is  always  undesirable. 


I  22 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


Two  kinds  of  lubricant  are  used  on  a  bicycle — oil 
and  graphite.  A  lubricant  is  used  to  diminish  fric- 
tion where  two  or  more  surfaces  move  over  each  other. 
If  these  surfaces  are  of  the  same  material  and  the 
same  degree  of  hardness,  they  do  not  slip ;  but  the 
unevennesses  ot  the  surfaces  engage  each  other  and 
cause  resistance,  which  produces  friction,  and  friction 
causes  heat,  and  the  parts  move  more  and  more 
slowly,  until  at  last  they  stop.  Now,  if  a  substance 
of  a  different  character,  like  oil  or  graphite,  is  intro- 
duced between  the  moving  surfaces,  it  forms  little 
cushions,  which  prevent  the  two  surfaces  from  com- 
ing into  close  contact ;  and,  as  the  oil  or  graphite 
splits  up  readily  into  minute  particles,  the  surfaces 
slip  upon  that,  instead  of  holding  fast.  A  smooth 
surface  of  metal  is  full  of  inequalities,  perceptible 
when  magnified,  and  slipping  past  each  other  with 
as  much  difficulty  as  would  surfaces  of  sand  paper. 
Only  oil  of  the  best  quality  and  pure  graphite 
should  be  used.  Nothing  sticky  or  gritty  in  its  na- 
ture should  be  allowed  near  bearing  surfaces. 

The  pump  is  an  all-important  and  indispensable 
adjunct  of  the  pneumatic  tire.  Each  tire  is  fitted 
with  a  valve,  and  accompanied  by  a  pump  with  which 
to  inflate  it.  A  valve  is  a  lifting,  sliding  cover, 
connected  with  an  aperture  to  prevent  the  passage  of 
air  or  other  fluids,  and  so  constructed  that  the  pump 
forces  the  cover  down,  and  the  air  pushes  past. 
The  cover  is  held  in  place  by  a  spring  and  air  pres- 
sure, and,  fitting  tightly  against  a  washer  of  some 
soft,  impervious  material,  makes  an  air-tight  joint, 
and  will  not  move  unless  displaced.    The  pump  it- 


TOOLS  AND  HOW  TO  USE   Til  EM.  123 

self  is  fitted  with  a  valve  to  fill  its  cylinder  or  barrel 
with  air,  and  to  hold  the  air  after  the  cylinder  is  full 
and  when  the  plunger  of  the  pump  is  forcing-  the  air 
out  of  it  again.  A  flexible  tube  coupling  is  used  to 
connect  the  pump-barrel  with  the  valve  of  the  tire. 

The  valves  are  of  many  patterns  and  sizes,  and 
there  are  pumps  made  to  fit  special  tires,  and  pumps 
that  will  in  a  manner  suit  almost  any  ordinary  valve. 
It  is  most  important  to  note  that  all  the  washers 
about  the  pump  and  valves  are  in  place.  Deflated 
tires  are  often  caused  by  a  misplaced  washer;  and 
though  valves  are  so  constructed  that  it  is  not  easy  to 
disturb  the  washers,  still  it  is  well  to  know  where 
they  are  and  when  they  require  attention.  Washers 
wear  out  and  require  renewing,  and  sometimes  a  de- 
fective washer  should  be  replaced;  they  are  usually 
made  of  rubber  or  leather,  but  miCtal  washers  are 
sometimes  used  where  there  is  much  pressure  or 
friction. 

The  metal  used  in  bicycle  construction  must  be 
finished,  smoothed,  and  prepared  to  resist  the  corro- 
ding effects  of  the  atmosphere  and  to  present  an  at- 
tractive and  durable  exterior.  The  metal  used  for 
the  different  parts  must  be  smoothed  and  polished; 
all  foreign  substances,  like  grease,  removed  from 
their  surface  by  a  chemical  process;  and  lastly  a 
coating  of  nickel  deposited  on  the  surface  by  means 
of  electricity.  The  nickel  in  this  way  becomes  a 
part  of  the  original  metal,  and  protects  its  surface 
from  rust  and  corrosion.  A  well-nickeled  piece  of 
metal,  beautifully  polished,  and  kept  free  from  finger 
marks,  loses  its  lustre  only  when  neglected.  Of 


124 


BICYCLIXG  FOR  LADIES. 


course,  there  are  other  ways  of  finishing  the  surface 
of  the  metal  parts  of  the  bicycle;  other  plating  metal 
may  be  substituted  for  the  nickel,  and  other  finish 
than  polish  used. 

Light  wheels  cannot  be  recommended  for  rough 
country  or  for  very  fast  work  over  only  moderately 
good  roads.  A  certain  weight  of  material  has  been 
taken  from  the  bicycle  to  make  it  light;  the  machine 
begins  to  lose  its  rigidity  and  consequentl}'-  its  ac- 
curacy, and  cannot  maintain  its  direction,  but  wavers, 
and  really  travels  further  to  attain  a  given  distance. 
The  weight  of  a  bicycle  should  depend  on  the  roads 
it  is  to  cover  and  the  purposes  it  is  to  serve.  Very 
light  wheels  wear  out  quickly;  they  cannot  stand 
the  strain  of  practice.  Beginners,  therefore,  should 
choose  a  wheel  that  can  endure  the  handling  they 
will  give  it. 

A  very  light,  well-made,  and  delicately  adjusted 
bicycle  can  carry  a  skilled  cyclist  anyw^icre;  but  a 
light  wheel  sooner  loses  its  accuracy,  and  is  then 
more  difficult  to  work  than  a  heavier  w^heel  that  luns 
true.  Heavy  wheels  are  not  to  be  endured;  light 
wheels,  too  light  wheels,  not  to  be  encouraged. 


CHAPTER  XK 


Solving  a  Problem. 

When  choosing  a  wheel,  you  should  know  what 
you  want  and  why  you  want  it.  Machines  are  built 
for  special  purposes,  and  any  reliable  dealer  can 
help  you  in  selecting  a  machine  and  wull  guarantee 
vsatisfaction.  Bicycles  wear  out,  of  course,  but 
with  proper  care  they  may  be  made  to  last  a  long 
time. 

Careful  examination  of  your  wheel  should  always 
be  made  before  starting  for  even  a  short  ride;  and 
on  returning  it  is  well  to  test  gear  and  pedals,  to 
look  at  spokes  and  tires.  Any  needed  repair  can  be 
noted,  and  attended  to  at  convenience.  Always  ex- 
amine your  bicycle  thoroughly  after  a  collision,  for 
shocks  are  dangerous  even  to  the  toughest  metal,  and 
such  precaution  may  prevent  a  serious  accident. 

On  returning  from  a  ride  the  wheel  should  have  a 
thorough  going  over,  the  enamel  dusted,  and  any 
mud  washed  off  with  a  wet  sponge.  The  chain,  if 
your  machine  has  one,  should  be  taken  off  every  two 
or  three  hundred  miles  of  dusty  road,  and  soaked  in 
kerosene  over  night;  the  nickel  or  metal  well  dusted, 
rubbed  with  a  chamois,  and  polished;  and  all  the 
bearings,  axles,  and  gear  carefully  wiped,  and  dust 


126 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


and  grit  removed.  Then  the  chain  should  be  re- 
placed, oiled,  graphited,  and  the  bearings  oiled. 

The  chain  is  a  complicated  mechanism,  consisting 
of  many  repetitions  of  parts;  it  should  be  kept  clean 
and  well  lubricated.  To  apply  graphite,  turn  the 
wheel  upside  down,  hold  the  graphite  still  against 
the  chain,  and  turn  the  wheel.  The  oil  is  needed  in 
the  joints  of  the  chain;  the  graphite  where  the  chain 
engages  the  cogs.  The  other  parts  used  for  applying 
power  need  the  usual  care  given  to  the  best  machines 
— absolute  cleanliness,  freedom  from  grit,  and 
thorough  lubrication. 

The  chain  is  at  present  a  mechanical  detail  only, 
and  the  application  of  power  to  the  wheel  capable  of 
a  great  variety  of  forms.  The  principle  remains 
the  same,  the  application  of  power;  the  mechanical 
contrivance  for  transmitting  it  is  a  detail  of  con- 
struction. The  difference  of  individuality  can  be 
compensated  for  in  the  length  of  the  lever,  size  and 
number  of  gear,  size  of  wheel,  diameter  of  wheel, 
and  width  of  tread. 

The  ideal  machine  requires  little  adjustment. 
The  less  the  screws,  the  nuts,  and  the  bearings  are 
wrenched,  the  more  perfect  is  the  machine,  the  more 
free  from  wear  and  dents  and  scratches.  To  apply 
a  wrench  is  a  serious  responsibility  that  should  not 
be  undertaken  lightly.  It  seems  easy,  and  yet  skilled 
men  are  employed  just  for  that  kind  of  work,  for  it 
is  work  requiring  the  precision  of  the  trained  me- 
chanic. 

After  purchasing  a  watch,  the  owner  does  not  at 
once  investigate  the  machinery;  yet  many,  because 


SOLVING  A  PROBLEM. 


127 


the  tools  are  at  hand,  are  tempted  to  experiment  on 
a  bicycle.  A  bicycle,  like  a  watch,  should  be  ready 
to  run,  and  only  require  winding  up  to  keep  it  going. 
It  should  be  adjusted;  and  if  it  needs  regulating,  this 
should  be  done  by  people  who  understand  the  ma- 
chine and  have  the  requisite  knowledge  and  respon- 
sibility to  do  well  what  is  to  be  done.  Two  rules 
may  be  laid  down  for  one  who  does  not  study  me- 
chanical details — never  to  touch  the  bicycle  except 
to  ride  it ;  and  never  to  let  any  one  else  touch  it  who 
has  not  skill  and  experience. 

This  practice  will  prove  satisfactory  until  some 
day,  miles  from  home,  the  bicycle  will  not  go;  you 
carry  it  more  miles  to  the  nearest  conveyance,  and 
send  it  home.  There  you  have  it  examined,  and  find 
that  a  touch  sets  it  free;  just  as  sometimes,  when 
your  watch  will  not  go,  you  take  it  to  a  watchmaker, 
and  he  examines  it,  winds  it  up,  and  hands  it  back, 
telling  you  there  is  no  charge.  After  learning  to 
wheel  a  bicycle,  therefore,  the  next  step  should  be 
to  learn  to  care  for  it.  Unless  somewhat  familiar 
with  machinery,  it  is  bewildering  to  contemplate 
taking  the  thing  apart  and  putting  all  those  parts  to- 
gether again;  even  more  bewildering  is  it,  having 
taken  the  thing  apart,  not  to  be  able  to  put  it  togeth- 
er. In  such  case,  there  is  nothing  to  do  but  to  gath- 
er the  pieces  of  the  puzzle,  and  send  them  to  be  set 
up.  If  in  this  extremity  a  friend  who  knows  all 
about  a  bicycle  should  offer  assistance,  it  is  well  to 
hear  what  he  has  to  say  before  he  undertakes  the 
work.  "I  do  not  think  your  wheel  is  just  like 
mine,"  perhaps,  or  "Where  do  these  things  belong?" 


128 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


is  enough  for  the  wise.  Better  send  to  the  shop  for 
a  machinist  at  once.  All  the  parts  of  the  bicycle  are 
made  to  go  together  in  one  way,  and  any  attempt  at 
experiment  may  injure  the  mechanism. 

When  you  undertake  to  investigate  a  bicycle  for 
the  first  time,  take  an  old  one  as  a  subject,  and  en- 
deavor to  put  it  in  perfect  running  order.  If  an  old 
bicycle  cannot  be  had,  proceed  with  much  circum- 
spection. Go  where  you  will  be  undisturbed,  where 
there  is  plenty  of  room,  and  where  a  key  may  be 
turned  if  there  is  possibility  of  interruption.  There 
is  sure  to  be  some  oil  and  grease  spattered  about,  in 
spite  of  the  utmost  care,  and  it  is  well  to  remember 
this  while  making  preparations.  Have  ready  a  pile 
of  old  newspapers,  some  cups,  plates,  and  boxes,  and 
a  painting  apron  if  you  possess  one;  if  not  an  old 
skirt  and  apron,  and  sleeves  well  rolled  up.  For 
tools,  a  monkey-wrench,  two  or  three  screw-drivers, 
large  as  well  as  small,  a  hammer,  one  or  two  pieces 
of  wood,  the  bicycle  kit,  oil,  graphite,  a  can  of  kero- 
sene, some  cheesecloth  and  canton  flannel,  and  a  large 
wooden  box. 

Take  two  newspapers  folded  in  half,  and  put  them 
on  the  floor  for  the  saddle  and  handle-bars;  then 
turn  the  bicycle  upside  down,  and  arrange  the  news- 
papers under  the  saddle  and  handles.  If  there  is  a 
bell,  take  it  off,  or  place  a  block  under  the  opposite 
end  of  the  bar  to  balance  it.  Before  turning  the  bi- 
cycle over,  remove  the  lantern,  if  there  is  one  on  the 
bicycle,  as  the  oil  will  be  spilled  out  if  the  lamp  is 
turned  upside  down. 

Begin  by  carefully  removing  all  mud  and  grit 


TURNING  THE  BTCYLCE  OVER 


• 


SOLVING  A  PROBLEM. 


from  the  bicycle.  Wear  old  gloves,  and  remove  mud 
with  the  hand  when  possible,  finishing  with  a  cheese- 
cloth duster  and  an  old  oily  cloth.  Go  over  all  the 
joints  where  the  wheels  turn,  and  remove  every  par- 
ticle of  grit,  then  remove  mud  and  dust. 

An  experienced  worker,  to  save  labor,  cleans  each 
piece  as  it  comes  off,  but  the  beginner  must  work 
more  slowly.  Have  ready  a  shallow  box  or  tray  to 
receive  the  parts  as  they  are  removed.  Lay  each 
part,  as  it  is  taken  off,  in  the  tray,  with  the  oily  side 
up,  for  a  guide.  First,  remove  the  chain,  turn  it 
until  the  nut  of  the  little  screw-bolt  is  found.  This 
little  bolt  forms  one  of  the  link-pins,  and  can  be 
found  quite  readily.  One  end  of  the  bolt  has  a 
screw-head  notch,  and  the  other  a  nut  and  thread. 
Use  the  small  bicycle  screw-wrench  for  this,  a  large 
screw-driver,  and  a  small  screw-driver  to  fit  the 
screw.  Turn  the  chain  until  the  bolt  is  in  a  conve- 
nient position,  then  take  the  large  screw-driver  or  a 
rod,  and  place  through  the  spokes  of  the  rear  wheel, 
letting  the  bar  rest  on  the  frame.  This  will  prevent 
the  wheel  from  turning,  and  keep  the  pedals  and 
sprocket-wheel  in  position;  your  fingers  may  be 
caught  and  badly  cut  if  this  precaution  is  not  taken. 
Fasten  the  small  wrench  on  the  little  nut,  and  hold 
it  there  with  one  hand,  with  the  other  unscrewing 
the  little  screw  with  a  small  screw-driver.  Should 
the  screw  fail  to  yield  easily,  a  drop  or  two  of  kero- 
sene will  soften  the  rust  and  grit,  and  help  to  start  it. 

Return  the  nut  to  the  screw  end,  and  place  it  on 
the  tray.  Take  hold  of  one  end  of  the  chain,  and 
remove  the  bar  that  steadies  the  rear  wheel,  then 


130  BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 

turn  one  of  the  pedal  cranks,  and  the  chain  will  come 
off  in  your  hand.  The  chain  should  be  placed  in 
kerosene  and  left  to  soak. 

The  enamel  of  the  frame  should  then  be  carefully 
rubbed  and  polished  with  canton  flannel.  A  clean 
piece  should  be  kept  for  the  purpose,  for  if  greasy  it 
gives  a  dull  look  to  the  enamel.  The  plating  should 
be  first  polished  with  a  cloth,  and  then  if  dull  with 
whiting.  Nickel  plating  takes  a  beautiful  polish 
with  electro-silicon  used  on  canton  flannel. 

Go  carefully  over  each  oil-cup,  and  be  sure  it  is 
cleaned,  and  work  around  the  ends  of  the  axles. 
Ascertain  if  either  wheel  needs  adjusting,  and  look 
carefully  to  see  that  the  rims  are  true.  A  good  way 
to  do  this  is  to  hold  a  pencil-top  on  the  frame  against 
the  rim  of  the  wheel,  and  spin  the  wheel.  If  it 
touches  evenly  all  around,  the  wheel  is  true;  if  un- 
even, take  the  bicycle  to  a  repair  shop  and  have  the 
wheels  trued  as  soon  as  possible. 

After  cleaning  all  the  bearings,  put  oil  in  the  oil- 
cups  and  replace  the  chain.  It  is  well  to  leave  the 
chain  soaking  in  kerosene,  and  later  hang  it  up  to 
drip,  and  when  dry,  it  will  be  found  bright  and  clean ; 
or  keep  a  can  of  lubricating  oil  in  which  to  soak  the 
chain,  and  after  draining  it  thoroughly,  wipe  clean 
before  replacing  on  the  machine.  Take  an  oil-can, 
and  oil  each  separate  rivet.  Start  the  chain  on  the 
sprocket,  and  pull  it  over  the  rear  sprocket  by  turn- 
ing a  pedal  crank,  bringing  the  ends  on  the  lower 
side.  Place  the  bar  across  as  before,  to  keep  the 
sprocket  from  moving,  and  then  replace  the  little 
screw-bolt,  using  a  small  wrench,  and  a  screw-driver 


SOLVING  A  PROBLEM. 


that  fits  the  screw.  Remove  the  bar,  see  that  the 
chain  is  not  too  tight,  and  note  if  it  requires  any 
taking  up,  an  adjustment  that  is  done  in  the  rear 
wheel. 

Hold  the  stick  of  graphite  on  a  convenient  surface 
of  the  chain,  and  turn  the  cranks;  then  dust  the 
chain  to  take  off  any  small  lumps  of  the  lubricant, 
and  the  wheel  is  ready  to  be  run.  Examine  the  tires 
and  valves,  see  that  the  tires  are  not  too  soft,  and  in- 
flate them.  See  that  the  valves  are  in  order,  then 
set  the  wheel  right  side  up.  Replace  bell  and  lan- 
tern, rub  off  any  finger-marks,  and  the  bicycle  is 
ready. 

If  the  bicycle  has  been  running  for  some  time, 
and  in  spite  of  the  care  bestowed  on  it,  the  chain  runs 
a  little  heavy,  the  pedals  don't  spin  as  they  should, 
or  the  cranks  revolve  as  often  as  they  might,  and 
the  wheels  are  sluggish,  there  is  no  remedy  but  to 
take  down  the  bicycle,  clean  It  thoroughly,  set  it  up 
and  adjust  it.  It  will  require  several  hours'  hard 
work  to  do  this,  combined  with  a  knowledge  of  ma- 
chinery and  a  knowledge  of  bicycle  working,  or  else 
enterprise,  care,  and  common  sense. 

Begin  work  on  a  wheel  perfectly  free,  as  far  as  the 
outside  can  be  made  so,  from  sand,  mud,  and  grit. 
Remove  the  chain  and  put  it  to  soak.  Have  a  pan 
of  kerosene,  and  place  each  small  part  in  that  to  soak, 
and  any  part  that  has  friction  surface  or  is  notably 
oily  or  greasy. 

Begin  serioias  work  on  a  pedal,  which  is  small  and 
easily  handled.  If  the  pedal  is  a  removable  one, 
take  it  off.    If  the  spindle  is  stationary,  take  off  the 


132 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


movable  parts,  first  the  nuts  or  screws,  then  loosen 
the  cones,  having  a  box  placed  underneath  to  catch 
the  balls  if  any  should  fall  out.  Support  the  box 
well  up  under  the  pedal,  as  the  balls  bounce  and 
jump  about.  Even  if  you  have  had  the  pedals  off 
before,  and  know  how  it  is  done,  it  is  well  to  have 
something-  to  catch  the  balls,  as  otherwise  you  must 
atone  for  any  mistake  by  a  scramble.  Place  the  balls 
in  a  separate  dish  of  kerosene,  and  carefully  count 
them.  Wipe  the  movable  parts  of  the  pedals  with  a 
cloth  wet  in  kerosene,  and  finish  with  a  dry  cloth. 

In  taking  a  pedal  down,  the  place  of  each  part 
should  be  carefully  noted,  so  that  it  may  be  a  simple 
matter  to  replace  the  parts.  If,  the  first  pedal  being 
now  apart,  the  novice  is  confused,  there  is  the  other 
pedal  to  afford  comparison.  Study  that,  then  return 
the  parts  of  the  dismembered  pedal  to  their  proper 
places,  and  adjust  them.  The  balls  ma}^  prove 
troublesome;  but  a  screw-driver  dipped  in  vaseline 
will  pick  up  any  very  small  balls,  and  pliers  can 
manage  the  larger  ones.  See  that  cones  and  washers 
are  replaced,  then  add  a  few  drops  of  oil,  adjusting 
the  pedal  to  spin  easily  without  lateral  play,  and 
tighten  cones  and  nuts.  Spin  the  pedal  for  a  final 
test,  and  then  begin  on  the  other  pedal. 

If  after  several  hours'  work,  but  one  pedal  is  fin- 
ished, if  that  one  pedal  is  in  perfect  order,  there  is 
much  cause  for  congratulation.  The  other  pedal 
may  be  done  very  much  more  easily  and  rapidly. 
Of  course,  it  takes  time  to  wipe  all  the  balls  and 
cones,  and  nuts  and  screws,  and  washers  and  spin- 
dles, and  when  the  pedal  is  in  your  hand,  a  little 


SOLVING  A  PROBLEM. 


133 


time  may  be  spent  to  give  it  an  extra  rub  to  brighten 
its  polish.  Wipe  off  any  oil  that  may  have  shown 
in  the  joints  of  the  bearings,  and  the  pedals  are 
finished. 

The  front  wheel  should  next  engage  attention. 
Take  a  large  wrench,  and  start  the  bearing  cones, 
and  take  off  the  nuts  at  opposite  sides  of  the  ends  of 
the  forks.  These  nuts  are  screwed  on  the  ends  of 
the  axle,  and  perhaps  have  metal  washers  under  them. 
Place  them  in  a  box  by  themselves,  and  if  the  forks 
are  notched,  there  will  be  nothing  to  do  but  to  lift 
out  the  wheel.  If  the  ends  of  the  forks  have  only 
eyes,  the  forks  must  be  sprung  to  take  the  wheel  out. 

When  the  wheel  is  in  your  hand,  avoid  letting  any 
grease  or  oil  touch  the  tire,  for  it  will  injure  the 
rubber.  Now  proceed  to  work  on  the  axles.  Sup- 
port the  wheel  on  a  large,  empty  wooden  box.  The 
axle  is  a  spindle,  and  has  cones  to  hold  the  balls  in 
against  the  bearings.  The  cones  must  be  removed 
and  cleaned,  and  the  socket  of  the  hub  made  clean 
with  an  oily  cloth  followed  by  a  clean  one.  The 
axle's  spindle  should  be  replaced,  and  the  balls  and 
cones  restored  to  their  proper  relative  positions. 
Drop  in  a  little  oil,  adjust  and  tighten  the  cones, 
then  spring  the  wheel  back  between  the  forks,  and 
true  it;  see  that  it  runs  even  between  the  forks  and 
that  the  cones  are  keyed  up  firm  and  even.  Replace 
the  nuts,  and  screw  up  firm.  Wipe  off  any  oil  that 
may  have  worked  out,  and  spin  the  wheel  to  try  it. 
If  it  runs  long  and  steadily,  and  has  no  lateral  play, 
and  everything  is  keyed  up  tight  and  true,  this  part 
of  the  work  may  be  considered  finished. 


134 


BJCYCLIXG  FOR  LADIES. 


Some  prefer  to  use  a  little  pure  graphite  for  the 
balls,  and  no  oil;  and  again  some  bicycles  are  made 
without  oil-cups.  For  the  first  work,  oil  is  safer  to 
handle;  but  remember  that  two  or  three  drops  are 
enough.  Too  much  is  worse  than  useless,  for  oil 
spreads  over  a  large  surface,  and  will  cover  all  the 
surface  of  the  bicycle  with  a  thin  film,  which  will 
need  to  be  constantly  wiped  off. 

The  rear  wheel  may  be  removed  without  springing 
the  frame.  Unscrew  the  adjustment  attachment, 
and  the  wheel  will  come  out.  Clean  the  rear  wheel 
bearings  in  the  same  way  you  have  cleaned  those  of 
the  front  wheel :  replace  the  rear  wheel,  and  put  back 
the  adjusting  attachment. 

Give  the  crank  axle  the  same  care  and  attention 
that  the  wheel  axles  have  received.  The  pedal 
cranks  are  fastened  on  either  end  of  the  crank  axle 
in  such  a  way  that  the  dead  centre  is  avoided  as  much 
as  possible.  The  large  sprocket-wheel  is  on  the 
crank  axles,  and  sometimes  not  movable.  The 
cranks  are  screwed  or  fastened  with  pins  to  the  ends 
of  the  axles,  and  should  not  be  disturbed.  Take  the 
large  key-wrench  from  the  kit,  and  start  the  bearing 
cones.  If  the  crank  must  come  off,  see  that  the  nut 
on  the  end  of  the  crank-pin  is  flush  with  the  end,  and 
place  a  piece  of  wood  on  it  before  striking  it  with  a 
hammer,  as  already  explained,  to  start  the  bolt  or 
pin.  Or  if  you  have  some  one  to  help,  let  a  heavy 
hammer-head  be  held  under  the  crank  beside  the  bolt, 
at  the  other  end;  and  the  double  shock  and  recoil 
from  the  heavy  hammer  as  the  blow  is  struck  will 
jar  the  bolt  loose. 


SOLVING  A  PROBLEM. 


Remove  and  clean  the  cones  and  balls,  then  replace 
and  oil  them,  and  adjust  the  cones  tight,  ready  for 
adjustment  when  the  cranks  are  in  place.  The  only 
bearings  left  to  attend  to  are  those  in  the  head  of  the 
frame.  Take  out  the  handle-bars,  and  wipe  them 
and  their  socket  very  careful  y ;  never  allow  any  oil 
to  remain  there.  The  handles  should  never  be  im- 
movably tight;  yet  grease,  if  any  were  introduced, 
would  perhaps  cause  them  to  slip  when  they  should 
remain  in  place.  The  crank  axle-key  usually  fits  the 
cone  of  the  head  of  the  frame,  and  that  may  be 
treated  as  any  other  set  of  ball  bearings — loosened, 
removed,  cleaned,  replaced,  oiled,  adjusted,  and 
tightened.  Any  dust  may  be  removed  from  inside 
the  frame-head  while  the  bearings  are  off. 

When  the  head  bearings  have  been  restored  and 
the  handle-bar  replaced,  put  on  the  chain  and  adjust 
it.  The  rear  wheel  is  arranged  to  move  forward  or 
back  on  the  frame  by  the  adjusting  attachment. 
This  allows  the  two  sprocket-wheels  to  be  placed 
nearer  together  or  farther  apart,  and  the  chain  may 
be  stretched  and  held  between  them  to  any  desired 
degree  of  rigidity  or  of  slackness. 

When  the  bicycle  has  been  set  up,  the  parts  correct- 
ly replaced,  before  turning  it  right  side  up,  go  over 
the  entire  adjustment  of  the  machine,  to  see  that 
nothing  has  been  forgotten.  Have  wrench  and  screw- 
driver at  hand  and  a  clean  cloth.  Begin  with  the 
bearings  of  the  front  wheel.  See  that  the  oil  is  not 
working  out,  and  wipe  them  again.  Take  the  key, 
and  see  that  they  are  true  and  tight.  Apply  the 
screw-wrench  to  the  nuts  of  the  fork,  and  see  that 


BICYCLING  FOR  lADIES. 


they  are  screwed  home.  Treat  the  rear  wheel  in  the 
same  way,  and  look  that  both  wheels  travel  on  the 
same  line  or  plane;  if  they  do  not,  it  is  because  the 
bearings  are  out  or  the  frame  is  bent.  Go  over  the 
axle  bearing,  feel  the  chain,  spin  the  pedals  and 
wheels.  A  well-adjusted  wheel  will  carry  the  weight 
of  the  valve  around  quickly  and  then  swing  back, 
showing  how  sensitive  it  is  to  so  small  a  w^eight.  If 
you  are  satisfied  that  everything  is  right,  turn  the 
bicycle  right  side  up,  and  square  the  handle-bars. 
The  only  w^ay  to  do  this  is  to  stand  in  front  of  the 
bicycle,  and  take  the  wheel  between  the  knees  while 
the  handles  are  pulled  into  place. 

The  saddle-post  and  screw-nuts  that  hold  it  should 
be  examined  and  removed  and  carefully  wiped,  as 
well  as  the  socket  where  they  belong.  The  screw 
that  holds  the  saddle-post  in  place  does  its  work  by 
friction,  and  any  oil  would  prevent  it  from  acting 
properly,  and  the  saddle  would  slip.  Keep  the  oil- 
can carefully  wiped,  and  see  that  the  little  spout  has 
a  clean  round  hole  at  the  end  that  will  allow  only  a 
drop  at  a  time  to  escape;  for  oil  travels  and  spreads 
in  a  marvellous  manner,  appearing  where  least  ex- 
pected or  wanted.  If  there  is  a  hand-brake  on  the 
bicycle,  adjusted  to  alter  with  the  handle-bars, 
examine  it  carefully,  and  wipe  the  rods.  Oil  here 
wnll  allow  the  coupling  to  slip  and  the  action  of  the 
brake  to  be  impaired. 

There  are  so  many  things  to  be  carefully  observed 
and  accurately  done  in  this  kind  of  work  that  mis- 
takes and  omissions  may  be  easily  made  by  the  in- 
experienced ;  but  there  need  not  be  so  many  blunders, 


SOLVING  A  rJWBl.KM. 


after  all,  if  one  works  slowly  and  observingly,  tak- 
ing notes,  in  writing  if  necessary,  as  for  instance 
how  far  the  bearing  cones  are  keyed  in  when  in 
place,  which  is  the  reverse  side  of  the  crank  and 
pedal  pins,  if  they  are  interchangeable,  or  rights  and 
lefts. 

Screw  threads  are  made  rights  and  lefts,  and 
threads  are  made  to  fit  them  in  the  sockets  where 
they  belong.  That  pedals  may  not  work  loose,  the 
spindles  are  made  right  and  left,  with  a  reverse  screw, 
so  that  forward  pedaling  drives  them  tighter.  In 
the  older  constructions,  the  pedal  sometimes  became 
unscrewed  and  fell  off,  or  the  nut  fell  off  and  the 
pedal  loosened.  All  such  matters  should  be  studied 
before  taking  down  a  machine.  Usually  the  maker's 
catalogue  will  describe  and  illustrate  these  details. 
Study  that,  and  learn  the  names  and  uses  of  all  the 
parts  of  the  bicycle,  and  then  you  will  be  prepared 
to  go  to  work  by  yourself,  or  with  but  little  assist- 
ance. 


CHAPTER  XVI 


Where  to  Keep  a  Bicycle, 

Almost  anywhere  that  a  bicycle  can  stand  or  hang 
will  do  for  a  place  to  keep  it;  and  almost  any  place 
will  do  to  go  to  work  on  a  bicycle — the  roadside, 
the  lawn  (though  the  grass  is  worse  than  a  haystack 
to  lose  things  in),  anywhere,  in  fact,  that  may  suit 
your  convenience.  The  accessories  of  the  bicycle 
should  have  places  where  they  may  always  be  found, 
and  the  bicycle  itself  should  be  kept  where  it  will 
be  undisturbed  and  where  it  may  be  kept  free  from 
finger-marks,  dust,  and  oil. 

With  the  bicycle  should  be  kept  certain  conveni- 
ences for  handling  it — a  table  or  bench  fitted  conve- 
niently, frames  to  hold  the  wheel  for  cleaning  and 
adjusting,  a  good  light  to  work  by,  and  a  place  for 
the  tools  that  are  sure  to  accumulate.  There  are 
two  kinds  of  workshop  for  the  amateur — the  one 
that  you  fit  up  for  yourself,  and  the  one  that  is  fitted 
up  for  you.  The  amateur  with  a  place  well  fitted 
out  likes  to  add  details  of  home  construction,  and  the 
proud  owner  of  a  corner  cupboard  is  always  anxious 
to  replace  makeshifts.  In  either  case,  get  the  best 
you  can,  and  take  care  of  it.  Of  tools,  the  best  are 
always  cheapest;  but  good  tools,  or  tools  of  any 


WHERE  TO  KEEP  A  BICYCLE. 


139 


kind,  can  become  a  very  expensive  luxury.  Taste 
for  the  best  comes  quickly  to  even  the  moderately 
enthusiastic. 

A  bicycle  rack  room  should  be  light,  with  plenty 
of  head  room,  and  conveniently  fitted  with  racks, 
shelves,  and  lockers.  Each  rack  should  have  its 
corresponding  shelf-room  and  pigeon-hole,  either 
beside  it  or  above  and  behind  it.  There  is  an  infi- 
nite variety  of  racks  to  select  from,  from  the  two 
stakes  driven  into  the  ground  or  fastened  to  the  floor, 
to  the  handsomely  finished  metal  racks  with  joints  to 
hold  the  frame  at  any  angle. 

If  there  is  but  one  bicycle  to  care  for,  it  is  better 
to  have  its  rack  and  shelf  and  cupboard  together — 
the  rack  to  hold  the  bicycle  in  a  proper  position,  the 
shelf  for  sundry  attachments,  and  the  cupboard  for 
the  lamp  and  extras.  Such  a  bicycle  corner  can  be 
made  very  attractive  to  look  at  when  everything  is 
arranged  and  kept  in  perfect  order.  When  several 
bicycles  are  to  be  cared  for  together,  when  neatly 
set  up  they  make  a  very  pretty  showing.  If  possible, 
the  rack-room  should  be  separate,  set  apart  for  that 
purpose,  and  kept  under  lock  and  key;  it  should  be 
dry  and  well  lighted,  free  from  frost,  and  not  likely 
to  be  over-heated  by  direct  sun-rays  in  summer. 
The  frost  is  injurious  to  metal  and  enamel;  and  the 
sun  or  too  much  heat  will  spoil  rubber,  and  possibly 
injure  enamel  as  well. 

An  even  temperature,  not  any  special  degree  of 
temperature,  is  requisite ;  for  changes  of  temperature 
cause  different  degrees  of  expansion  and  contraction 
in  different  materials;  and  as  the  steel  frame,  and 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


the  enamel  it  is  covered  with,  do  not  expand  and 
contract  in  quite  the  some  degree,  they  will  gradual- 
ly work  loose  from  each  other,  and  the  enamel  will 
flake  or  split. 

The  rubber  tire  should  be  kept  out  of  the  sun,  and 
the  place  where  it  stands  should  be  kept  very  clean, 
and  no  oil  allowed  about;  for  oil  is  injurious  to  the 
rubber,  and  in  case  of  punctures  makes  repairing 
very  difficult,  if  not  impossible.  A  rubber  surface 
with  even  the  slightest  film  of  oil  will  not  make  a 
joint,  as  the  oil  prevents  the  rubber  surface  and  that 
of  the  cement  and  the  article  to  be  repaired  from 
uniting. 

If  the  workshop  is  to  be  used  by  more  than  one 
person,  each  should  have  a  tool-chest  and  a  work- 
bench of  his  own,  and  each  tool-chest  provided  with 
lock  and  key,  and  each  person  with  a  key  to  the  outer 
door.  Tools  are  but  the  continuation  of  the  individ- 
ual brain  and  will  power.  What  one  handles 
becomes,  while  in  one's  hand,  a  part  of  one's  self, 
as  it  were.  Tools,  therefore,  should  be  individual 
property  always,  just  as  scissors  and  thimble  are, 
though  of  course  extra  tools  may  be  provided  for 
general  work.  Every  one  prefers  a  good  pair  of  scis- 
sors to  a  poor  pair,  and  the  same  preference  is  likely 
to  be  evinced  in  the  case  of  other  tools.  If  the 
tools  are  common  property,  the  best  will  be  always 
taken,  and  often  not  restored  to  their  proper  place. 

A  bicycle  workshop  is  devoted  to  metal  work, 
woodwork,  and  rubber  work.  The  metal  work 
should  be  kept  by  itself,  and  the  tools  used  for  metal 
work  only. 


WHERE  TO  KEEP  A  BICYCLE. 


141 


The  amateur  can  commence  fitting  a  shop  by  set- 
ting up  a  small  deal  table  and  a  vise.  The  table  will 
do  for  a  work-bench,  and  one  vise  will  serve  for  a 
beginning ;  it  should  be  of  medium  size,  quite  heavy, 
made  of  wrought  iron  or  cast  steel,  and  capable  of 
holding  a  wrench  in  its  jaws,  though  a  less  expensive 
one  could  be  made  to  do.  A  cheap  vise,  however,  is 
pretty  sure  to  break  if  a  strain  is  put  upon  it;  and, 
while  a  good  workman  could  get  comparatively  good 
work  out  of  a  poor  vise,  the  poor  tool  in  unskilled 
hands  would  be  sure  to  show  its  weak  place.  * 

Have  a  notch  cut  in  the  edge  of  the  table  to  let 
the  vise  back  to  where  there  is  bearing  surface;  and 
it  is  well  to  have  it  as  far  in  as  convenient,  for  the 
weight  will  thus  be  supported  more  steadily.  Get  a 
plumber  to  cut  a  section  of  lead  pipe  about  as  long- 
as  the  jaws  of  the  vise,  and  have  the  piece  of  pipe 
split  and  flattened.  You  can  do  this  yourself  if  5^ou 
can  handle  a  saw,  and  have  one  that  is  suitable  for 
cutting  metal;  or  a  jig  saw  will  do,  and  the  lead  can 
be  flattened  on  a  block  with  a  mallet.  Screw  one  of 
the  flattened  pieces  of  lead  into  the  jaws  of  the  vise, 
leaving  about  an  inch  to  project  above ;  hammer  the 
projecting  part  over,  and  one  side  of  the  jaws  will 
have  a  lead  face  that  can  be  taken  out.  Do  the 
same  with  the  other  piece  of  lead.  Replace  them 
both,  and  the  vise  is  fitted  with  a  pair  of  lead  jaw 
faces,  which  will  be  found  most  useful. 

The  lead  being  sofc,  any  small  metal  object  may 
be  held  between  the  jaws  without  injury,  while  if 
the  steel  face  of  the  vise  came  in  direct  contact  with 
the  metal,  a  screw  for  example,  the  thread  might  be 


142 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


bruised;  or  if  the  screw  were  harder  than  the  vise, 
the  face  of  the  jaws  would  be  marred. 

With  a  work-table,  a  vise,  and  the  bicycle  kit,  a 
very  fair  beginning  may  be  made,  and  any  refractory 
small  part  handled  with  ease.  Even  the  spindle  oi 
the  axles  of  one  of  the  wheels  may  be  screwed  in, 
and  the  bearings  removed,  while  held  in  this  way. 
The  vise  will  act  as  a  clamp  for  holding  pieces  to  be 
polished,  and  it  is  most  useful  in  taking  a  pedal  or 
other  small  parts  down.  Above  the  table  should  be 
a  tool-rack,  three  feet  of  board  ten  or  twelve  inches 
wide,  with  a  ledge  or  shelf  nailed  along  the  lower 
edge,  and  a  strip  of  leather  or  some  stiff  and  pliable 
material  nailed  on  in  loops  to  hold  the  tools.  Under 
the  table  should  be  kept  a  couple  of  boxes — wooden 
boxes  such  as  canned  goods  come  in  will  do— one  as 
a  receptacle  for  oil-cans,  kerosene,  and  cloths,  and 
the  other  to  use  as  a  frame.  The  outfit  should  be 
completed  by  a  little  bench,  and  a  wooden  stool  to 
sit  on  when  working  at  the  table;  for  much  of  the 
work  about  a  bicycle  may  be  done  while  seated  com- 
fortably, and  it  is  always  well  to  save  strength  when 
possible. 

A  workshop  once  started,  many  little  contriv- 
ances suggest  themselves  for  convenient  working, — 
a  nail  must  be  put  up  for  the  apron,  a  corner  found 
for  the  working  gloves,  separate  places  allotted  for 
oily  cloths  and  clean  ones  and  for  the  kerosene.  The 
bicycle  lamp,  if  an  oil-lamp,  should  have  a  stand 
for  trimming  and  filling,  and  should  be  cared  for 
regularly;  the  best  of  lamps  will  smoke  occasionally, 
and  the  soot  must  not  be  allowed  to  fly  about. 


WHERE  TO  KEEP  A  BICYCLE. 


143 


From  fitting  up  a  bic3''cle  workshop,  the  transition 
is  easy  to  studying  accomplishments  that  may  be  of  use 
— planning  tours  and  trips,  exercising  scientifically 
to  prepare  to  enjoy  them,  studying  the  construction 
and  improvement  of  modern  contrivances,  learning 
the  use  of  map  and  compass,  investigating  camping 
possibilities,  and  learning  how  to  depend  on  limited 
resources  when  cut  off  from  supplies.  The  simple 
appliances  and  contrivances  of  the  home  workshop 
lead  the  mind  to  appreciation  and  desire  for  some- 
thing better,  more  workmanlike.  A  choice  of  tools 
suggests  itself ;  and  from  the  first  assortment  of  a 
couple  of  wrenches,  a  few  screw-drivers,  a  hammer, 
and  a  couple  of  wooden  boxes,  is  finally  evolved  the 
well-furnished  amateur  workshop. 

The  ideal  room  for  this  purpose  should  have  a  good 
north  light,  with  windows  on  two  sides  if  possible, 
and  high  enough  from  the  floor  to  allow  a  work- 
bench to  be  placed  in  front  of  the  window  with  the 
light  falling  upon  it,  and  a  space  of  ten  inches  or  a 
foot  between  the  lowest  part  of  the  window  and  the 
bench;  this  space  to  be  arranged  as  a  rack  for  tools. 
The  windows  should  open  and  shut  easily,  and  be 
fitted  with  two  kinds  of  shades,  dark  green  and 
white,  two  pairs  of  shades  to  each  window,  two  roll- 
ing up  from  the  lower  part,  and  two  down  from  the 
upper  part.  Nothing  is  so  fatiguing  as  working  by 
light  not  suited  to  the  work  to  be  done.  With  shades 
arranged  in  this  way,  light  may  be  perfectly  con- 
trolled, and  distributed  where  needed  by  means  of 
reflectors.  Ventilating  and  heating,  also,  must  be 
arranged  for. 


144 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


The  workshop  should  have  running  water,  and  a 
closet  for  working  clothes,  which  are  apt  to  be  oily 
or  greasy.  There  should  be  plenty  of  shelf-room, 
and  an  extra  cupboard  or  two.  The  floor  should  be 
of  wood,  unpainted.  There  should  be  a  bench  for 
carpenter  work  and  carpenter  tools;  a  bench  for 
cabinet-working  tools  for  fine  wood-working ;  a  table 
for  rubber  and  naphtha;  and  a  long,  heavy,  narrow 
bench  fitted  with  vises  of  different  sizes  and  pat- 
terns; a  table  devoted  to  the  blast  furnace,  a  corner 
for  an  anvil  and  portable  forge  and  another  for  a 
lathe  and  power-saw,  though  these  may  be  dispensed 
with.  The  movable  furniture  may  consist  of  stools 
and  benches  of  different  heights,  and  the  frames 
necessary  to  take  down  and  handle  a  bicycle  on. 

Metal  can  be  bent,  twisted,  cut,  pressed,  elong- 
ated, sawed,  stretched,  and  melted  into  any  shape 
desired.  The  tools  adapted  to  this  work  may  con- 
sist of  holding  tools,  carving  tools,  molding  tools, 
and  bending  tools;  and  contrivances  and  tools  made 
to  perform  certain  work,  as  screw-driver,  etc. 

Cutting  tools  are  knives,  saws,  files,  and  chisels, 
which  perform  their  work  by  applied  power,  wheth- 
er controlled  directly  by  the  hand  or  otherwise. 

The  m.etal-working  outfit  may  contain  many  vari- 
eties of  tools. 


CHAPTER  Xyil. 


Tires. 

In  the  older  forms  of  wheel,  the  tire  did  duty  in 
protecting  and  strengthening  the  wheel  and  holding 
it  together.  In  the  bic3^cle  wheel,  the  rim  is  the 
strengthening  and  supporting  contrivance.  The  tire 
protects  the  rim,  and  acts  as  a  spring  cushion  as  well, 
receiving  shock  and  jar.  The  solid  rubber  tire  was 
an  advance  over  the  old  steel  tire  on  the  bone-shak- 
ing machine,  as  it  was  called,  in  the  days  when  the 
bicycle  was  still  in  its  experimental  stage. 

The  solid  tire  was  narrow,  and  after  a  certain 
diameter  of  material  was  reached,  the  weight  of 
rubber  became  too  great  if  the  tire  was  made  larger. 
It  was  found  that  a  certain  thickness  of  material  was 
sufficient  for  wear  and  tear  and  that  more  surface 
was  desired  to  grip  the  roadway,  and  that  conse- 
quently the  tire  should  be  made  lighter.  Hose-pipe 
was  tried,  and  did  well;  and  then  experiment  suc- 
ceeded experiment  in  the  effort  to  produce  a  tire  that 
would  fit,  wear  well,  be  light,  and  give  speed  and 
resiliance. 

A  pneumatic  tire  is  made  of  a  tough,  hard  outer 
material  to  resist  wear,  a  fibrous  inner  material  to 
give  stiffness  and  prevent  stretching,  and  an  imper- 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


vious  inner  layer  to  retain  the  air.  Rubber  is  a 
sticky,  gummy  substance,  easily  melted  at  a  com- 
paratively low  temperature,  and  becoming  hard 
when  exposed  to  the  air  and  moderately  low  tempera- 
ture; it  dissolves  readily  in  benzine  or  gasoline  or 
naphtha,  and  is  insoluble  in  water.  Grease  and  oil 
have  a  peculiar  disintegrating  effect  on  rubber  and 
rubber  materials,  and  are  most  injurious  to  them.  To 
prevent  rubber  substances  from  adhering  to  each 
other,  they  are  prepared  in  a  particular  way,  and  feel 
dry  and  gritty  to  the  touch. 

Tires  are  made  in  layers,  and  double-tube  tires 
have  a  separate  inner  tube  of  impervious  rubber  to 
hold  the  air,  and  an  outer  covering  of  toughened 
material,  that  is  quite  separate  and  not  necessarily 
air-tight,  to  resist  wear. 

The  tire  must  be  held  immovable  on  the  rim  of  the 
wheel.  There  is  all  the  pull  of  the  weight  of  the 
moving  bicycle  against  the  surface  over  which  it 
moves,  and  the  tire  must  be  secured  to  the  rim  in 
such  a  way  as  to  keep  it  forced  in  place.  There  are 
two  methods  of  fastening  it  permanently  to  the  rim, 
— with  cement  or  other  material  of  that  character,  so 
as  to  make  it  a  part  of  the  rim,  as  it  were;  and  by 
clamping  it  fast.  A  cemented  tire,  or  indeed  any 
tire  of  rubber,  should  never  be  left  in  the  sun,  as  the 
heat  affects  the  rubber  and  perhaps  the  cement. 

Changes  of  temperature  affect  different  materials 
in  different  degrees,  and  the  different  materials  ex- 
pand and  contract,  working  loose  from  each  other 
until  something  gives  way,  with  apparently  inexplic- 
able results.    When  two  or  more  different  materials 


TIRES. 


147 


are  used  in  construction  in  this  way,  this  problem 
will  always  present  itself. 

The  tire  inflated,  the  impervious  inner  covering 
of  the  tire  tube,  which  is  made  of  a  soft  and  yielding 
substance,  fills  the  interstices  in  the  outer  covering, 
rendering  it  air-tight.  Should  a  hard  substance  then 
be  introduced  into  this  material,  and  a  puncture  oc- 
cur, it  is  necessary  to  locate  the  puncture.  This  is 
very  difficult  to  do  if  the  puncture  is  small,  and  the 
substance  that  made  the  hole  has  been  removed. 
Ascertain  first  that  the  trouble  is  not  with  the  valve 
cf  the  tire  if  the  air  is  not  retained  properly.  Then 
test  for  puncture  in  this  way.  Wet  the  surface  of 
the  tire,  and  note  the  bubbles  that  form  under  the 
film  of  water,  and  the  puncture  is  found. 

The  inner  surface  tire  is  made  to  resist  the  air,  and 
is  usually  of  pure  rubber.  The  outer  covering  is  for 
strength  and  wear.  Rubber  may  be  repaired  with 
rubber  easily  enough,  and  the  purer  the  rubber,  the 
easier  it  is  to  cement  it  with  a  cement  made  of  pure 
rubber  dissolved  in  a  volatile  vehicle.  Almost  any 
repair  or  renovation  of  the  tire  may  be  accomplished 
with  rubber  material,  rubber  cement  to  be  used  for 
plugging,  and  twine  or  cotton  cloth  to  be  used  for 
strengthening  purposes.  Small  punctures  require 
only  plugging  from  the  inside;  tears  and  rents  re- 
quire plugging  and  reinforcing  as  well.  Each  make 
of  tire  has  its  repair-kit  and  directions  for  use. 

The  single-tube  tire,  with  its  inner  coat,  is  so  made 
that  the  inner  covering  wnll  act  as  a  continuous  plug. 
The  soft  rubber  is  compressed,  and  put  on  in  such  a 
way  that  the  air  pressure,  even  if  a  puncture  occurs, 


148 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


will  help  to  close  the  hole  by  pressing  on  all  sides 
around  and  about  it.  To  illustrate  this  principle, 
cover  the  outside  of  the  tube  with  soft  rubber  cement, 
and  let  it  dry.  Then  turn  the  tube  inside  out. 
The  rubber  will  be  in  an  active  state  of  compression. 
Force  air  against  the  surface,  and  it  is  easily  seen 
how  the  rubber  is  crowded  if  there  is  any  place 
made  by  puncture,  and  how  the  hole  would  be  closed. 

Numberless  punctures  are  made  and  resealed,  and 
the  tire  works  all  right.  The  puncture  that  does  not 
reseal  must  be  plugged  or  patched.  Rubber  plugs 
are  made  in  all  sizes;  and  rubber  cement,  liquid 
rubber,  is  put  up  in  collapsible  metal  tubes,  like 
paint-tubes,  with  a  pointed  spout  to  introduce  the 
cement  behind  and  through  the  puncture.  There 
are  numberless  convenient  contrivances  made  to  hold 
plugs,  enlarge  holes,  and  to  do  the  repair  work 
neatly. 

In  mending  a  puncture,  the  tire  remains  on  the 
wheel,  and  the  work  is  done  from  the  outside  of  the 
tire.  If  the  hole  is  very  small,  it  must  be  enlarged 
sufficiently  to  introduce  the  plug.  The  rubber  of 
the  plug  is  very  soft  and  compressible,  and  the  hole 
should  be  considerably  smaller  than  the  shank  of  the 
plug. 

The  plug  must  be  held  firmly,  and  forced  through 
the  hole,  and  held  in  place  while  the  nose  of  the 
cement-tube  is  introduced,  and  a  plentiful  supply  of 
liquid  rubber  smeared  over  the  inside  of  the  hole 
around  and  on  the  plug,  and  enough  extra  cement 
added  to  flow  all  about  the  inside  of  the  tire  arourxd 
the  puncture.    Pull  the  plug  back  by  the  shank, 


TIRES. 


149 


allowing  the  head  to  rest  on  the  inside  of  the  tire, 
and  the  shank  to  come  back  through  the  hole.  Pull 
the  plug  firmly  into  place  by  the  shank,  which  should 
fit  the  hole  very  tight.  Cut  off  the  projecting  end 
of  the  plug  shank,  and  the  repair  is  made.  Turn  the 
wheel  until  the  plug  comes  to  the  lowest  point,  and 
keep  it  there  until  the  cement  gets  around  the  plug. 
To  smooth  a  ragged  hole  before  introducing  the  plug, 
when  the  proper  tools  are  not  to  be  had,  a  heated 
wire  may  be  used  to  make  a  round  smooth  hole. 
Rubber  may  be  handled  and  cut  while  wet  with 
water,  but  must  be  dry  and  free  from  grease  to  take 
cement.  Always  wet  the  knife-blade  before  cutting 
the  end  off  the  plug;  this  will  ensure  a  smooth,  clean 
cut. 

A  puncture  may  be  repaired  by  introducing  almost 
any  material  on  the  inner  surface,  and  holding  it  in 
place;  and  it  is  well  +0  know  of  a  few  substitutes  for 
the  regular  repair-kit  for  emergency  use.  Punctures 
difficult  to  locate  may  be  found  by  inflating  the  tire 
and  wetting  with  soapy  water,  when  a  bubble  will 
form  where  the  air  escapes. 

A  puncture  that  goes  all  the  way  through  the  inner 
tube  of  the  tire  must  be  repaired  on  the  inside.  The 
outer  covering  of  the  tire  is  porous,  and  if  the  hole 
is  plugged  or  patched  on  the  outside,  the  air  will 
escape  in  other  directions  through  the  material  of  the 
tire.  Failing  the  repair-kit  tools,  a  rubber  plug, 
some  liquid  cement,  a  piece  of  string,  and  a  pair  of 
pliers  will  do  good  work.  Tie  the  string  to  the  plug 
to  keep  it  from  slipping,  apply  plenty  of  cement  to 
the  plug,  then  grasp  it  with  the  pliers,  and  introduce 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


it  through  the  hole  prepared  for  it  in  the  tire.  Pnll 
the  string  to  pull  the  plug  into  place,  see  that  there 
is  plenty  of  cement  around  and  about  it,  inflate  the 
tire,  and  the  air  will  hold  the  plug  in  place  until  the 
cement  hardens. 

The  plugs  that  are  supplied  are  disks  of  rubber  of 
different  sizes,  with  stems  attached  to  the  centre, 
and  a  nice  tool  is  made  for  the  purpose  of  punching 
the  hole  in  the  tire.  When  a  hole  is  burned,  the 
charred  edges  should  be  removed,  and  if  possible 
cleaned  with  benzine.  A  tire  well  patched  on  the 
inside  is  almost  as  good  as  new%  and  very  serviceable, 
unless  the  brake  is  applied  frequently  and  unevenly, 
when  the  plug  is  almost  sure  to  feel  the  push. 

The  commercial  patch  or  plug  makes  the  most  sat- 
isfactory repair  for  a  puncture,  although  there  are 
other  things  that  may  be  used.  Rubber  bands  may 
be  pressed  into  service,  and  sheet  rubber  also  may  be 
used.  Repair  on  the  roadside  is  made  in  the  same 
way  as  repair  in  the  workshop,  the  differences  being 
in  the  conveniences  for  working  and  the  permanency 
of  the  patch.  A  rent  may  be  repaired  with  plugs,  it 
being  first  stitched  together,  then  the  plugs  intro- 
duced, and  finally  a  patch  cemented  on  the  outside 
over  the  rent  to  protect  the  stitches.  A  puncture 
may  be  repaired  with  rubber  bands  held  in  place  on 
a  wire,  covered  with  cement,  and  forced  into  the 
hole  made  in  the  tire.  A  piece  of  wire  flattened 
on  the  end,  a  cross  piece  with  a  notch  cut  in  it  and 
twisted  below,  makes  a  fair  repair  needle.  The  end 
of  the  projecting  rubber  cut  off,  a  very  fair  plug 
results. 


TIRES. 


Sheet  rubber  may  be  placed  over  the  hole  on  the 
inside,  though  it  is  difficult  to  keep  it  in  place. 
Twisted  up  and  tied  into  a  plug,  or  spread  into  place 
on  the  inside,  the  difficulty  with  this  repair  is  that 
the  patch  must  be  held  in  place  until  the  cement 
hardens,  and  then  is  liable  to  work  out  of  place. 
Inner  tube  tires  are  repaired  with  patches  of  soft 
rubber.  After  the  puncture  is  located,  the  patch 
will  retain  its  place  by  being  pressed  against  the 
inner  surface  of  the  tire  when  inflated. 

To  do  good  work  in  repairing  rubber,  always  clean 
the  surface  of  the  rubber  material  thoroughly,  wash- 
ing with  benzine  when  possible;  and  always  test  a 
patch  when  finished  by  placing  it  in  water  or  wetting 
it,  to  ascertain  that  it  is  satisfactory.  On  the  road  a 
puncture  may  be  plugged  in  any  time  under  five 
minutes  when  located.  In  the  workshop,  it  is  more 
convenient  to  hang  the  wheel  up  while  making  a 
patch,  as  it  is  more  readily  held  in  place  when  work- 
ing from  bejow. 

There  are  many  ways  of  doing  makeshift  repairs. 
Melted  rosin  may  replace  the  rubber  cement,  and 
rosin  may  be  found  at  any  tinsmith's.  Melt  the 
rosin,  and  dip  the  rubber  in  that  to  make  it  stick. 

Tire  tape  may  be  used  in  a  variety  of  ways.  Find 
the  puncture,  cut  strips  three  or  four  inches  long, 
and  place  them  lengthwise  on  the  tire,  lapping  the 
edges  at  least  half  way  over ;  then  wrap  the  two  thick- 
nesses of  tape  round  and  round  the  tire,  and  keep 
lapping  the  tape  each  time  over  the  last  turn  to  hold 
the  edge  down,  making  it  air-tight.  Well  put  on, 
tire  tape  will  last  for  many  miles.    The  tire  should 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


be  partly  inflated  while  the  tape  is  being  put  on,  and 
fully  inflated  when  it  is  all  on.  Force  more  air  into 
the  tire  to  cause  the  tape  to  grip  securely.  Such  re- 
pair, though  not  permanent,  may  prove  serviceable 
in  emergency. 

A  simple  and  effective  substitute  for  the  rubber 
plug  is  absorbent  cotton  or  jeweller's  cotton,  well 
dipped  in  cement,  and  the  cement  worked  into  the 
cotton.  Quite  a  large  puncture  may  be  repaired  with 
this,  and  the  hole  need  not  be  enlarged  or  burnt  to 
receive  it,  as  the  soft  mass  of  cotton  fills  the  irregu- 
larities in  the  puncture.  It  rfiay  be  introduced  into 
the  puncture  either  with  an  ordinary  repair  tool  or 
a  piece  of  twisted  wire.  The  tire  is  held  on  the  rim 
by  cement  made  of  shellac  or  some  other  equally 
good  cementing  substance.  Of  course,  in  using  a 
cotton  plug,  the  greatest  mass  of  the  cotton  should 
be  on  the  inside  of  the  tire,  leaving  a  stem  in  the 
puncture,  and  then  the  outside  ends  should  be 
trimmed  off. 

The  tire  may  be  readily  removed  with  the  hands 
by  pulling  at  right  angles  with  the  wheel.  Rubber 
cement  ma}^  be  made  by  dissolving  perfectly  pure 
rubber  in  naphtha;  but  the  commercial  cement  is 
usually  found  the  cheapest  in  the  end. 

If  you  should  be  so  unfortunate  as  to  break  down, 
what  are  the  problems  you  must  meet?  The  bicycle 
is  made  of  different  materials — iron,  metal,  steel, 
wood,  rubber,  and  leather,  and  each  different  ma- 
terial requires  a  different  kind  of  treatment.  The 
general  idea  in  any  kind  of  repairs  is  to  effect  the  hold- 
ing of  the  parts  in  position  with  a  material  that  will 


TIRES. 


supply  strength  and  stiffness.  The  use  of  glue  or  ce- 
ment is  merely  to  hold  parts  in  position,  to  replace  the 
fractured  pieces  and  keep  them  in  place,  to  enable 
the  particular  part  to  do  its  duty,  and  to  keep  the 
piece  in  place  while  the  cement  hardens. 

There  is  room  for  great  ingenuity  in  handling  re- 
pair work  and  in  estimating  the  available  resources. 
The  most  common  accident  is  a  puncture  in  a  pneu- 
matic tire.  There  are  also  repairs  to  be  considered 
to  the  wooden  rims  and  the  spokes  and  the  tubing 
and  lost  or  broken  parts.  A  great  deal  of  damage 
could  occur  in  a  collision,  and  the  bicycle  be  in  very 
poor  shape,  but  it  can  be  set  right  with  a  little  assist- 
ance from  a  mechanic,  even  though  he  does  not  un- 
derstand the  mechanism  of  a  bicycle. 

Suppose  nothing  to  be  injured  except  a  piece  of 
the  supporting  tubing;  or  that  the  bicycle  could  be 
made  to  go  if  the  rim  were  spliced  or  strengthened 
at  a  place  where  it  has  been  split.  A  temporary 
repair  usually  takes  considerable  time,  and  should 
never  be  attempted  unless  there  is  nothing  else  to 
be  done.  A  blacksmith  shop,  unless  the  smith  is 
very  ingenious,  is  not  a  very  good  place  to  look  for 
assistance;  a  plumber  or  tinsmith  or  locksmith, 
unless  a  bicyclist,  can  help  but  little.  For  a  broken 
rim  I  would  betake  me  to  a  carpenter  shop  or  car- 
riage maker's.  If  the  break  is  in  a  straight  piece 
of  tube,  get  the  carpenter  to  make  a  round  stick, 
not  as  long  as  the  broken  tube,  and  fit  it  to  the 
inside,  to  slip  in  easily.  Hardware  stores  keep 
round  wooden  rods,  and  perhaps  one  of  these  would 
answer.    Push  the  round  stick  up  into  the  tube,  and, 


154 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


holding  the  parts  in  place,  let  it  slip  down  into  the 
other  part  of  the  break;  this  will  keep  the  ends  of  the 
break  together.  Then  get  the  carpenter  to  take  two 
blocks  of  wood,  hollow  them  out  to  hold  the  tube, 
and  screw  them  fast  together,  holding  the  tube 
between  them.  If  he  has  an  auger-bit  the  size  of 
the  tubing,  he  can  easily  bore  a  hole  in  a  block  the 
size  of  the  tube;  then  have  this  block  cut  in  two  with 
the  saw,  leaving  the  hole  cut  in  half,  and  screw  the 
pieces  together  after  they  are  placed  on  the  broken 
part.  The  same  kind  of  a  repair  may  be  made  on 
the  angles  of  the  frame  if  the  blocks  are  hollowed  to 
fit.  This  makes  an  unsightly  job,  but  can  be  recom- 
mended as  strong  and  safe  when  properly  done. 

A  broken  spoke  ma}^  be  repaired,  if  it  cannot  be 
replaced,  by  bending  the  ends  of  the  broken  parts 
into  loops;  then,  taking  a  piece  of  wire  through  both 
loops,  fasten  it  together,  and  tighten  by  screwing  it 
up. 

A  wooden  rim  may  be  w^hipped  or  wound.  The 
tire  must  be  deflated  first,  and  removed  from  the  rim 
at  the  broken  place;  then  wand  fine  wire  or  fish-line 
about  the  place,  after  filling  the  break  with  glue  or 
shellac.  In  wrapping,  take  care  that  the  turns  are 
made  very  smooth  and  even,  and  close  to  each  other. 
Then  the  tire  may  be  cemented  and  inflated.  Of 
course,  there  will  be  a  lumpy  place  on  the  rim,  but 
it  will  do  until  the  rim  can  be  replaced. 

Any  bolt  that  has  lost  its  nut,  when  the  nut  cannot 
be  replaced,  may  be  held  by  hammering  a  burr  on 
the  end.  If  the  end  is  too  long,  a  piece  may  be  cut 
or  filed  off,  and  a  burr  hammered  down  to  hold. 


TIRES. 


A  bicycle  cannot  travel  easily  if  the  frame  has  been 
bent  out  of  true;  and  to  straighten  a  bent  frame  is 
an  easy  matter.  Take  out  wheels,  saddle,  and  handle- 
bars, and  use  a  piece  of  broom-handle  to  spring  the 
frame  into  true;  or  take  a  stout  cord,  fasten  it  to 
either  end  of  the  part  to  be  straightened,  insert  a 
stick,  and  wind  the  cord  up  tight. 

There  are  three  things  to  take  into  consideration 
when  doing  repair  work:  First,  finding  out  what  is 
to  be  done,  then  doing  it,  then  seeing  that  it  has 
been  done  right. 


CHAPTER  XyiJL 


Mechanics  of  Bicycling, 

All  applied  mechanical  power  is  the  application 
of  lever  movement  (and  lever  movement  is  but  the 
effect  of  applied  power),  either  simple,  compound,  or 
complex. 

In  the  bicycle  propelled  by  human  power,  we  have 
a  series  of  lever  movements,  initiated  and  executed 
by  the  highest  and  most  effective  mechanism  known 
— the  human  body,  applied  human  power.  There  is 
the  seat  of  power,  the  point  of  application,  and  the 
object.  The  bicycle  or  object  is  so  constructed  that 
it  continues  the  application  of  power  applied. 

The  lever  is  described  as  "a  bar  or  other  rigid  in- 
strument having  a  fixed  point  for  the  exercise  of 
power  and  the  application  of  power  to  the  object  to 
be  moved."  The  series  of  lever  movements  in  the 
human  body  is  the  most  wonderful  known. 

There  are  three  varieties  of  levers,  of  three  differ- 
ent degrees  of  efficiency,  known  as  levers  of  the  first, 
second,  and  third  classes,  or  orders,  of  levers. 

In  the  lever  of  the  first  class,  the  fulcrum  is 
between  the  weight  and  the  power:    P  F  W. 


MECHANICS  OF  BICYCLIXG. 


^57 


In  the  lever  of  the  second  class  the  fulcrum  is  op- 
posite to  the  power:    P  W 

F 

In  the  lever  of  the  third  class  the  fulcrum  is  oppo- 
site to  the  weight:         P  W. 

F 

These  different  powers  of  levers  are  used  in  com- 
bination, and  produce  a  great  variety  of  power  effects 
and  applications. 

Other  factors  to  note  are: 

That  a  bod)'  in  motion  persists  in  maintaining  its 
direction  unless  other  forces  intervene. 

That  the  gyroscope  overcomes  the  force  of  gravity 
while  rapidly  revolving. 

That  a  body  set  in  motion  tends  to  move  in  a 
straight  line. 

That  the  centre  of  gravity  must  be  maintained  by 
balance  if  disturbed  or  shifted. 

That  force  is  the  cause  of  a  change  in  the  velocity 
or  direction  of  motion  of  a  body. 

That  all  alterations  of  velocity  take  place  gradually 
and  continuously. 

That  centripetal  force  and  centrifugal  force  are 
force  directed  by  radial  action. 

That  the  air  offers  resistance,  which  increases 
when  the  air  is  in  motion. 

That  friction  offers  resistance  to  power. 

That  the  smaller  the  surface  presented,  the  less 
friction  there  is  to  resist. 

That  resistance  must  be  overcome  by  power  ex- 
pended for  the  purpose. 

That  the  base  of  the  bicycle  is  practically  without 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


width,  and  is  usually  about  from  forty-two  to  forty- 
four  inches  long. 

That  the  direction  of  the  base  may  be  changed  at 
will  within  certain  limits. 

That  the  bicycle  will  fall  unless  prevented  from 
doing  so. 

That  to  prevent  a  bicycle  from  falling,  or  to  main- 
tain a  bicycle  on  its  base,  it  is  necessary  to  balance  it. 

That  the  constant  effort  to  maintain  the  bicycle 
upright  upon  its  base  is  on  account  of  the  motion  of 
the  different  opposing  forces. 

The  bicycle  is  constructed  to  overcome  the  resist- 
ing forces  in  different  ways,  supplying  as  many 
forces  as  can  be  made  available  to  accomplish  a  par- 
ticular purpose,  permitting  a  certain  choice  and  dis- 
crimination in  the  matter. 

The  bicycle  has  one  weight-carrying  wheel  and  a 
frame  and  a  pivoted  wheel.  The  driving  power  is 
applied  to  the  weight-carrying  wheel,  and  the  steer- 
ing is  done  with  the  pivoted  wheel.  The  bicycle 
remains  upright  because  several  forces  co-operate  to 
enable  it  to  maintain  its  plane,  change  direction,  and 
overcome  certain  resisting  and  opposing  forces. 

A  bicyclist  is  propelled  at  a  sufficient  velocity  to 
maintain  the  plane  of  movement.  By  altering  the 
centre  of  gravity,  inclining  one  way  or  the  other, 
change  of  direction  may  be  made. 

The  front  or  guiding  wheel  of  the  bicycle,  being 
controlled  by  the  different  angles  of  resistance  it  pre- 
sents to  the  surface  it  rotates  upon,  and  not  being 
immovably  fixed,  can  pivot  to  a  plane  corresponding 
to  a  plane  of  least  resistance.    After  a  little  momen- 


MECHANICS  OF  HICYCLIXG. 


turn  is  attained,  a  bicycle  will  maintain  its  speed 
with  but  little  assistance  of  power,  unless  it  is  acci- 
dentall)^  obstructed,  or  an  increase  of  grade  requires 
an  increase  of  power. 

The  frame  of  a  bicycle  is  a  compound  lever,  com- 
bining the  second  and  third  orders.  The  wheels  are 
a  compound  lever  of  the  second  and  third  orders. 
The  fork  and  handles  a  lever  of  the  second  order. 

The  forks  and  handle-bars  are  set  at  an  angle  with 
the  front  wheel,  thus  conveying  the  touch  on  the 
ground  or  other  surface  to  the  pivot  head  and  the 
hands. 

A  moving  body  tends  to  pursue  its  direction.  A 
wheel  loses  its  power  to  change  its  direction  after 
passing  the  point  of  friction.  With  the  forks  at  this 
angle,  the  blow  is  felt,  and  change  of  direction 
caused  by  an  obstacle  conveyed;  but  the  w^heel  has 
still  some  power  to  maintain  its  plane  from  friction, 
and  is  steadied  by  its  head.  The  motion  of  swaying 
is  conveyed  and  overcome  at  the  tire  base.  If  the 
pivot  were  directly  over  the  tire  base,  the  swing 
would  be  given  to  the  wheel;  and  the  tire,  having 
passed  its  point  of  friction,  would  continue  to  swing. 
If  the  head  were  pivoted  on  a  point,  there  would  be 
no  side  friction  on  the  rim;  because  it  is  pivoted 
at  an  incline,  the  friction  base  is  increased  in  pro- 
portion, and  the  wheel,  steadied  in  itself,  is  easily 
controlled  by  an  increased  line  of  friction  or  by 
prolonging  the  time  from  the  point  of  contact. 

A  body  in  motion  persists  in  maintaining  its  plane 
of  motion  unless  additional  forces  intervene.  The 
occurrence  of  these  forces  is  detrimental  and  frequent, 


l6o  BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 

requiring  a  continuous  swing  of  the  guiding  wheel 
either  by  the  hands  or  by  balance.  The  direction  of 
the  base  line  is  continually  changed,  as  it  were, 
broadening  the  base  line.  The  weight  must  incline 
with  the  front  wheel,  and  the  front  wheel  will  sup- 
port it.  If  inclined  away  from  the  direction  of  the 
front  wheel,  the  weight  becomes  the  long  arm  of  the 
lever,  exerting  weight  against  weight  at  the  base  of 
the  bicycle,  there  being  no  opposing  force.  The 
front  wheel  being  turned  away,  the  bicycle  falls  or 
slips  over. 

With  the  fork  at  this  angle  the  wheel  is  inclined, 
the  frame  held  on  the  wheel  at  this  angle,  as  the 
wheel  is  turned  sideways,  it  gradually  brings  the 
centre  directly  over  the  axles,  raising  the  front  end 
of  the  frame  up.  This  pressure  or  leverage  from 
the  frame  tends  to  keep  the  wheel  straight  in  the 
line  of  least  resistance.  In  turning,  the  wheel  must 
lift  the  weight,  and  push  it  up;  and  this  factor 
greatly  adds  to  the  steadiness  of  direction. 

A  bicycle  with  the  steering  wheel  held  fast  will 
maintain  its  plane  so  long  as  its  momentum  is  not 
overcome.  With  the  steering  wheel  the  plane  of 
movement  may  be  regained  after  each  opposition, 
provided  the  proportionate  amount  of  power  is 
expended. 

The  radius  of  a  wheel  is  the  long  arm  of  a  lever; 
the  pedal  crank  is  the  short  arm  of  the  lever,  though 
its  length  may  exceed  that  of  the  radius  of  the 
wheel. 

Power  and  speed  are  interchangeable.  The  shorter 
the  arm  of  the  crank,  the  greater  the  weight  required 


MECHANICS  OF  BICYCLING. 


i6i 


to  balance  the  long  arm  at  the  rim  of  the  wheel  (an 
imaginary  line).  If  the  pedal  crank  is  lengthened, 
it  will  require  less  power  to  move  it.  At  the  same 
time  the  foot,  following  the  crank,  describes  a  larger 
circle  for  the  distance  travelled  by  the  rear  wheel. 
The  crank  lengthened,  the  power  is  diminished,  de- 
manding increased  exertion  to  follow  it,  the  foot 
travelling  at  a  rate  determined  by  the  distance  to  be 
traversed. 

When  the  hub  rests  on  the  axle  of  the  wheel,  there 
is  considerable  friction  to  overcome  in  the  entire 
length  of  the  hub,  the  friction,  or  ability  of  the 
wheel  to  turn,  depending  on  the  amount  of  axle  sur- 
face. The  axle,  therefore,  becomes  heated  when 
the  air  cannot  readily  reach  the  surface  to  convey 
away  the  heat  generated  by  friction. 

Weight  may  be  balanced  and  supported  on  a  point; 
when  weight  rests  on  a  sphere,  only  a  point  supports 
weight.  By  surrounding  the  axle  with  balls,  the 
weight  is  taken  from  point  to  point  on  each  ball, 
and  a  circulation  of  air  allowed.  The  weight, 
carried  from  ball  to  ball,  gives  the  advantage  of  a 
larger  cooling  surface  in  a  confined  space,  while  the 
weight  and  friction  are  applied  directly  to  a  very 
limited  area.  Each  ball  is  also  an  axle  in  itself,  and 
carries  the  weight,  and  passes  it  on  to  the  next  ball. 
The  balls  act  as  lubricators,  preventing  the  moving 
surfaces  from  contact. 

The  problem  of  speed  produced  by  power  means 
that  speed  is  obtained  at  the  expense  of  power  ex- 
pended. The  relative  size  of  the  sprocket-wheels 
determines  the  relative  speed  of  the  cranks  and  rear 


1 62  BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 

wheel.  To  get  the  greatest  speed  with  the  least 
power  possible  means  diminished  friction  and  les- 
sened weight.  The  band  or  chain  complies  mechan- 
ically with  these  requirements,  permitting  a  certain 
amount  of  play,  which  lessens  the  danger  of  sudden 
strains  and  jars,  and  supplies  the  power  to  the  rear 
wheel  with  the  least  possible  loss  by  friction. 


Gear 

63 

72 

76 

80 

6}4  crank  proportion  4 

11-13  to  I 

5-13  to  I 

5  11-13  to  I 

6  2-13  to 

8  crank            "             3  : 

15-16  to  I 

44^  to  I 

33^  to  I 

5  to 

crank  pressure 

4.85 

5-54 

5.85 

6.15 

8  crank 

3-37 

3-84 

4.5 

5.00 

6Vz  crank  ground  cover- 

ed by  large  wheel 

16  ft. 

19  ft. 

20  ft. 

21  ft. 

8  crank  gronnd  covered 

by  large  wheel  

16  ft. 

19  ft. 

20  ft. 

21  ft. 

crank  ground  covered  by  pedal  40.84  inches 
8  crank         *'  *'  '*        50.26  inches 

'■^Scientific  American  Supplement^  No.  102^1''  August  24,  1895. 

Rating  wheel  by  the  amount  of  progression  for 
each  turn  of  the  crank  (pedal),  the  following  table, 
compiled  by  Henry  Starkweather,  will  be  found  of 

26  in.  wheel. 
No.  teeth  in  small  sprocket. 

6789 

20  ft    17  ft    15  ft    13  ft 

21  ft    18  ft    16  ft    14  ft 

22  ft    19  ft    17  ft    15  ft 
28  inch  wheel. 

22  ft    19  ft    16  ft    14  ft 

23  ft    20  ft    17  ft    15  ft 

24  ft    21  ft    18  ft    16  ft 

The  following  table,  from  the  New  York  Evening 
Post^  shows  the  gear  according  to  the  number  of 
teeth  on  large  and  small  sprocket-wheels: 


advantage: 

No.  teeth  in 
large  Sprocket. 

18 

20 

18 
19 
20 


MECHANICS  OF  B/CVC/JXC. 


•63 


Sprockets  28  in.  wheel 

pedal  crank.  Sprockets  on  rear  wheel. 


7 

8 

9 

68 

53 

18 

72 

63 

56 

19 

76 

66  K 

59 

ao 

80 

70 

62 

21 

84 

73^ 

65 

CHAPTER  XIX, 


Adjustment. 

In  bicycling,  the  word  "adjustment"  means  much, 
for  the  movable  parts  of  the  bicycle  must  be  adjusted 
to  suit  the  requirements  of  the  individual  bicyclist, 
and  the  mechanical  parts  of  the  bicycle's  construc- 
tion adjusted  so  that  they  will  work  together 
properly. 

In  a  machine  properly  adjusted,  the  chain  and 
other  gear  should  run  smoothly,  the  chain  be  neither 
too  tight  nor  too  loose,  and  the  sprocket-wheels 
exactly  in  line.  The  bicycle  wheels  should  run  true 
and  be  exactly  in  line  with  the  frame,  and  the  rear 
wheel  follow  the  identical  plane  of  the  front  wheel 
when  in  place.  The  frame  should  be  true  and  square 
at  all  points,  and  should  be  examined  and  tested 
always  after  the  machine  has  been  travelling  by  rail 
or  has  had  a  fall.  The  bearings  in  all  parts  of  the 
machine  should  have  their  cone-caps  in  place  and  so 
screwed  and  keyed  that  the  balls  run  easily  without 
perceptible  play.  Nuts  and  washers  should  all  be  in 
place  and  screwed  home.  The  handle-bar  should  be 
tight  and  square  with  the  front  wheel,  but  only  tight 
enough  to  turn  the  wheel  on  a  good  surface,  not  so 
tight  as  to  prevent  it  from  turning  easily  if  the 


ADJUSTMENT. 


wheel  is  caught  or  held.  The  proper  adjustment  for 
position  has  to  do  with  the  frame,  wheel-base,  length 
of  crank,  height  and  position  of  saddle;  the  curve, 
width,  height,  and  general  adjustment  of  the  handle- 
bar; the  size  and  number  of  teeth  on  the  sprocket- 
wheels,  which  determines  the  gear;  and  the  weight, 
construction,  and  inflation  of  the  tire. 

The  saddle  is  one  of  the 'most  important,  if  not  the 
most  important,  part  of  the  bicycle  to  study,  as  it 
should  provide  the  fulcrum  to  work  from.  Any  sad- 
dle may  be  adjusted  to  be  comfortable,  but  saddles 
seldom  remain  comfortable  after  being  adjusted. 
The  saddle  should  be  hard  enough  to  act  as  a  ful- 
crum and  should  not  give  or  spring  under  work,  for 
power  is  lost  on  each  stroke  that  presses  down  on  a 
soft  saddle;  it  should  also  permit  of  change  of  posi- 
tion without  readjustment,  unless  it  is  intended  for 
racing  purposes,  for  the  bicyclist  should  be  able  to 
speed,  climb,  or  coast  on  a  saddle  properly  con- 
structed for  general  purposes.  Each  of  these  different 
kinds  of  bicycle  work  requires  a  different  applica- 
tion of  muscular  power,  and  the  saddle  should  per- 
mit of  a  readjustment  of  position  that  will  at  least 
accommodate  the  altered  tendency  caused  by  a 
shifted  centre  of  gravity  in  grade  work. 

Every  individual  is  differently  proportioned,  with 
differing  lever  lengths  and  lever  power.  If  people 
differently  proportioned  find  the  same  adjustment 
possible,  it  would  be  for  the  reason,  not  that  their 
different  requirements  average  the  same,  but  that 
the  average  of  their  different  requirements  is  the 
same.    A  higher  gear  means  greater  resistance;  a 


i66 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


lengthened  crank  causes  the  foot  to  travel  in  a  larger 
circle  while  gaining  in  increased  leverage  in  the 
lengthened  arm. 

In  determining  the  proper  proportion  of  crank 
length  and  gear,  it  may  be  calculated  that  the  same 
amount  of  resistance  may  be  overcome  by  using  a 
higher  gear  and  longer  crank  as  by  using  a  lower 
gear  and  shorter  crank,  the  difference  being  in  the 
rapidity  of  the  stroke  necessar}^  to  cover  a  given  dis- 
tance in  a  certain  length  of  time.  This  adjustment 
may  be  considered  equivalent  to  length  of  pace  and 
rapidity  of  pace  in  w^alking.  It  is  well  to  have  crank 
and  gear  selected  by  some  one  sufficiently  experienced 
to  make  an  intelligent  choice. 

In  the  lever  action  of  the  leg,  working  the  bicycle 
crank,  care  should  be  taken  to  prevent  waste  of 
power  in  carrying  the  foot  back  and  behind,  render- 
ing the  lever  movement  useless  behind  the  line  where 
the  power  may  be  made  to  tell.  This  loss  will  occur 
when  the  saddle  is  placed  too  far  forward.  The 
foot  in  returning  should  supply  the  pull,  and  lift  with 
a  push-back.  The  power  here  gained  cannot  com- 
pensate for  power  lost  on  the  forward  and  down 
thrust,  and  the  saddle  should  be  placed  far  enough 
back  to  permit  of  the  full  power  of  the  forward  push 
and  downward  thrust.  The  knee  should  never  fully 
extend  when  the  pedal  is  pushed  to  the  point  where 
it  is  furthest  from  you,  for  if  it  is,  there  is  danger  in 
hill-climbing  of  straining  the  knee  as  well  as  the  ten- 
dons and  muscles  of  the  back  of  the  leg. 

The  handle-bars  should  be  adapted  to  the  work  to 
be  done,   whether   racing,    touring,   or  ordinary. 


ADJUSTMENT. 


167 


They  certainly  should  not  be  high  enough  toprevsnt 
them  from  taking  part  of  the  weight  of  the  body,  nor 
so  low  as  to  cramp  any  portion  of  the  trunk. 

Fatigue,  with  its  various  manifestations,  cramp, 
stiffness,  and  numbness,  comes  from  too  long  a 
period  of  work  without  change  of  position.  For  this 
reason  different  muscular  combinations  should  be 
called  to  do  the  same  work,  or  different  work  should 
be  done  with  unused  muscular  combinations,  permit- 
ting rest  or  partial  rest  to  muscles  that  have  been 
taxed. 

A  bicycle  should  be  fitted  with  adjustable  handle- 
bar and  saddle-post,  and  in  case  of  fatigue  or  cramp, 
a  slight  change  in  the  adjustment  will  reduce  the 
tendency  at  once.  Travelling  should  be  done  with 
as  little  weight  on  the  saddle  as  possible,  working  on 
the  pedals  and  resting  on  the  handles.  But  when  it 
comes  to  climbing,  the  push  must  be  located  from  a 
fulcrum,  and  that  fulcrum  must  be  the  saddle.  All 
weight  must  be  removed  from  the  handles,  and  the 
wheel  ridden  by  balance. 

A  hill  should  be  coasted  with  the  weight  all  on  the 
saddle,  the  feet  supported,  and  the  handles  held  firm- 
ly and  lightlv,  a  proper  average  position  for  con- 
tinuous worK:  being,  however,  maintained.  To  carry 
weight  forward,  the  weight  should  be  forward  of  the 
centre  of  gravity,  and  the  hands  dropped. 

The  question  of  handle-bars,  with  the  reason  of 
their  many  varying  curves,  may  pertinently  be  dis- 
cussed here.  The  bar  is  a  pair  of  levers  finding  a 
common  fulcrum  in  the  head  or  centre  bar,  and  the 
difference  in  curve  has  to  do  with  the  distribution  of 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


weight  and  the  touch  best  suited  to  control  the  bi- 
cycle according  to  position  and  individual  balance 
and  lever  power.  A  distribution  of  weight  and 
leverage  may  be  made  without  altering  the  wheel 
base  by  the  use  of  a  different  pattern  of  bar  that 
seems  to  suit  the  individual  touch. 

To  analyze  the  curves  in  a  handle-bar,  and  their 
different  lever  values,  would  be  difficult.  Prefer- 
ence has  much  to  do  with  it,  and  this  may  be  ac- 
counted for  by  the  different  steering  touch  of  the 
differently  adjusted  bars.  The  forward  drop  should 
never  be  so  great  that  the  face  cannot  be  lifted  easily 
and  the  eyes  always  able  to  see  up  and  ahead. 

In  the  tire  we  look  for  elasticity,  and  the  amount 
of  air  it  contains  has  much  to  do  with  the  comfort  of 
the  rider  and  the  speed  of  the  wheel.  vSoft  tires  are 
adapted  for  a  rough  or  stony  road.  The  soft  tire  may 
wear  out  a  little  sooner,  but  the  extra  wear  is  fully 
compensated  by  the  gain  in  lessened  shock  and  ap- 
parent improvement  of  wheeling  surface.  A  very 
hard  tire  is  not  necessarily  made  of  rubber.  The 
advantage  of  the  rubber  tire  is  its  elasticity,  which 
should  come  between  the  fulcrum  and  the  power. 

To  attain  a  proper  position  and  its  equivalent  ad- 
justment, first  have  the  saddle  as  nearly  right  as 
possible  so  that  you  can  work  comfortably ;  then  have 
the  handles  and  the  height  of  the  bar  tested,  working 
on  these  until  you  can  determine  if  the  saddle  is  too 
far  forward  or  too  far  back.  Then  change  the  height 
of  the  bars  to  suit  the  saddle. 

Next  attend  to  gear.  Find  if  with  comfort  you 
could  exert  more  pressure  on  the  pedals.    If  so,  have 


ADJUSTMENT, 


169 


the  gear  increased.  If  there  is  cramp  in  the  foot,  or 
the  foot  feels  strained,  have  the  length  of  crank 
changed.  If  the  foot  is  long  in  proportion  to  the 
other  lever  lengths,  lengthen  the  crank  to  permit  of 
freer  instep  play;  or  have  it  shortened  to  relieve  a 
strained  feeling  in  the  foot.  The  crank  length  may 
be  changed  to  relieve  either  cramp  or  strain  in  the 
leg  and  thigh  until  the  pressure  and  length  are  ar- 
ranged to  suit  the  natural  step  or  pace. 

While  these  adjustments  are  in  progress — and  it 
may  take  months  to  determine  them — the  shoe  may 
cause  discomfort.  The  slightest  pressure,  a  shoe  too 
tight  or  ill-fitting,  would  be  responsible  for  much 
more  discomfort  than  could  possibly  be  caused  by 
either  crank  or  gear.  Waist-bands,  or  any  pressure 
on  the  trunk,  Vv'ill  cause  numbness  of  the  foot;  and 
a  saddle  of  imperfect  construction  or  wrong  adjust- 
ment would  be  responsible  for  the  same  evils — un- 
equal pressure  and  unequal  strains  and  overcharged 
blood-vessels,  with  their  accompanying  discomforts 
of  cramp,  fatigue,  numbness,  and  more  permanent 
disorders. 


CHAPTER  XX. 


Exercise. 

How  shall  be  determined  the  proper  amount  of 
exercise  for  any  individual?  The  human  body  is 
constructed  for  use,  and  will  suffer  from  want  of  use, 
rust  out,  as  it  were;  and  it  will  suffer  from  over-use 
if  any  one  set  of  muscles  or  any  one  supply  of  nerve 
power  is  overtaxed. 

Exercise,  in  some  form,  is  necessary  for  every 
one;  work  is  necessary;  recreation  is  necessary. 
Rest  is  to  recreate,  to  renew.  The  food  that  we  eat 
is  digested  and  made  into  blood;  the  blood  flows 
through  the  system  of  tissues,  depositing  building 
material  and  taking  up  waste  matter.  The  arterial 
system,  phj-siologists  tell  us,  supplies  the  new  ma- 
terial; the  venous  system  takes  up  the  waste  material, 
returning  the  blood  to  the  heart,  after  which  the 
fresh  air  comes  in  contact  with  the  blood  in  the  lungs, 
and  is  aerated  and  oxygenated,  and  waste  material 
given  off.  The  heart  pumps  the  blood  through  the 
arterial  and  venous  systems.  When  we  move  or 
work,  more  blood  is  needed,  and  the  heart  pumps 
harder.  When  little  or  no  exercise  is  taken,  the  heart 
loses  its  vigor  from  want  of  use;  and  it  may  be 
strained  if  overtaxed. 


EXERCISE.  171 

Brain  power  and  nerve  power  depend  on  the  blood 
supply  for  renewal  of  their  tissue.  Any  organ  or 
any  combination  of  organs  and  muscles,  when  exer- 
cised, give  off  their  accumulated  material,  and  then, 
after  a  limit  of  assimilation  is  reached,  the  products 
are  reabsorbed.  The  materials  properly  accumulate 
only  when  needed. 

These  facts  bring  to  our  notice  three  conditions — 
a  condition  of  atrophy,  or  too  little  use;  a  perfect 
condition  of  equilibrium  of  forces;  and  a  condition 
of  strain  from  over-work.  In  the  condition  of  equi- 
librium or  perfect  health,  the  brain  is  active  and  the 
muscular  tissue  under  perfect  control.  The  mind 
can  receive  impressions,  and  can  convey  them  at 
will;  and  the  muscles  obey  without  difficulty  and 
without  fatigue,  because  of  the  great  existing  power 
of  resistance.  On  the  power  to  resist  fatigue  depends 
the  power  of  prolonging  exertion. 

In  exercising  we  exert  our  powers,  and  if  from 
lack  of  use  or  other  cause  our  amount  of  stored 
energy  is  small,  exercise  for  even  a  very  short  period 
will  produce  a  condition  which  makes  rest  absolutely 
necessary.  Muscles  must  be  gradually  accustomed 
to  work;  and  if  work  is  prolonged  beyond  the  point 
where  exercise  is  beneficial,  a  state  of  tension  and 
exhaustion  ensues  which  can  be  remedied  only  by 
rest  prolonged  enough  to  allow  the  system  to  recu- 
perate. Where  the  tissues,  from  disuse,  have  come 
to  have  little  resistance  value,  a  very  gradual  and 
persistent  course  of  exercise  must  be  determined 
upon,  for  unaccustomed  muscles  are  quickly 
fatigued,  and  the  subsequent  rest  they  require  may 


172 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


seem  out  of  proportion  to  the  work  done.  This  con- 
dition of  affairs  is  discouraging  when  not  under- 
stood; yet  there  can  be  no  different  result  except 
in  degree;  and  in  degree  must  the  condition  be 
changed  and  the  tissues  gradually  renewed.  If 
there  is  but  little  power  stored,  only  little  may  be 
used  until  the  power  of  assimilation  is  established. 

The  thin  woman  is  benefited  by  bicycling;  the 
liver  works  better,  the  food  digests  better.  The 
stout  woman  is  benefited,  for  the  exercise  hardens 
and  condenses  the  flesh.  The  average  healthy  woman 
is  kept  in  the  best  of  health  by  the  exercise  and 
plenty  of  pure,  fresh  air.  For  the  sedentary,  the 
undeveloped,  and  the  insufficiently  nourished,  the 
bicycle  seems  to  work  wonders.  All  the  powers 
are  accelerated  and  a  general  renewing  of  tissues 
takes  place.  The  organs  of  digestion  are  stimulated 
and  do  better  work,  the  appetite  improves,  the  com- 
plexion brightens,  and  the  mind  responds  readily. 
But  people  of  either  of  these  classes  should  be  care- 
ful not  to  prolong  exercise  until  loss  of  appetite  is 
brought  about;  for  the  exercise  should  tend  to  in- 
crease, not  to  decrease,  the  desire  for  food  and 
power  of  assimilation. 

Baths  should  be  taken  in  moderation,  the  skin  be- 
ing kept  in  free,  healthy  condition  by  dry  rubs  and 
tepid  baths  until  the  system  is  brought  to  the  state 
where  the  cold  bath  can  be  used  beneficially.  The 
diet  should  be  generous  and  wholesome,  and  care 
should  be  taken  to  avoid  food  that  does  not  digest 
easily.  Sufficient  clothing  should  be  worn  but  not 
too  much,  and  all  exercise  should  be  avoided  that 


EXERCISE. 


173 


might  produce  very  copious  perspiration.  Only  a 
healthy  activity  of  the  skin  should  be  induced,  and 
plenty  of  water  drunk. 

Do  not  work  nervously.  Go  to  work  gently,  and 
save  your  energies  to  make  the  wheels  go  around. 
A  thin  person  can  remain  thin  and  a  fat  person  re- 
main fat  while  exercising  assiduously  if  the  exercise 
is  not  properly  directed. 

To  overcome  fat,  persistent,  systematic,  and  regu- 
lar exercise  is  needed,  and  attention  to  diet  must  be 
considered  essential.  For  the  food  consumed  pro- 
duces certain  results;  and  if  the  system  selects  and 
digests  most  readily  the  fat-producing  elements, 
their  amount  should  be  curtailed,  and  a  diet  of  good 
working  quality  chosen.  Fat  is  burned  in  producing 
heat;  but  if  the  same  amount  of  fat-producing  ele- 
ments are  again  taken  into  the  system,  the  same 
amount  of  fat  results.  The  fat-producing  tendency 
must  be  overcome,  and  the  fat  already  accumulated 
consumed,  until  a  good  healthy  average  of  tissue  is 
produced  and  maintained. 

Tea  and  coffee  are  not  foods;  they  retard  the  as- 
similation of  tissue,  and  must  be  eliminated  from 
the  diet  of  the  weight-reducer.  Sugar  and  starch — 
the  latter  when  eaten  is  converted  into  sugar  —  are 
heat-producing  foods,  first  forming  fats  which  are 
used  as  energy-producing  material.  Persons  wishing 
to  reduce  weight,  therefore,  must  manufacture,  not 
so  much  fat,  but  bone  and  sinew.  To  produce  these, 
nitrogenous  foods  must  be  eaten.  Fat  consists 
largely  of  water;  and  heavy  work,  like  hill-climbing, 
which  induces  free  perspiration,  is  desirable.  But 


1/4 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


any  one  wishing  to  seriously  undertake  weight-re- 
duction should  learn  to  enjoy  bicycling  for  itself  be- 
fore attempting  this  application  of  the  exercise. 

Excess  of  fat  produces  physical  laziness,  which  is 
hard  to  overcome;  and  stout  persons,  after  exercise, 
crave  fat-producing  elements  of  food  to  reduce  the 
tissue  consumed.  A  taste  seems  to  develop  for  sweet 
stuff  and  mild  stimulants,  and  it  is  difficult  to  refrain 
from  indulging  it.  Stout  people  are  apt  to  believe, 
also,  that  they  cannot  endure  exercise.  They  cannot 
comfortably,  and  must  work  with  care  until  they  are 
in  a  fair  state  of  balance,  where  exercise  ceases  to 
fatigue,  before  attempting  anything  like  scientific 
weight-reducing.  Sufficient  exercise  regularly  ta- 
ken, proper  diet  persistently  selected,  will  finally 
have  the  desired  effect. 

Exercise  sufficiently  to  produce  good,  thorough 
perspiration;  take  a  bath  and  rub  down,  and  put  on 
fresh  clothing;  avoid  tea  and  coffee,  sugar  and  ice 
cream,  dessert  and  pastry. 

For  those  in  health  and  in  the  habit  of  exercising 
regularly,  there  are  only  the  dangers  of  the  sport  to 
avoid  while  enjoying  its  pleasures  and  benefits. 


CHAPTER  XXL 


Training. 

If  you  intend  a  fifty-mile  or  a  week's  trip  awheel, 
it  will  be  very  necessary  to  accustom  yourself  to  the 
woik  before  attempting  a  distance  you  have  not  yet 
covered.  Suppose,  though  your  muscles  are  unac- 
customed to  long-continued  exercise,  that  you  know 
how  to  wheel  a  bicycle  and  are  anxious  to  go  with 
your  friends.  They  perhaps  wheel  for  an  hour  or 
two  hours  daily,  or  for  several  hours  twice  a  week. 
They  are  afraid  to  take  you  with  them  ;  and  you  feel 
sure  that  you  can  go  as  far  as  they  do,  and  at  the 
same  rate  of  speed. 

You  must  make  your  opportunity  and  prove  your 
ability.  Suppose  you  can  wheel  for  half  an  hour 
without  fatigue.  Wheel  that  half-hour  every  day 
the  weather  permits;  know  your  distance  and  5^our 
road;  arid  then  practise  increasing  speed,  that  is,  do 
your  distance  in  less  than  the  half-hour  without 
hurry.  Start  slowly,  and  keep  the  pace  until  you 
get  your  breathing  apparatus  steady;  then  ride  fast- 
er, and  maintain  that  pace;  and  so  on,  in  increasing 
ratio.  If  you  have  been  in  the  habit  of  covering 
your  distance  in  five  minutes  under  the  half-hour, 
next  time  add  that  distance  to  your  spin,  and  do  it 


176 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


in  your  limit  time.  When  you  easily  do  five  miles 
in  half  an  hour  on  the  road,  add  a  mile  or  more  for 
the  next  two  or  three  spins;  then  do  not  wheel  for 
one  day;  the  next  day  wheel  twice  the  distance, 
wheel  eight  miles,  and  rest  a  day.  Then  double 
your  distance  again.  If  you  cannot  do  this  without 
feeling  the  effects  seriously,  go  back  to  w^here  you 
made  your  greatest  distance  with  ease,  and  start 
from  that  point  again. 

Keep  a  careful  record  of  your  outings,  dates,  wind, 
sun,  time  of  day,  and  humidity.  The  latter  is  very 
important,  for  on  a  hot,  dry  day,  greater  distance 
can  be  done  with  safety  than  when  evaporation  is 
slow.  Consider  all  the  conditions  when  you  find 
that  you  are  fatigued,  and  decide  if  the  trouble  is 
with  yourself  or  with  the  weather.  Do  not  start  for 
at  least  an  hour  after  eating,  and  always  rest  after 
exercise  before  taking  a  meal.  Observing  these  di- 
rections, you  will  soon  find  that  you  are  making  very 
fair  progress,  that  your  confidence  is  assured,  and 
that  you  have  acquired  a  certain  amount  of  endurance, 
and  can  attempt  any  reasonable  distance. 

Exercise  transforms,  making  the  inactive  capable 
of  performing  work  and  of  enjoying  opportunities 
for  using  their  newly  discovered  powers.  The  weak 
are  strengthened;  the  strong  retain  and  renew  their 
stores  of  strength;  the  young  are  symmetrically  de- 
veloped, and  the  older  remain  supple  and  active. 
Exercise  preserves  and  develops  all  parts  of  the  or- 
ganism that  are  capable  of  performing  work.  Exer- 
cise is  work,  muscular  work;  and  in  working  the 
muscles,  all  the  tissues  become  readjusted,  and  all 


TRAIN  INC. 


177 


materials  and  accumulations  tending  to  hinder 
movement  are  diminished  in  quantity  and  equalized 
in  distribution. 

Ease  of  movement  and  a  state  of  muscular  inactiv- 
ity are  incompatible.  To  be  active,  one  must  work ; 
and  the  whole  organism  will  respond,  and  adjust  it- 
self to  the  conditions  imposed  by  occupation  and 
manner  of  living.  The  complicated  mechanisms 
and  intricate  processes  of  the  human  body  adapt 
themselves  to  required  conditions;  it  is  only  neces- 
sary to  determine  what  those  conditions  shall  be  to 
produce  certain  results. 

It  is  difficult  for  some  to  overcome  the  tendency 
to  a  state  of  inactivity ;  and  there  are  others  to  whom 
even  the  contemplation  of  repose  is  distasteful. 
The  physiological  effects  produced  by  exercise  differ 
in  different  individuals,  active  persons  and  those 
not  in  the  habit  of  doing  muscular  work  being  ver}^ 
differently  affected.  For  exercise,  of  whatever  kind, 
is  muscular  work,  and ''muscular  work  tends  to  mod- 
ify the  nutrition  of  all  motor  organs  and  to  give  them 
a  structure  favorable  for  the  performance  of  work." 

All  muscular  work  is  done  through  the  contractile 
power  of  the  muscles.  By  use  the  fibres  become 
freed  from  fat  and  other  accumulations,  the  muscles 
increase  in  size,  the  contractile  power  becomes  great- 
er, and  the  impedimenta  of  fat,  etc.,  are  removed  by 
the  processes  that  are  accelerated  by  movement. 
"Repose  causes  atrophy  of  muscular  tissue,  "  and  the 
necessary  discernment  and  powers  of  discrimination 
must  be  cultivated  to  avoid  a  tendency  either  in  the 
direction  of  over-doing  or  of  insufficient  exercise. 


178 


BICYCLING  I' OR  LADIES. 


''The  effect  of  muscular  exercise  is  to  render  vital 
combustion  more  active;  it  causes  more  active  pro- 
cesses of  assimilation."  "Muscular education  leads 
to  an  economy  of  forces.  Practice  leads  to  a  diminu- 
tion of  muscular  expenditure" — more-work  done  for 
power  expended.  For  the  power  to  perform  work 
depends  on  knowing  how  to  do  it  properly.  Real 
strength  lies,  not  so  much  in  the  mass  of  muscular 
tissue  as  in  the  ability  to  use  it. 

"Exercise  of  strength  demands  the  simultaneous 
action  of  a  great  number  of  muscles."  "Exercise 
of  speed  involves  repetition  of  movement  and  the 
application  of  nervous  energy."  "Exercises  of  en- 
durance permit  of  economy  of  fatigue,"  and  are 
characterized  by  the  necessity  of  perfect  equilibrium 
between  muscular  effort  and  the  powers  of  assimila- 
tion of  the  system. 

In  exercise  of  strength,  every  muscle  should  bring 
its  whole  force  into  play,  and  the  bony  structure  is 
united  by  pressure  to  make  a  rigid  whole.  "Exer- 
cises of  speed  are  accompanied  by  fatigue  out  of 
proportion  to  the  mechanical  work  represented." 
"Every  movement  needs  the  intervention  of  a  g^eat 
number  of  muscles;  each  muscle  must  contract  with 
definite  force  in  order  that  the  whole  work  may  lead 
to  definite  movement." 

Co-ordination  is  the  operation  of  choosing  the 
muscles  which  shall  participate  in  a  certain  move- 
ment and  of  regulating  the  exact  quantity  of  nervous 
energy  necessary  to  produce  the  right  amount  of 
contraction.  Automatism  is  acquired  by  practice; 
and  the  muscles  must  be  exercised  regularly  to  en- 


TRAINING. 


179 


able  them  to  respond  intuitively.  A  complicated 
series  of  movement  can  only  be  acquired  gradually, 
unless  the  mind  has  a  large  number  of  muscular 
combinations  at  command. 

"Exhaustion  will  result  from  overwork  even  when 
well  fed.  "  ''Exercises  of  endurance  do  not  disturb 
the  working-  of  tne  organs;  while  increasing  their 
activity,  it  gives  to  the  system  the  power  to  repair 
wasted  tissue,  even  during  work."  Carbonic  acid  is 
not^formed  in  excess,  and  is  eliminated  without  pro- 
ducing noticeable  results. 

The  bicyclist,  even  though  indulging  moderately 
in  the  pastime,  must  consider  these  things,  and  de- 
termine the  course  to  be  pursued;  otherwise  the 
exercise  will  prove  a  bane  instead  of  a  blessing. 
There  are  principles  capable  of  general  or  special 
application;  and  there  are  special  laws  that  maybe 
generalized;  and  all  may  be  made  to  accord  with 
the  exercise  of  bicycling,  but  each  individual  must 
accept  a  certain  responsibility  in  the  matter.  The 
bicycle  having  been  accepted  as  a  means,  the  end 
sought  for  can  be  attained  only  by  its  intelligent  use 
and  application. 

One  of  the  many  advantages  of  cycling  is  that  the 
exercise  involved  is  not  limited  to  the  use  of  any  one 
set  of  muscles.  The  legs  propel  the  machine,  the 
muscles  of  the  trunk  engage  in  balancing  the  body, 
and  the  arms  are  employed  in  steering  and  control- 
ling the  front  wheel.  All  the  larger  joints  are  active, 
and  are  made  supple  as  well  as  strengthened  and  de- 
veloped. Muscles,  unless  directed  by  mental  effort, 
are  useless.    The  bones  give  stiffness,  and  act  as 


B/CYC/.IXC  FOR  J.ADlllS. 


levers  and  fulcrums;  the  muscles  are  tools  of  the 
mind,  levels  wherewith  to  pull  and  push  the  bones 
into  position. 

Precision  of  movement  means  economy  of  expen- 
diture of  force,  no  more  effort  being  expended  than 
is  necessary  for  the  act  of  the  moment.  People  who 
hunt  for  the  pedal,  and  try  for  the  saddle  two  or 
three  times,  and  fall  off  because  the  bicycle  fails  to 
start,  work  hard  enough  to  have  mounted  a  number 
of  times;  that  is,  they  have  lifted  or  supported  their 
own  weight  in  different  directions  a  number  of  times 
without  attaining  their  object.  They  appear  to  be 
awkward;  they  are  really  unaccustomed  to  their 
work.  Practice  will  accustom  the  muscles  to  the 
work  they  have  to  do. 

Try  to  do  one  thing  only  at  a  time.  If  it  is  mount- 
ing, for  instance,  memorize  each  thing  that  must  be 
done;  how,  when,  and  where  to  doit.  Do  not  think, 
because  the  mind  does  not  at  once  grasp  all  that  is 
forced  upon  its  attention,  that  your  brain  is  of  infe- 
rior quality ;  it  may  not  be  able  to  adapt  itself  to  that 
particular  mental  process  at  that  minute.  But  the 
effort  made  will  result  in  added  tissue,  and  next  time 
there  will  be  more  hope  of  success.  Increase  by  a 
little  at  a  time  the  amount  of  exercise  undertaken. 
You  can  gauge  the  practice  you  need  only  by  the 
amount  of  attention  you  give  to  the  subject.  After 
muscles  are  once  trained  to  an  exercise,  the  mind 
will  not  readily  lose  power  to  reproduce  the  combi- 
nation, and  experience  begins  to  help. 

Endurance  means  well-directed  strength  as  well  as 
capacity  of  power  stored  in  reserve ;  and  the  aim  of 


TRAINIXC. 


i8i 


all  athletic  work  is  to  give  an  increased  store  of 
strength,  vitality,  and  power  to  draw  upon,  not 
merely  to  expend  the  stock  already  on  hand. 

The  muscular  development  that  comes  with  bicy- 
cle exercise  will  often  cause  surprise.  In  persons 
unaccustomed  to  active  exercise,  the  increase  is  most 
noticeable  on  the  chest  and  forearms,  the  chest  de- 
velopment increasing  two  and  three  inches,  the 
arm  and  forearm  in  proportion,  and  the  whole  mus- 
cular system  gaining  in  firmness  and  tone.  Persist- 
ent bicycling,  prolonged  exercise  on  the  wheel,  speed 
work  on  the  track,  develop »  disproportionately  the 
muscle  of  the  leg.  The  track-man,  therefore,  pre- 
pares for  his  season  of  work,  not  by  exercising  and 
developing  his  legs,  but  by  general  exercise  and 
special  work  that  will  develop  the  arms  and  back  and 
other  sets  of  muscles  not  called  upon  for  heavy  work 
during  the  season  when  he  is  to  do  his  best.  Get- 
ting up  speed,  increasing  speed,  and  hill-climbing 
all  tend  to  develop  the  muscles  of  the  leg,  which  in 
such  exercise  are  called  upon  for  the  heavy  work  of 
push  and  thrust,  using  a  concentrated  power  to  pro- 
pel. Light  dumbbell  work  is  recommended  as  a 
good  alternate  for  bicycle  work  and  a  means  of  keep- 
ing the  muscular  system  in  balance. 

Leisure  and  the  weather  limit  bicycling;  other 
causes  are  incidental.  The  weather,  indeed,  affects  bi- 
cycling more  than  any  other  sport.  One  of  the  most 
imperative  needs  of  bicycling  is  rapid  evaporation, 
and  conditions  that  do  not  permit  of  that  are  unfavor- 
able. Observe  atmospheric  conditions,  therefore,  and 
avoid  severe  work  when  the  dew  point  is  approached. 


l82 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


All  the  hard  work  wanted  can  be  accomplished  in 
half  an  hour  after  the  wheel  has  been  taken  out;  or 
it  may  be  used  as  a  vehicle  for  travelling  steadily 
hour  after  hour  for  days  consecutively;  or  an  invig- 
orating spin  of  two  or  three  hours  may  be  taken, 
regulating  the  pace  and  the  work.  One  of  the  things 
to  know  about  a  bicycle  is  that  you  can  get  almost 
any  kind  of  work  you  want  out  of  it.  To  realize 
that  you  are  doing  the  work  you  have  been  ac- 
customed to  have  a  horse  do  for  you,  and  in  a  simi- 
lar way,  and  to  know  that  many  of  a  horseman's 
rules  for  the  care  of  their  working  animals  may  be 
equally  well  applied  to  human  beings  who  do  the 
same  work,  is  apt,  perhaps,  to  cause  a  sensation  of 
unpleasant  surprise.  It  is  a  fact,  however,  that 
there  is  much  information  about  the  care  of  horses 
that  the  cyclist  may  study  and  apply  with  advan- 
tage. 

The  bicycle  is  not  an  iron  horse;  it  is  more  like 
skates;  is  in  some  things  like  a  boat;  in  some  like 
a  coasting  sled;  and  in  many  ways  is  different  from 
anything  else.  It  seems  alive  at  times,  as  does  a 
boat;  but  it  is  the  power  propelling  it  that  causes 
the  delusion.  The  only  thing  alive  about  bicycles 
is  the  persons  who  propel  them;  and  if  they  are  only 
half  alive  before  attempting  to  mount,  they  will  be- 
come very  alert  and  keenly  appreciative  of  all  that 
concerns  them  long  before  the  sport  has  ceased  to  be 
a  novelty. 

''Exercise  is  important  as  a  regulator  of  nutri- 
tion." "The  best  athletic  exercise  for  increasing 
the  size  of  the  chest  is  that  which  compels  the  deep- 


TRAINING. 


'83 


est  inspiration."  The  lower  limbs,  with  their  mass- 
es of  muscular  tissue,  are  most  capable  of  awakening 
the  respiratory  need  which  is  proportioned  to  the 
expenditure  of  force.  Exercise  induces  change  of 
shape  as  well  as  change  of  size;  and  too  much  exer- 
cise of  any  one  kind  will  produce  a  local  effect. 

Breathlessness  is  not  the  only  form  of  fatigue, 
and  fats  are  not  the  only  reserve  material.  Nitro- 
genous products  of  combustion,  which  cannot  be 
derived  from  fatty  substances,  are  produced  by 
work;  and  these  are  stored  among  the  reserve  mate- 
rial, and  produce  stiffness,  as  fat  produces  breath- 
lessness. 

In  no  other  sport  is  the  blood  sent  coursing 
through  the  veins  in  the  same  way  as  in  bicycling; 
and  as  there  is  not  a  very  great  quantity  of  that 
wonderful  fluid  passing  and  repassing  through  the 
circulatory  system,  any  obstruction  or  pressure  is 
instantly  felt  and  provided  for.  To  avoid  giving 
nature  unnecessary  trouble  in  providing  for  inter- 
rupted or  unequal  circulation,  not  even  a  glove  that 
is  the  least  tight  should  be  worn;  indeed,  the  cover- 
ing of  head,  hands,  and  feet  should  be  carefully  se- 
lected. And  the  same  precaution  should  be  exercised 
with  regard  to  all  clothing.  No  tight  underwear 
should  be  worn,  and  nothing  like  equestrian  tights, 
which  interfere  with  surface  circulation.  The  waist 
and  lower  ribs  must  be  kept  free.  You  should  never 
ride  so  hard  as  to  allow  the  air  to  force  the  ribs  out 
and  in,  so  that  you  cannot  control  them.  It  is  a 
good  rule  not  to  ride  so  hard  that  you  cannot  hold 
your  breath  at  pleasure. 


1^4  BICYCLIXG  FOR  LADIES. 

It  is  important  always  to  remove  perspiration  be- 
fore cooling;  therefore,  take  a  bath  at  once  on  com- 
ing in  from  a  ride ;  if  you  cannot  do  that,  rub  off  with 
a  dry  towel,  or  sponge  with  tepid  water,  and  rub  dry 
gently;  then  put  on  dry  underclothing.  The  cold 
bath  is  most  invigorating  and  refreshing,  and  never 
more  refreshing  than  after  bicycle  exercise;  but  all 
cannot  use  it  wnth  good  results.  Provide  for  your 
change  of  underclothing  before  starting  out,  and  if 
you  do  not  intend  to  return,  take  it  with  you. 

Remember  always  that  it  is  essential  to  provide 
an  entire  covering  for  the  body  that  will  admit  of 
free  exhalations,  and  warm  enough  to  prevent  chill- 
ing under  all  circumstances.  While  riding,  provided 
the  condensing  moisture  is  allowed  to  escape,  it  is 
quite  possible  to  feel  overheated,  yet  the  skin  must 
be  protected  from  chill  resulting  from  rapid  motion 
through  the  air.  Air  pressure  and  evaporation  near- 
ly balance  each  other,  and  the  extra  heat  caused  by 
exertion  is  tempered  by  moisture  and  the  constant 
fanning  of  rapid  locomotion.  These  effects  a^e  most 
appreciably  felt  upon  halting.  If  the  covering  is 
thin,  of  light  weight,  and  of  too  hard  a  texture  to 
admit  of  quick  passage  of  air  and  steam,  the  garments 
at  once  become  saturated  with  moisture,  and  a  seri- 
ous chilling  follows.  Even  if  the  halt  be  but  short, 
it  will  be  found  that  an  appreciable  time  passes  after 
remounting  before  one  becomes  warm,  and  the  dis- 
taste for  work  that  follows  is  a  sure  indication  that 
something  is  amiss.  If  energy  were  preserved,  in- 
stead of  wasted  in  warming  up  after  halting,  the 
benefit  of  the  rest  would  be  felt. 


7A\l/X/XG. 


185 


A  proper  porous  material  should  be  always  worn. 
With  a  flannel  shirt-waist  and  woollen  sweater,  even 
in  quite  warm  weather,  riding  is  not  at  all  uncom- 
fortable; but  substitute  a  Holland  linen  coat  for  the 
sweater,  and  the  rider  will  be  first  very  warm,  and 
then  very  damp  indeed  and  most  uncomfortable. 
Nature  provides  various  means  for  keeping  the  body 
at  an  even  temperature,  and  it  is  most  essential  not 
to  disturb  this  balance.  While  working,  heat  is 
generated,  the  skin  becomes  moist,  and  a  normal 
temperature  is  maintained  by  the  rapid  evaporation. 
Too  little  covering  means  too  great  evaporation  and 
lowering  of  temperature;  and  even  if  no  chill  is 
experienced,  the  too  rapid  cooling  TJrevents  good 
working  results,  and  stiffness  is  apt  to  set  in  wnth 
fatigue  after  the  day's  work,  and  a  languid,  sleepy 
feeling  on  the  day  following. 

Too  much  stress  cannot  be  laid  on  the  necessity 
of  being  able  easily  and  expeditiously  to  adjust  or 
redistribute  the  clothing.  Flannel  is  a  good  non- 
conductor of  heat,  but  the  bicyclist  must  use  dis- 
crimination in  selection.  Too  heavy  flannel  will 
induce  a  copious  and  weakening  perspiration;  in- 
sufficient clothing  will  allow  the  body  to  be  chilled 
by  too  rapid  evaporation. 

One  of  the  greatest  benefits  to  be  derived  from 
bicycle  exercise  is  the  free,  healthy  action  of  the 
skin  that  is  induced.  If  this  activity  is  retarded  by 
pressure,  much  injury  may  be  done  by  the  holding 
and  reabsorbing  of  waste  matter.  This  reabsorbed 
matter,  which  is  a  direct  poison  and  must  be  worked 
off  again  in  the  complexities  of  the  system,  causes 


i86 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


languor  and  headache  and  a  feeling  that  exercise  is 
of  no  benefit,  as  indeed  it  is  not  if  proper  hygienic 
laws  are  not  complied  with. 

While  in  the  open  air,  there  is  little  danger  to  be 
apprehended  from  damp  clothing,  as  oxidation  is 
going  on  freely.  It  is  under  shelter  that  danger 
lurks,  where  the  air  does  not  circulate  freely.  The 
underwear  should  be  changed  before  eating,  or  the 
food  will  do  little  good.  Where  you  can  get  shelter, 
you  can  usually  find  conveniences  for  making  the 
change;  otherwise,  it  is  better  to  eat  in  the  open  air. 

Digestion  involves  muscular  action  as  well  as 
chemical  processes.  Wherever  in  the  system  mus- 
cular work  is  being  done,  the  blood  is  needed  in  large 
quantity  to  enable  the  muscular  processes  to  con- 
tinue. In  the  process  of  digestion  important  chem- 
ical work  is  accomplished  by  the  action  of  certain 
juices  or  secretions  of  the  stomach,  and  rhythmical 
muscular  work  in  the  walls  and  coatings  of  the 
stomach  is  required  to  regulate  their  supply.  It  may 
be  easily  understood,  therefore,  that  digestion  should 
be  properly  or  rather  uninterruptedly  accomplished, 
and  it  cannot  be  thus  properly  accomplished  if  too 
much  of  the  blood  supply  is  called  away  in  the  earlier 
stages  of  assimilation. 

Active  muscular  work  should  never  be  undertaken 
immediately  after  a  full  meal.  The  more  food 
there  is  to  be  digested,  the  more  work  there  is  to  be 
done,  the  less  capable  is  the  rest  of  the  system  for 
severe  work.  Such  work,  after  eating  heavily, 
would  involve  an  interruption,  almost  a  suspension, 
of  digestive  processes,  and  a  consequent  difficulty 


TRAINING. 


187 


in  the  adjustment  of  the  processes  involved  in  mus- 
cular work.  It  would  mean  a  much  longer  time  to 
get  the  second  wind,  inability  to  do  hard  or  heavy 
work,  as  well  as  inability  to  prolong  the  work  with- 
out discomfort.  Such  a  course  of  action  must  lead 
to  serious  complications  and  derangements  of  the 
digestive  functions  and  eventually  induce  liability 
to  disease. 

It  is  very  injurious,  also,  to  attempt  to  perform 
heavy  work  fasting,  or  to  prolong  the  period  of  ex- 
ercise when  food  or  rest  is  required.  The  human 
machine  requires  a  certain  amount  of  fuel,  and  the 
supply  must  be  taken  at  regular  intervals,  or  re- 
served material,  which  is  too  valuable  to  be  reckless- 
ly expended,  will  be  consumed. 

A  mixed  diet,  with  plenty  of  variety,  is  the  best 
to  work  on,  everything  to  be  thoroughly  cooked. 
Three  good  meals  a  day,  and  no  eating  between 
meals;  though,  when  tired,  it  is  not  well  to  work  on 
an  empty  stomach,  and  if  you  are  delayed  it  is  better 
to  eat  something  while  waiting  than  to  go  too  long 
without  eating.  Beef  and  mutton  are  always  good 
food;  and  fresh  vegetables,  fruit,  milk  and  eggs, 
and  cereals  either  with  cream  and  sugar  or  milk  and 
sugar.  Simple  desserts  are  not  harmful,  neither  are 
they  necessary. 

The  so-called  sustaining  power  of  stimulants 
merely  enables  one  to  burn  up  reserve  tissue,  to  use 
up  more  fuel,  to  produce  more  power.  Work  done 
under  such  conditions  is  forced  work,  like  the  forced 
draught  of  a  steam-engine  using  power  to  force  the 
air  into  the  furnace.    In  both  cases,  intense  heat 


i88 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


and  great  power  can  be  produced,  and  corresponding 
radiation  and  depression  occur  while  the  system  is 
undergoing  its  processes  of  restoration.  Tea,  coffee, 
bouillon,  are  stimulating,  and  good  as  food  accesso- 
ries; but  they  are  not  good  to  work  on. 


CHAPTER  XXI 1. 
Breathlessness;  The  Limit  Mechanical, 

Seated  awheel,  the  bicyclist  feels  master  of  the 
situation.  The  bicycle  obeys  the  slightest  impulse, 
moving  at  will,  almost  without  conscious  effort,  vir- 
tually as  much  a  part  of  the  rider,  and  as  easily 
under  control,  as  hand  or  foot.  It  is  because  weight 
is  supported  and  friction  overcome  that  the  bicy- 
clist loses  consciousness  of  effort  as  he  moves,  with 
seemingly  no  limit  to  endurance. 

A  trouble  often  experienced  is  breathlessness. 
For  this  there  are  several  causes.  Sometimes  the 
machine  is  started  too  hurriedly  and  before  the  pro- 
cesses of  the  body  have  had  time  to  adjust  themselves. 
To  work  easily,  the  muscles  must  be  heated  gradual- 
ly, until  they  are  brought  to  the  proper  point  of  ten- 
sion. Again,  the  easy  movement  of  the  wheel  often 
causes  the  cyclist  to  become  oblivious  of  the  fact  that 
the  muscles  are  working  quickly  w^hile  doing  easy 
work,  that  the  power  applied  is  being  converted  into 
speed  with  little  appreciable  effort,  until  suddenly 
his  breath  becomes  labored,  and  a  halt  must  be  made 
for  rest.  We  need  not  attempt  here  to  give  the 
figures  for  power  expended  and  work  done,  though 
both  factors  may  be  estimated. 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


Technically,  effort  is  a  physiological  condition  in- 
volving complicated  chemical  changes  and  concen- 
tration of  power.  The  work  of  the  lungs  is  done 
mechanically,  automatically,  is  muscular  work,  in- 
volving chemical  changes  and  giving  chemical  re- 
sults. We  breathe  in  air  full  of  oxygen;  we  exhale 
air  loaded  with  carbonic  acid.  Muscular  effort  pro- 
duces carbonic  acid  through  chemical  changes  in  the 
tissues  of  the  body.  The  oxygen  of  the  air,  taken 
into  the  lungs  to  purify  the  blood,  is  absorbed  and 
stored.  Easy  muscular  movements  give  off  a  limited 
quantity  of  carbonic  acid  and  other  products,  but  not 
more  than  can  be  eliminated  without  readjustment 
of  processes.  When  a  succession  of  efforts  is  made, 
involving  the  manufacture  of  larger  quantities  of 
carbonic  acid,  the  eliminating  capacity  is  correspond- 
ingly taxed. 

In  making  an  effort,  the  lungs  become  momen- 
tarily fixed,  and  their  regular  respiratory  movement 
is  suspended.  Carbonic  acid  is  held,  not  given  off, 
and  a  feeling  of  suffocation  is  observed.  Unless  res- 
piration is  restored  by  a  pause,  poisoning  by  the 
waste  products  ensues,  they  being  reabsorbed,  and 
inducing  discomfort  and  fatigue.  Working  with 
effort,  the  lungs  should  be  free  to  expand  and 
contract.  To  this  end  it  is  all-important  to  exhale, 
expelling  the  air  from  the  lungs  by  compression 
of  the  chest  after  severe  exertion.  Air  rushes 
naturally  into  the  chest  cavity;  attention,  there- 
fore, should  be  directed,  not  to  getting  in  air, 
but  to  expelling  the  air  already  in  the  lungs.  This 
successfully    done    assists  materially  in  bringing 


BREA  THLESSNESS;  LIMIT  MECIIA  NIC  A  I.  191 


about  that  desirable  condition  known  as  "second 
wind,"  and  gives  control  over  the  muscles  of  the 
chest,  which  enables  waste  products  to  be  readily 
eliminated. 

The  intensity  of  breathlessness  during  exercise 
is  in  direct  proportion  to  the  expenditure  of  force 
demanded  by  the  exercise  in  a  given  time, ' '  Breath- 
lessness is  due  to  power  expended  in  a  limited  time. 
This,  at  least,  is  one  of  the  inducing  causes.  On 
the  bicycle,  power  is  converted  into  speed.  In  hill- 
climbing,  shortness  of  wind  is  due  not  so  much  to 
position  on  the  wheel  as  to  the  amount  of  power  ex- 
pended in  doing  the  work.  If  power  is  wasted,  the 
work  attempted  is  usually  not  accomplished;  if  in- 
telligently expended,  the  work  is  done  easily  and  well, 
leaving  the  bicyclist  in  condition  to  renew  the  effort 
when  necessary. 

Hill-climbing  is  like  stair-climbing ;  power  is  ex- 
pended in  a  succession  of  efforts  made  in  raising  the 
weight  on  an  ascending  plane.  The  weight  must 
be  lifted,  either  pushed  up  or  pulled  up,  and  the  res- 
piratory need  is  increased.  The  hill-climber  must 
aim  to  mount  with  as  little  effort  as  possible  and  to 
make  the  ascent  with  the  minimum  expenditure  of 
power. 

Rapidly  increased  heart-beat  is  accompanied  by 
deeply  inflated  lungs  and  a  tendency  the  bicyclist 
should  guard  against  to  work  open-mouthed.  Here 
the  question  of  tight  clothing  comes  prominently 
forward.  Sitting  erect  and  holding  by  the  handle- 
bars, the  bicyclist's  upper  chest  muscles  are  held 
comparatively  fixed  or  rigid;  the  arms,  being  used 


192 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


for  support,  act  as  levers  holding  down  the  upward 
expansion  of  the  chest.  The  air,  being  compressed, 
is  forced  laterally  and  downward.  The  downward, 
expansion  of  the  chest  is  checked  by  the  movement 
of  pedaling,  there  being  a  constant  upward  pressure 
in  the  ascending  stroke  and  an  increased  muscular 
compression  in  the  descending  stroke.  With  a  tight 
belt,  the  breathing  is  chiefly  upward,  and  downward 
when  sitting  or  walking,  the  lateral  expansion  de- 
pending on  the  width  and  compression  of  the  belt. 

When  working  on  a  bicycle,  with  the  hands  fixed 
and  holding  hard,  the  upper  chest  is  comparatively 
rigid,  the  muscles  below  the  diaphragm  hard  at 
work;  and  muscles  at  work  do  not  admit  of  compres- 
sion, which  prevents  the  diaphragm  from  moving 
downward.  The  diaphragm  is  a  muscular  wall, 
stretched  across  the  trunk  below  the  lung  cavity  and 
near  the  waist-line.  If  the  lower  muscles  of  the 
trunk  are  actively  at  work,  the  diaphragm  can  be 
distended  but  a  little  way  in  a  downward  direction 
by  lung  pressure.  The  air  in  the  lungs,  which  are 
hard  at  work,  and  over-full,  presses  against  the  heart, 
and  makes  harder  work  for  that  organ.  When  the 
lungs  are  distended,  any  clothing  that  can  be  felt 
about  the  waist  exerts  more  or  less  pressure.  The 
lungs  of  a  bicyclist  at  work  are  constantly  distended, 
seldom  deflated,  and  an  equal  pressure  is  exerted  in 
all  directions.  The  diaphragm  is  forced  downward, 
pressure  comes  on  the  large  blood-vessels,  and  the 
legs  feel  tired  as  one  of  the  results  of  the  constric- 
tion. Pressure  on  the  heart  and  the  large  blood 
vessels  of  the  lung  cavity  causes  rush  of  blood  to  the 


BREA  rilLE  SSNE  SS;  LI  MI  T  ME  CI/ A  NIC  A  L.  193 

head  and  gives  a  lieated  look  to  the  face  and  a  feel- 
ing of  faintness  and  headache. 

The  muscles  of  the  waist  are  elastic,  but  lose  their 
elasticity  when  not  in  use.  Fat  accumulates,  and  is 
pressed  down,  usually  below  the  belt,  causing  the 
muscles  of  the  figure  to  sag  and  the  trunk  to  lose  its 
proper  lines.  Compression  of  the  waist  while  cy- 
cling is  dangerous,  and  will  cause  enlargement  of 
the  hips  and  distort  the  lines  of  the  figure  below  and 
above  the  waist.  If  tight  clothing  must  be  worn, 
do  not  wear  it  while  exercising  any  rnore  than  while 
sleeping. 

Bicycling  is  a  great  equalizer  of  tissue.  The  sys- 
tem, when  this  exercise  is  moderately  indulged,  is 
freshened  as  is  a  city  by  a  heavy  rain,  all  accumula- 
tions and  deposits  being  swept  away. 

There  is  a  difference,  a  very  great  difference, 
between  muscular  fatigue  and  breathlessness,  and 
the  two  conditions  should  not  be  confused.  Breath- 
lessness is  general  fatigue;  muscular  fatigue  is 
fatigue  localized.  When  you  are  breathless,  all  your 
muscles  are  tired;  they  do  not  want  to  work  and  are 
indeed  incapable  of  performing  work.  Work  per- 
formed by  the  lower  limbs  causes  breathlessness 
more  quickly  than  any  other  kind  of  exertion,  and 
the  bicyclist  must  bear  this  fact  in  mind.  The  res- 
piratory need  is  increased  in  proportion  to  the 
amount  of  carbonic  acid  in  the  blood.  The  lower 
limbs  can  perform  a  great  deal  of  work  in  a  few 
seconds,  the  large  masses  of  muscle  in  the  legs  at 
work  throwing  large  quantities  of  carbonic  acid  into 
the  blood  to  be  given  o£E  or  eliminated  by  the  lungs. 


194  BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 

Each  individual  has  his  own  limit  or  pace,  at 
which  he  can  do  work  most  easily.  If  this  pace  is 
exceeded,  effort  follows  and  increased  expenditure 
of  power;  a  greater  quantity  of  carbonic  acid  is  pro- 
duced to  be  given  off;  and  fatigue  is  induced  sooner 
than  when  working  at  the  pace  which  can  be  kept 
without  extraordinary  exertion.  Every  bicyclist 
knows  his  own  natural  pace,  and  when  departing 
from  that  must  expect  to  be  winded  sooner  or  later. 

Rapid  work  on  the  bicycle  is  similar,  as  muscular 
exertion,  to  running,  racing,  speeding,  and  sprinting. 
Here  we  have  the  time  limit, — great  speed  pro- 
duced in  a  short  time;  tissue  consumed,  and  carbon- 
ic acid  produced  in  large  quantities  to  be  quickly 
eliminated.  Increased  effort  means  more  power  ex- 
pended. The  fixed  lung  cavity  means  lessened 
capacity  for  increased  air-consumption  and  greatly 
lessened  means  of  inhaling  and  expelling  air.  One 
of  the  effects  produced  by  carbonic  acid  in  the  blood 
is  a  stimulation  to  increased  effort,  which  causes  a 
desire  to  prolong  work  after  reasonable  limits  have 
been  exceeded,  a  feeling  that  more  must  be  done, 
rather  than  a  desire  to  stop  and  rest. 

Second  wind  is  the  condition  produced  by  the  ad- 
justment of  the  processes  of  the  body  to  the  new 
state  of  exertion,  where  the  heart  and  lungs  balance 
and  work  according  to  the  demands  of  the  new  con- 
dition. A  pendulum,  slipped  on  its  spindle  and  let 
go,  swings  irregularly  until  it  finds  its  new  rhythm. 
The  rhythm  that  corresponds  with  its  weight,  mo- 
mentum and  length  of  spindle,  leverage,  is  the 
rhythm  of    the  work.    All   repeated  work  has  a 


BREATHLESSMESS;  LIMIT  MECHANICAL.  195 


rhythm,  and  the  movement  disturbed  requires  a 
little  time  for  readjustment.  The  heart  and  lungs 
work  automatically  and  rhythmically,  and  any  new 
movement  disturbs  their  rhythm,  which  must  be  ad- 
justed for  change  of  occupation  or  exercise  until  the 
balance  of  the  working  functions  is  established. 

The  second  wind  usually  comes  after  the  first 
fifteen  minutes  of  work.  Quickly  acquired,  it  means 
rapid  and  easy  adjustment  of  processes,  a  quick  re- 
sponse to  effort,  and  little  power  wasted.  Though 
individuals  differ  in  this  respect,  a  difficulty  in  get- 
ting the  second  wind,  when  exercise  has  been  sus- 
pended for  a  time,  will  sometimes  be  experienced, 
and  care  should  be  taken  not  to  overwork  when  tak- 
ing up  an  exercise  that  has  been  for  some  time  dis- 
continued. 

When  you  have  had  exercise  enough,  stop  and  rest. 
Change  of  occupation,  turning  from  active  mental 
work  to  active  muscular  work,  has  been  said  to  give 
rest  to  the  mental  faculties.  Though  they  perhaps 
do,  in  a  sense,  experience  rest,  it  might  be  unwise  to 
assert  that  this  rest  is  really  recuperative.  Repeated 
alternation  from  active  mental  exercise  to  active 
physical  exercise  would  inevitably  result  in  a  state 
of  exhaustion,  in  which  the  reserve  fund  of  energ)'- 
or  strength  would  be  completely  consumed.  It  is  a 
more  accurate  statement  that  a  certain  amount  of 
muscular  work,  which  will  restore  the  balance  of  the 
system,  is  a  good  preparation  for  rest  after  active 
mental  exertion. 

During  mental  work  of  any  kind,  muscular  work 
must  be  performed ;  for  breathing,  seeing,  moving 


196 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


the  hands,  require  muscular  movement.  The  ques- 
tion, therefore,  resolves  itself  into  one  of  degree  of 
work  done  and  equilibrium  of  forces  to  be  main- 
tained, rather  than  one  of  restoration  of  one  set  of 
faculties  by  the  overtaxing  of  another  set.  Good 
muscular  work  cannot  be  accomplished  without  the 
exercise  of  brain  and  will;  therefore,  v;hen  the  mind 
is  actively  employed,  a  certain  amount  of  muscular 
tissue  is  consumed,  though  not  enough  to  maintain 
the  system  in  a  state  of  bodily  activity.  For  body 
and  mind,  to  be  in  a  state  of  perfect  health  or  equi- 
librium, should  be  equally  active. 

The  tissues  of  the  body  are  constantly  renewed, 
and  the  amount  of  work,  mental  or  muscular,  that 
can  be  accomplished  is  determined  by  these  con- 
stantly renewing  processes.  The  amount  of  material 
taken  up  and  stored  for  use  depends  upon  the  amount 
of  material  needed ;  and  this  is  gauged  by  the  amount 
of  work  already  done,  and  restricted  by  the  amount 
of  work  the  material  is  capable  of  performing.  The 
balance  of  w^ork  and  rest,  quantity  and  quality, 
varies  with  different  temperaments. 

Training  means  nothing  more  than  preparation. 
For  those  engaged  in  active  mental  occupation  it  is 
well  to  consider  if  they  are  giving  themselves  the 
best  preparation  for  resisting  the  fatigue  consequent 
upon  their  occupation.  Cycling  is  a  pastime  and 
sport,  and  may  be  a  relaxation  and  the  alternate  of 
other  athletic  exercises.  After  the  machine  is  under 
control,  the  muscular  work  becomes  virtualh'  auto- 
matic; and  for  this  reason  cycling,  in  its  various 
forms,  has  proved  so  beneficial  as  a  relaxation. 


BREATHLESSNESS;  LIMIT  MECHANICAL.  197 

Overwork  produces  the  effect  of  poisoning  of  the 
system,  and  reduces  its  power  of  resistance.  This 
poisoning  is  produced  by  the  waste  products  of  the 
system,  which  accumulate  during  work,  as  the  forces 
for  eliminating  them  are  overtaxed;  and  before 
work  can  be  properly  resumed,  the  poison  must  be 
eliminated  from  the  system,  and  the  power-producing 
materials  again  stored  for  use. 

Stiffness  is  a  form  of  fatigue  due  to  an  accumula- 
tion of  deposits  in  the  tissues,  which  are  best  removed 
by  exercising  after  a  period  of  rest.  With  their  re- 
moval, stiffness  disappears,  to  return  with  fresh  de- 
posits if  exercise  is  again  prolonged.  The  amount 
of  material  not  taken  up  by  the  system  lessens  with 
regular  exercise,  and  the  tendency  to  stiffness  grad- 
ually disappears.  The  only  remedy  for  stiffness  is 
work,  then  rest,  then  work  again.  Sleep  does  not 
always  come  to  the  over-tired,  and  w^e  may  therefore 
conclude  that  it  is  better  to  be  rested  before  attempt- 
ing to  sleep. 

A  pause,  to  be  recuperative,  need  not  be  prolonged ; 
fifteen  minutes'  rest  after  exertion  should  be  suffi- 
cient; and  during  a  day's  work,  this  fifteen  minutes' 
rest  between  changes  of  occupation,  not  including 
the  quiet  necessary  for  digestion,  w^ill  keep  one  fresh. 
A  pause  longer  than  fifteen  minutes  prepares  or  re- 
adjusts the  processes.  Do  no  work,  mental  or  mus- 
cular, for  at  least  an  hour  after  a  meal;  and  sleep  in 
a  cool — not  cold — well-ventilated  room. 

Low  tension  power  usually  accomplishes  its  object 
without  waste.  Work  done  at  high  pressure,  that 
might  be  done  at  low  pressure,  indicates  waste  of 


BICYCLING  FOR  LADIES. 


effort  under  strain.  The  intense  concentration  of 
effort  when  the  beginner  is  struggling  with  a  bicycle 
is  made  at  high  pressure.  The  excitement  of  the 
unexpected  probably  has  something  to  do  with  this, 
as  well  as  the  novelty  of  the  situation.  If  all  bicycle 
work  required  the  same  state  of  tensioii,  however,  it 
could  not  be  long  endured ;  the  strain  would  be  too 
great. 

There  is  a  certain  amount  you  can  do,  or  think  you 
can  do;  this  is  one  measure  of  your  capacity.  The 
work  you  do  is  done  by  stored  energy.  How  may 
that  energy  be  applied  to  give  the  best  results? 
The  intricate  workings  of  the  mind  we  may  not  at- 
tempt to  analyze:  what  we  do,  we  do  because  we 
wish  to,  or  because  we  ought,  or  because  we  must. 
Concentrated  effort,  persistent  effort,  continuous 
effort,  all  consume  force.  When  you  dread  any- 
thing you  have  undertaken  as  too  difficult  of  ac- 
complishment, just  so  much  more  force  is  required 
to  overcome  that  idea.  If,  mounted  on  your  bicycle, 
you  wheel  along  in  a  state  of  apprehension,  you  in- 
duce a  high  nervous  tension  that  requires  a  great 
reserve  of  power  to  resist  and  supply.  Fear,  or  a 
sense  of  insecurity,  or  a  lack  of  confidence,  produces 
the  same  result.  A  bicycle  is  run  by  the  direct 
application  of  power;  and  power  diverted  is  power 
wasted. 

In  wheeling,  after  the  invigorating  freshness  of  the 
exercise  has  reached  a  certain  point,  the  benefit  de- 
rived lessens  with  the  amount  of  power  drawn  from 
the  reserve.  Bicycle  exercise,  moreover,  to  be  really 
beneficial,  should  be  alternated  with  other  exercise. 


BREATHLESSNESS;  LIMIT  MECHANICAL.  199 


The  bicycle  freshens  and  brings  into  g-ood  condition 
muscles  already  developed,  but  it  is  an  exercise  that 
must  be  taken  with  judgment.  It  is  not  a  panacea 
for  all  human  ills;  it  can  be  generally  beneficial,  or, 
immoderately  indulged,  may  become  most  harmful. 

Wheeling  for  long  distances  should  not  be  under- 
taken without  proper  training.  For  the  sedentary, 
and  for  all  others  tempted  by  the  fascinations  of  the 
sport  to  over-exertion,  caution  is  most  necessar5\ 
Reaction  from  over-exertion  will  bring  about  a  phy- 
sical condition  as  detrimental  as  that  caused  by  lack 
of  exercise — general  lassitude  and  unfitness  for  work, 
if  nothing  more  serious. 

Persons  who  are  naturally  timid  cannot  accomplish 
in  the  same  time  as  much  as  the  more  courageous, 
for  their  powers  are  actively  at  work  overcoming 
their  dread  of  collision  and  fear  of  falling;  and  the 
distance  covered,  for  power  expended,  must  conse- 
quently be  less  than  when  no  other  exertion  is  re- 
quired than  is  needed  for  propelling  the  bicycle. 

Learn  to  work  without  strain  or  effort;  practise 
where  fear  is  not  likely  to  be  aroused,  for  fear  in- 
duces a  state  of  tension,  and  bicycling  cannot  be  en- 
joyed or  prolonged  if  this  drain  of  the  power-supply 
is  allowed.  Confidence  will  come  with  the  knowl- 
edge that  you  are  no  longer  at  the  mercy  of  the  ma- 
chine, that  it  is  in  your  power. 

No  one  make  of  bicycle  is  acknowledged  the  best, 
and  no  one  is  absolutely  perfect.  The  selection  of  a 
bicycle,  therefore,  is  a  matter  of  knowledge  and  nice 
discrimination,  and  its  use  opens  a  wide  field  of  op- 
portunity before  you  —  touring  and  cruising,  and 


200 


BICYCLIXG  FOR  LADIES, 


expeditions  of  all  kinds;  travel  and  sight-seeing; 
means  for  study  and  investigation. 

The  possible  cost  of  cycling  may  be  quite  appal- 
ling to  consider;  but  in  cycling,  as  in  other  things, 
you  may  choose  between  the  demands  of  necessity 
and  the  suggestions  of  luxury.  One — almost  the 
chief — fascination  of  the  sport  is  its  simplicity  as  a 
mode  of  travel;  the  possibility  of  doing  away  with 
all  impedimenta.  The  bicyclist  soon  learns  to  dis- 
pense with  every  accessory  not  positively  necessary 
and  to  know  every  possible  use  of  indispensable 
articles. 

The  bicycle  bestows  and  restores  health;  it  has 
its  limit,  though  it  does  so  much  that  more  seems 
always  possible.  Take  the  bicycle  as  it  is,  use  it  in- 
telligently, enjoy  it,  and  become  an  enthusiast. 


